Mitsubishi 2020 Eclipse Cross User Manual

2020 / Owner’s Manual

Printed in Japan

MITSUBISHI MOTORS

9290K034

N09200102417

Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI ECLIPSE CROSS.

We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered

for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly

reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the

many features that are included in the ECLIPSE CROSS. The Owner’s

Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the

operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you

with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of

your vehicle.

Please note that this manual applies to all ECLIPSE CROSS models

and explains all features including options. Some features explained in

this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale.

The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-

tained here.

This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment

available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to

make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any

obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.

Introduction

Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.

These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the

instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-

cle.

Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if

instructions are not followed.

Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor

personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

You will see another important symbol:

Gives helpful information.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read

“on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in the “Driving

safety” and “Features and controls” sections.

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

N09349100057

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Table of contents

Overview

Quick index

General information

Seat and restraint systems

Features and controls

Driving safety

Comfort controls

For emergencies

Vehicle care and maintenance

Customer assistance/

Reporting Safety Defects

Specifications

Alphabetical index

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Instruments and controls

1-1

Overview

N00100202951

Instruments and controls

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-191

Automatic High Beam (AHB) switch (if so equipped) P.5-194

Turn signal lever P.5-199

Front fog light switch P.5-201

Steering wheel audio remote control switches [For

DISPLAY AUDIO and Smartphone Link Display

Audio, refer to the separate owner’s manual.]

Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch P.5-85

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -

driver’s airbag P.4-30, 4-36

Horn switch P.5-209

Instrument cluster

P.5-142

Windshield wiper and washer switch P.5-201

Rear window wiper and washer switch P.5-206

Cruise control switches P.5-87, 5-92

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever P.5-53

Engine switch (if so

equipped) P.5-19

Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter (if so equipped) P.5-67

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch

(if so equipped) P.5-123

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) ON/OFF switch

(if so equipped) P.5-108

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -

driver’s knee airbag P.4-36

Ignition switch (if so equipped) P.5-60

Head Up Display (HUD) switches

(if so equipped) P.5-187

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) P.5-199

Camera switch P.5-137

Hands free switches (if so equipped)

Multi-information display switches P.5-145

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped) P.5-187

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Instruments and controls

Overview 1-2

Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-200

Electric rear window defogger

switch P.5-207

Fuel tank filler door release lever P.3-3

Engine hood release

lever P.9-3

Floor console box P.5-222

Arm rest P.4-6

12 V power outlet

(Type 1) P.5-211

Air conditioning P.7-6, 7-15

Passenger’s airbag off indicator P.4-30, 4-35

Theft-alarm indicator P.5-41

Front passenger seat belt warning light P.4-19

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) P.5-208

Heated seat switch (for the rear seats)

(if so equipped) P.4-8

Side vents P.7-3

ECO mode switch P.5-201

USB input terminal

P.5-209

Center vents P.7-3

Fuses P.9-23

Front drink holder

P.5-222

Side vents P.7-3

12 V power outlet (Type 2) P.5-211

Touchpad Controller

(if so equipped)

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Instruments and controls

1-3 Overview

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -

front passenger’s airbag P. 4-30, 4-36

Glove compartment P.5-221

Card holder P.5-221

S-AWC drive mode-selector (if so equipped)

P.5-71

Parking brake lever P.5-50

Heated seat switches (for the front

seats) P.4-8

Selector lever P.5-63

Brake auto hold switch P.5-77

S-AWC drive mode

selector (if so equipped)

P.5-71

Electric parking brake typeParking brake lever type

Heated seat switches

(for the front seats) (if

so equipped) P.4-8

Electric parking brake switch P.5-50

Selector lever P.5-63

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) P.5-133

Audio (if so equipped)

[For DISPLAY AUDIO and Smartphone Link Display

Audio, refer to the separate owner’s manuals.]

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Interior

Overview 1-4

N00100302604

Interior

Sun visors P.5-210

Vanity mirror P.5-210

Ticket holder P.5-210

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) - side airbag P.4-30, 4-40

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-19

Seat belts P.4-13

Electric remote-controlled outside rearview

mirrors switch P.5-57

Lock switch P.5-45

Power door lock

switch P.5-37

Power window switch P.5-43

Rear seat P.4-6

Front seat P.4-3

Inside rearview mirror P.5-54

HomeLink

Wireless Control

System (if so equipped) P.5-212

Storing the rear seat belts P.4-20

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Interior

1-5 Overview

Assist grips P.5-225

Coat hook P.5-226

Bottle holder P.5-223

Head restraints P.4-9

Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-8

Rear drink holder (if so equipped) P.5-223

Cargo area cover (if so equipped) P.5-223

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -

curtain airbag P.4-30, 4-41

Dome light (rear) P.5-219

Front shade switch

(if so equipped)

P.5-46

Dome light (front) switch P.5-218

Front sunroof switch

(if so equipped) P.5-46

Dome light

(front)/Reading

lights P.5-218

Hands-free microphone

(if so equipped)

Dome light

(front)/Reading

lights P.5-218

Telematics Control Unit (TCU)

(if so equipped) P.3-5

Rear shade switch (if so equipped) P.5-46

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Luggage area

Overview 1-6

N00100501582

Luggage area

Luggage floor board P.5-226

Jack P. 8-5

Tools P.8-5

Luggage hooks P.5-226

Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-25

Cargo room light P.5-220

Convenient hook P.5-226

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Outside (Front)

1-7 Overview

N00100602913

Outside (Front)

Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-46

Windshield wipers P.5-201

Engine hood P.9-3

Front fog lights P.5-201, 9-28, 9-32

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-56

Side turn signal lights P.5-199, 9-28, 9-31

Side-view camera (if so equipped) P.5-133

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Power window P.5-43

Front turn signal lights P.5-199, 9-28, 9-31

Headlights, high/low beam

P.5-191, 9-28, 9-29

Headlights, high/low beam

P.5-191, 9-28, 9-30

Parking lights/Daytime running lights P.5-191, 9-28, 9-30Parking lights/Daytime running lights P.5-191, 9-28, 9-30

Halogen headlights type LED headlights type

Front side-marker lights P.5-191, 9-28, 9-30

Front side-marker

lights P.5-191,

9-28, 9-30

Sensor (if so equipped) [for Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM), Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Automatic High

Beam (AHB)] P.5-104, 5-123, 5-194

Rain sensor (if so equipped) P.5-201

Front-view camera

(if so equipped)

P.5-133

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Outside (Rear)

Overview 1-8

N00100602883

Outside (Rear)

Keyless entry system P.5-6, 5-29

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped) P.5-13

Locking and unlocking P.5-35

Tires P.9-12

Tire pressure monitoring system

P.5-126

Tire inflation pressures P.9-15

Changing tires P.8-6

Tire rotation P.9-17

Tire chains P.9-18

Size of tires and wheels P.11-7

Stop lights P.5-191, 9-28

Rear turn signal lights P.5-199, 9-28, 9-32

Spare tire P.8-7

License plate lights P.9-28, 9-34

Rear-view camera

P.5-131, 5-133

Rear window wiper P.5-206, 9-19

High-mounted stop light P.9-28

Antenna

Liftgate P.5-39

Rear side-marker lights P.5-191, 9-28

Tail lights P.5-191, 9-28

Back-up lights P.9-28, 9-33

Roof spoiler

Rear spoiler

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Quick index

N00200702380

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

NOTE

 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display” on page 5-144.

 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

Charging system warning light

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis-

tance.

P. 5-186

Brake warning light

 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully

released.

 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check

the brake fluid level.

 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard

braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for assistance.

P. 5-184

Electric parking brake warning light

(if so equipped)

 If the warning light comes on during driving, there is the possibility that the parking

brake cannot be operated or released. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice for assistance.

P. 5-184

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-2 Quick index

Engine malfunction indicator

(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or

“Check engine light”)

 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the

engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency

roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-

4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local

towing company for assistance.

P. 5-185

Electric power steering system (EPS)

warning light

 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the

steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-84

Anti-lock braking system warning

light

 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only

the ordinary braking system is functioning.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Test the system as described on page 5-82.

 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that

you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-82

SRS warning light

 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

P. 4-36

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Quick index 2-3

and

ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.

 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon

as possible.

 When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning and

normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.

P. 5-86

ASC indicator

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.

 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon

as possible.

 When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.

Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.

P. 5-80

Tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light

 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper

inflation pressure as soon as possible.

(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.)

Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes

of driving.

 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-

ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-

mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the

vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

P. 5-126

LED headlight warning light

(if so equipped)

 If the warning light comes on, there may be a malfunction in the LED headlight

unit.

Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

P. 5-193

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

If this problem occurs...

2-4 Quick index

N00200902148

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key.

(except for vehicles equipped

with the F.A.S.T.-key)

Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF”.

Check the position of the selector lever.

The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.

P. 5-61

The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.

(for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key)

Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.

Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch

while depressing the brake pedal.

P. 5-24

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

If this problem occurs...

Quick index 2-5

The engine does not start and the

operation mode cannot be

changed to OFF. (for vehicles

equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)

1. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then change the operation mode

to OFF.

2. One of the other causes could be low battery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless entry sys-

tem and the F.A.S.T.-key operation will also not operate. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

P. 5-20

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

ate.

(for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key)

Touch the portion of the F.A.S.T.-key to the engine switch, and then start the engine or change

the operation mode. Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the driver’s door.

P. 5-26,

5-27

Cannot shift the selector lever

from the “P” (PARK) position.

Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.

Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.

P. 5-63

The windows are fogged up.

Push the defogger switch to change to the “ ” position.

P. 7-3, 7-9,

7-13, 7-18,

7-22

The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.

The lights are dim.

The horn does not honk.

The horn sound is weak.

Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.

P. 8-2,

9-10

Problem Do this Ref. Page

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

If this problem occurs...

2-6 Quick index

Problem Do this Ref. Page

The information screen in the

multi-information display will

be interrupted and the engine

coolant temperature warning

display will appear. Also “ ”

will blink.

Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.

The engine is overheated.

Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.

P. 8-4

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

sand, mud or snow.

1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-

wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the “SNOW” or “GRAVEL” position

and then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving.

2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle out of the stuck posi-

tion.

P. 8-12

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

If this problem occurs...

Quick index 2-7

WARNING

 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to

suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.

 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.

If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

Problem Do this Ref. Page

The brakes are not functioning

properly after crossing a puddle

or stream.

Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.

P. 5-74,

6-5

The continuously variable trans-

mission (CVT) makes no shift

change when accelerating. The

initial movement of the vehicle

is slow when the vehicle starts

moving.

There may be a problem in the CVT.

If the or warning display on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if they

come on frequently, immediately have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

P. 5-68

A tire is punctured.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.

2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

P. 8-6

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

General information

Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2

Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)..............................3-5

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..................................3-12

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ..................................................3-13

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .............................3-13

Break-in recommendations ............................................................3-13

Event Data Recording ....................................................................3-14

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Fuel selection

3-2 General information

N00301002004

Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas-

oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank

filler pipe specifically designed to accept only

a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens-

ing nozzle.

In the United States, fuel suppliers are

required by law to add detergents to their gas-

oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and

minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent

gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission-control system working prop-

erly.

Your vehicle is designed to operate on

unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane

number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.

Gasoline sold at some service stations con-

tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although

the oxygenates may not be identified by those

names. Oxygenates are required in some

areas of the country. Oxygenated fuel can be

used in your vehicle.

A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-

hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used

in your vehicle, provided the octane number

is at least as high as that recommended for

unleaded gasoline.

Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-

taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this

type of alcohol could adversely affect the

vehicle’s performance and damage critical

parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.

Many areas of the country require the use of

cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-

lated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates

and is specially blended to reduce vehicle

emissions and improve air quality.

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-

ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-

erly blended reformulated gasoline has no

adverse effect on vehicle performance or the

durability of the engine and the fuel system.

Fuel selection

WARNING

 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-

sive. You could be burned, seriously

injured or killed when handling it. When-

ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the

engine and keep flames, sparks, and

smoking materials away from the vehicle.

Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out-

door areas.

CAUTION

 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will

damage the engine, catalytic converter, and

the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso-

line is illegal, and will void your warranty

coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,

and oxygen sensors.

Gasoline detergent additives

Octane requirement

NOTE

 Premium fuel is recommended to improve

the performance under severe conditions

such as hot weather or towing.

Oxygenated gasoline

Ethanol (Gasohol)

Methanol

Reformulated gasoline

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Filling the fuel tank

General information 3-3

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic

additive that is blended into some gasolines

to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi

Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-

lines without MMT.

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may

adversely affect performance, and cause the

malfunction indicator on your instrument

panel to come on. If this happens, contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Your vehicle may have been designed to sat-

isfy California’s low-emission regulations

based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.

Gasoline sold in parts of the country other

than California is allowed to have a higher

sulfur content. Using such gasoline could

adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-

verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-

cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or

“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina-

tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur

gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi-

cle’s emission-control system is malfunction-

ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer may suggest using a different, lower-

sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter-

mine if the problem is fuel-related.

N00301102018

MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl)

Sulfur in gasoline

NOTE

 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling during idling,

abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-

tion. If you experience any of these prob-

lems, try using a different brand of gasoline.

If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER-

VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine

light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as

soon as possible by the nearest authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

 Repeatedly driving short distances at low

speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel

system and engine, resulting in hard starting

and poor acceleration. If these problems

occur, you are advised to add a detergent

additive to the gasoline when you refuel the

vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-

its, thereby returning the engine to a normal

condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi

Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an

unsuitable additive could make an engine

malfunction. For details, please contact the

nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Filling the fuel tank

WARNING

 When handling fuel, comply with the

safety regulations displayed by garages

and filling stations.

 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-

sive. You could be burned, seriously

injured or killed when handling it. When

refueling your vehicle, always turn the

engine off and keep away from flames,

sparks, and smoking materials. Always

handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor

areas.

 Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,

be sure to get rid of your body’s static

electricity by touching a metal part of the

vehicle or fuel pump. Any static electricity

on your body could create a spark that

ignites fuel vapor.

 Perform the whole refueling process

(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-

ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not

let any other person near the fuel tank

filler. If you allowed a person to help you

and that person was carrying static elec-

tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.

 Do not move away from the fuel tank filler

until refueling is finished. If you moved

away and did something else (for example,

sitting on a seat) part-way through the

refueling process, you could pick up a

fresh charge of static electricity.

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Filling the fuel tank

3-4 General information

All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L)

Front-wheel drive vehicles: 16.6 gal (63 L)

1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.

2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear

driver side of your vehicle.

The fuel tank filler door can be opened

from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank

filler door release lever located at the left

side of the driver’s seat.

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly

turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-

clockwise.

4. Fueling correctly depends mainly on cor-

rect handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do

not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the

fuel tank filler port as far as it goes.

5. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

not add more fuel.

 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel

contains toxic substances.

 Keep the doors and windows closed while

refueling the vehicle. If they were open,

fuel vapor could get into the cabin.

Fuel tank capacity

Refueling

WARNING

1- Remove

2- Close

WARNING

 Since the fuel system may be under pres-

sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap

slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-

uum that might have built up in the fuel

tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound

stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,

fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.

NOTE

 While filling with fuel, store the fuel cap in

the cap holder (A) or hang it on the hook (B)

located on the inside of the fuel tank filler

door.

CAUTION

 Your vehicle can only be operated using

unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-

lytic converter damage will result if leaded

gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and

consequently, this must never be attempted.

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)

General information 3-5

6. To re-install, turn the fuel tank filler pipe

cap slowly clockwise until you hear click-

ing sounds, then gently push the fuel tank

filler door closed.

N00302500031

The Telematics Control Unit (TCU) uses a

mobile communication network to transmit

notifications (SOS emergency assis-

tance/Information assistance) in case of emer-

gency and vehicle information. The TCU also

allows you to use your smartphone to operate

some vehicle functions remotely.

 SOS emergency assistance

If a collision is detected or you press the

SOS switch (A), the system automatically

transmits the vehicle information to an

emergency call center, and will call the

emergency call center. If necessary, the

telephone call is forwarded to a PSAP

(Public Safety Answering Point).

CAUTION

 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not

“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could

discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-

work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it

off with a soft cloth.

WARNING

 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is

securely closed. If the fuel cap is loose, fuel

could leak, resulting in a fire.

CAUTION

 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap,

use only a cap specified for your model vehi-

cle.

NOTE

 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while

driving, the engine malfunction indicator

(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check

engine light”) may come on when the

onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs

a self check.

Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until

you hear at least 3 clicks.

The indicator will go off after several driving

cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-

tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice as

soon as possible.

Telematics Control Unit

(TCU)

(if so equipped)

NOTE

 To use the TCU, a user service agreement is

necessary. In addition, you must install the

smartphone app, agree to the terms of ser-

vice, and register as a user before using the

TCU.

For details including system limitations, con-

tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or visit the Mitsubishi Motors website.

https://www.mitsubishicars.com/owners/

service/manuals

 After you complete the registration using the

smartphone app, you will also be able to use

the telematics features on the owners portal

and call center service.

SOS emergency assis-

tance/Information assistance

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)

3-6 General information

 Information assistance

If you press the information switch (B),

you will be connected to the call center

and your vehicle information will auto-

matically be transmitted to the call center.

In the case of a breakdown, your tele-

phone call will be forwarded to roadside

assistance.

A- SOS switch

B- Information switch

WARNING

 In a country or area where no emergency

call center is available for the TCU, or

where radio waves for the emergency call

cannot be transmitted or received nor-

mally, the system will not operate. In this

case, use a cellular phone, etc., to call

directly for an emergency vehicle or road

service.

 If an emergency occurs and you smell fuel

or other unusual odor, do not stay inside

the vehicle. Exit the vehicle immediately

and move to a safe location.

 While waiting for rescue after making the

emergency call, take actions to prevent a

rear-end collision or other secondary acci-

dent and move to a safe location away

from the vehicle and traffic.

 In the following cases, use a cellular

phone, etc., to call directly for an emer-

gency vehicle or road service.

• When the system does not operate due to

a malfunction because of a collision, etc.

• When the vehicle is in a place where

radio waves cannot be transmitted or

received, such as indoors, in an under-

ground parking structure, in a moun-

tainous area, or in a tunnel.

• When the line to the emergency call cen-

ter is busy and the call cannot reach the

emergency call center.

NOTE

 This system transmits a notification to an

emergency call center, but it does not

directly arrange for an emergency vehicle or

road service.

WARNING

Flow of the SOS emergency

assistance/Information assis-

tance

A- Indicator light (red/green)

B- Cover

C- SOS switch

D- Information switch

E- Microphone

F- Door speaker (only front passenger side)

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)

General information 3-7

1. After setting the operation mode to ON,

the indicator lights (A) illuminate for

approximately 10 seconds. When approxi-

mately 10 seconds has elapsed after the

lights extinguish, the system is in the

standby state.

2. The system operates by the following.

[Automatic Report]

If your vehicle's airbags deploy or if the

unit detects that the vehicle was in a

severe collision, your vehicle automati-

cally will attempt to connect to the emer-

gency call center operator. Once

connected, information about your vehi-

cle, its location, and its condition will be

sent to the operator; you also can speak to

the operator when connected.

[Manual Report]

When you open the cover (B) and press

the SOS switch (C).

WARNING

 Do not remove or modify the above parts.

This can cause the system to not operate.

NOTE

 Although the information switch (D) is not

for use in emergencies, the operation is the

same as the operation of the SOS switch (C)

for SOS emergency assistance.

WARNING

 If the indicator lights do not illuminate

after setting the operation mode to ON,

there is a possible problem in the system.

Have the system inspected by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 If the indicator lights (A) remain illumi-

nated or illuminate again after setting the

operation mode to ON, there is a possible

problem in the system or the battery for

exclusive use of the TCU may be

exhausted. The battery life is approxi-

mately 3 years.

Have the system inspected or replace the

battery using an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

 When the system is not in the standby

state, the system does not operate. When

you drive, make sure to check that the sys-

tem is in the standby state.

NOTE

 Even if the SOS emergency assistance is in

the standby state, communication may not be

possible for a while depending on the radio

wave conditions.

WARNING

 Before pressing the SOS switch (C), stop

the vehicle in a safe place. If you operate it

while driving, your attention to the sur-

rounding conditions may be affected,

resulting in an accident.

CAUTION

 Do not open the cover unless you intend to

press the SOS switch (C). You may press the

SOS switch (C) by mistake. In addition, if

the cover is left open while driving, the cover

can cause injury in the event of an accident.

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)

3-8 General information

3. The green indicator light blinks and the

system calls the emergency call center.

4. The green indicator light blinks slowly,

and the location and vehicle information

is transmitted to the emergency call cen-

ter.

5. When the green indicator light changes

from a blinking state to an illumination

state a conversation with an operator of

the emergency call center is available.

6. The emergency call center arranges for

dispatch of the emergency vehicle as

required.

NOTE

 Do not press the SOS switch (C) unless there

is an emergency such as an accident or sud-

den illness. If an emergency vehicle, etc. is

dispatched unnecessarily, you may be

charged.

WARNING

 If the red indicator light illuminates as fol-

lows, directly arrange an emergency vehi-

cle or road service with a cellular phone,

etc.

• When the red indicator light remains

illuminated. (There is a possible problem

in the system.)

• When the red indicator light illuminates

for 60 seconds. (The vehicle may be in

the place where radio waves cannot be

transmitted and received.)

WARNING

 Do not replace the speakers. If they are

replaced, the voice of the operator at the

emergency call center may not be audible.

If the speakers need to be replaced due to

a problem, etc., we recommend you con-

sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

 An error may occur between the actual

report point and the point reported to the

emergency call center. Mutually confirm

the report point and the object through

the phone call with the operator of the

emergency call center.

NOTE

 If the vehicle side microphone (E) and/or the

speakers fail, you cannot talk with the opera-

tor of the emergency call center.

 An emergency call cannot be disconnected

from the vehicle side.

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)

General information 3-9

Indicator list

Situation

Indicator light

Cause Solution

Red light Green light

When changing the

operation mode to

Illuminates

(for approxi-

mately

10 seconds)

Extinguishes

The system check is in pro-

cess.

Wait for a while.

The indicator lights go off when the system check is com-

plete.

If the indicator lights do not illuminate, there is a possible

problem in the system. In this case, immediately have the

system inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

After approximately

10 seconds after

changing the opera-

tion mode to ON

Extinguishes Extinguishes The system works normally. −

Illuminates Extinguishes

There is a possible problem

in the system or the battery

may be exhausted.

Immediately have the system inspected at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

While the SOS emer-

gency assistance/

Information assis-

tance is activated

Extinguishes

Fast blink-

ing

 The system calls the

emergency call center.

 The system transmits the

location and vehicle

information to the emer-

gency call center.

−

Extinguishes

Slow blink-

ing

A conversation with an oper-

ator of the emergency call

center is available.

Mutually confirm the details of the SOS emergency assis-

tance/Information assistance with the operator of the emer-

gency call center.

If the green light does not extinguish even after the call

ends, have the system inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)

3-10 General information

 Alarm notification

When the vehicle's theft-alarm system is

activated, an alert is sent to the smart-

phone using a short message service

(SMS), e-mail, or push notification.

 Stolen vehicle tracking

The vehicle tracking function can be used

by the call center to provide the vehicle

location information quickly to police.

 Remote door lock/unlock

The vehicle doors and liftgate can be

locked and unlocked using the smart-

phone app and the owner portal.

 Remote climate control

The engine can be started and the air con-

ditioning can be operated using the smart-

phone app and the owner portal.

 Car finder

The location of the parked vehicle can be

confirmed using the smartphone app.

 Remote horn

You can make the horn sound using the

smartphone app.

 Remote lights

The lights can be turned on using the

smartphone app.

 Speed alert

If you set a vehicle speed limit beforehand

using the smartphone app and the owner

portal, an alert is sent to the smartphone

app when the vehicle speed exceeds that

limit.

When the SOS emer-

gency assistance/

Information assis-

tance failed

Illuminates

(for approxi-

mately

60 seconds)

Extinguishes

The SOS emergency assis-

tance/Information assistance

failed.

Activate SOS emergency assistance/Information assistance

again, or directly arrange an emergency vehicle or road ser-

vice with the nearest public telephone, etc.

Situation

Indicator light

Cause Solution

Red light Green light

Remote control

NOTE

 To operate the remote control functions from

a smartphone or to receive notifications

using the smartphone, you must install the

smartphone app and register as a user before-

hand. For details about using the functions or

changing the settings, visit the Mitsubishi

Motors website.

https://www.mitsubishicars.com/owners/

service/manuals

 The remote operation functions, other than

the alert notification, cannot be activated if

the vehicle engine is not started for 5 or more

consecutive days.

NOTE

 If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked

using the smartphone app and the owner por-

tal when no doors or the liftgate are opened

within a certain length of time, the doors and

the liftgate will automatically re-lock.

 Be sure to have the F.A.S.T.-key with you

before locking the vehicle.

It is possible to lock/unlock the vehicle even

when the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle.

If the smartphone app cannot be used for

some reason (e.g., your smartphone battery

becomes discharged), you need the F.A.S.T.-

key in order to unlock the vehicle.

 When the vehicle is locked or unlocked, the

power-folding outside rearview mirrors

operate and the theft-alarm system turns on

or off.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 10 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)

General information 3-11

 Geofence

If the specified area is set beforehand

using the smartphone app, an alert is sent

to the smartphone using a short message

service (SMS), e-mail, or push notifica-

tion when the vehicle enters or leaves that

area.

 Curfew alert

If the specified time of day is set before-

hand using the smartphone app and the

owner portal, an alert is sent to the smart-

phone using a short message service

(SMS), e-mail, or push notification when

the curfew is violated.

 Vehicle settings

You can change settings of items such as

“Auto Fold Mirrors” and “Headlight

Timeout when Exiting Vehicle” from the

smartphone app and the owner portal.

 Vehicle Status Report (VSR)

The vehicle communication and informa-

tion regarding malfunctions can be trans-

mitted using the TCU so that the

condition of the vehicle can be checked

using the smartphone app and the owner

portal.

 Over The Air Update

When software and firmware updates are

available, notifications via SMS will be

sent to you to install the updates. You can

also check for available updates manually.

Model name: LE920A4-NA Auto

FCC ID: RI7LE920A4NA

Your TCU operates on a radio frequency sub-

ject to Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) Rules (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.).

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested

and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of

WARNING

 Do not use the TCU if children, persons in

need of care, pets, etc., are in the vehicle.

Even if the remote climate control is used,

the cabin may become too hot or cold if

the system stops automatically or due to

some other reason. The cabin temperature

may quickly rise in sunshine, which poses

a risk of heat stroke and dehydration. In

cold weather, on the other hand, the cabin

temperature may quickly drop. Either of

which could lead to death in the worst

case.

In addition, children can activate switches

and controls, resulting in an injury or

fatal accident.

CAUTION

 When using the remote climate control, do

not use a car cover.

NOTE

 Air conditioning performance may deterio-

rate under the following conditions:

• In extremely hot weather

• In hot sunshine

• In extremely cold weather

 The remote climate control turns off auto-

matically after approximately 10 minutes.

The remote climate control can be operated

up to two times consecutively.

 Use the remote climate control according to

the state or local regulations regarding idling

vehicles.

General information

CAUTION

 Changes or modifications made to this

equipment not expressly approved by the

manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-

tion to operate this equipment.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 11 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

3-12 General information

the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radi-

ate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception, which

can be determined by turning the equipment

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures:

 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

 Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

 Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

N00301601218

This vehicle should not be modified with

non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.

Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures

high quality vehicles with an emphasis on

safety and durability. Modifications using

non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may

affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-

ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-

ble state and/or federal regulations.

DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-

LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-

TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR

VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED

UNDER WARRANTY.

Examples of modifications to your vehicle

that can cause damage or performance prob-

lems include the following:

 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine

parts

 Failure to use required fuel and fluids

 Failure to use proper size tires and wheels

 Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,

emission, suspension, engine, drive train

or electrical wiring systems

 Modification of any onboard com-

puter/control module, including repro-

gramming, or replacing/adding chips to

any onboard computer/control module

Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-

ual for further details regarding warranty cov-

erage.

N00301701293

 The installation of accessories, optional

parts, etc., should only be performed

within the limits prescribed by law, and in

accordance with the guidelines and warn-

ings contained within the documents

accompanying this vehicle.

Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-

sories should be fitted to your vehicle.

 Improper installation of electrical parts

could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica-

tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel

systems” section within this owner’s man-

ual.

Modifications to and racing

of your vehicle

Installation of accessories

CAUTION

 Before any electrical or electronic accesso-

ries are installed, consult an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis

connector (data link connector) for checking

and servicing the electronic control system.

Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con-

necting a device other than the Scan Tool for

inspections and service to this connector

because an unexpected problem could result.

In addition, malfunctions caused by connect-

ing a device other than the Scan Tool may

not be covered under warranty.

BK0277700US.book 12 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

General information 3-13

 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside

the vehicle without an external antenna

may cause electrical system interference,

which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-

tion.

 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-

ifications must not be used.

Refer to the “Specifications” section for

information regarding wheel and tire

sizes.

Due to the large number of accessory and

replacement parts provided by different man-

ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-

sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer to check whether the attachment or

installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-

ine parts affects the driving safety of your

vehicle.

N00301800141

Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality

vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is

important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer before installation of any

accessory which may involve modification of

the electrical or fuel systems.

N00301400219

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are

designed and manufactured to meet high stan-

dards of performance, and are recommended

for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-

able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are

a wide variety of accessories to personalize

your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors

vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors

authorized accessories to choose from to tai-

lor your new vehicle to your own personal

preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s

Parts Manager has information on various

audio systems, protection items, as well as

interior and exterior accessories available for

your specific model.

N00300100017

Certain components of this vehicle, such as

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and

button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate

materials.

Special handling may apply. For additional

information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

N00302600029

Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi-

cle without requiring a long break-in period

of low-speed driving.

WARNING

 While driving, do not use a cellular phone

in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-

thing, including cellular phone usage, that

distracts you from the safe operation of

your vehicle increases your risk of an acci-

dent.

Refer to and follow all state and local laws

in your area regarding cellular phone

usage while driving.

Important point!

Modification/alterations to the

electrical or fuel systems

CAUTION

 Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer concerning any such acces-

sory fitment or modification.

If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or

improper installation methods are used (pro-

tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic

devices may be adversely affected, resulting

in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts

California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements

Break-in recommendations

BK0277700US.book 13 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Event Data Recording

3-14 General information

However, you can add to the future perfor-

mance and economy of your vehicle by

observing the following precautions during

the first 300 miles (500 km).

Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during

the break-in period.

 Avoid revving the engine.

 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,

sudden acceleration, prolonged high-

speed driving and sudden braking. These

actions would have a detrimental effect on

the engine and lead to increased fuel and

oil consumption; this could ultimately

result in the malfunction of engine com-

ponents. Be particularly careful to avoid

full acceleration while in low shift posi-

tion (low gears).

 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within

the seating capacity.

Refer to “Cargo load precautions” on

page 6-10.

 Refrain from towing a trailer or other

vehicle.

Refer to “Trailer towing” on page 6-11.

N00302700059

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations,

such as an airbag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in under-

standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a

short period of time, typically 30 seconds or

less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

 How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

 Whether or not the driver and front pas-

senger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

 How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the vehi-

cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Event Data Recording

NOTE

 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only

if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-

ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,

name, gender, age, and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash inves-

tigation.

BK0277700US.book 14 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat and restraint systems

Seats .................................................................................................4-2

Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-3

Front seats ........................................................................................4-3

Rear seats .........................................................................................4-6

Heated seats (if so equipped)............................................................4-8

Head restraints .................................................................................4-9

Making a cargo area .......................................................................4-12

Seat belts ........................................................................................4-13

Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-21

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-21

Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-22

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-30

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-30

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seats

4-2 Seat and restraint systems

N00408401610

 To adjust the seat forward or backward 

Page 4-4

 To adjust the seatback  Page 4-5

 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat

only)  Page 4-5

 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-6

 To adjust the seat forward or backward 

Page 4-6

 To adjust the seatback  Page 4-7

 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-8

Seats

1 - Front seat

2 - Rear seats

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seats and restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-3

N00401601277

Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety

features that help protect you and your pas-

sengers in an accident.

Seat belts are the most important safety

device. When worn properly, seat belts can

reduce the chance of serious injury or death

in various types of crashes. For added protec-

tion during a severe frontal collision, your

vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-

gers. The seats, head restraints, and door

locks also are safety equipment, which must

be used correctly.

Always check the following before you drive:

 That everyone in your vehicle is properly

wearing their seat belt.

 That infants and small children are prop-

erly secured in an appropriate child

restraint system in the rear seat.

 That all doors are fully closed and locked.

 That seatbacks are upright, with head

restraints properly adjusted.

Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or

death in all motor vehicle accidents. How-

ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or

death, by following the instructions in this

manual.

N00401801484

Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-

ble while maintaining a position that still

enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily

control the steering wheel and safely operate

the vehicle.

Seats and restraint systems

WARNING

 Do not place objects under the seats. The

objects could prevent the seat from lock-

ing securely, which could lead to an acci-

dent. The objects may also cause damage

to the seat or other parts.

Front seats

WARNING

 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while

driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-

trol and result in an accident.

Manual seat adjustment Power seat adjustment

 After adjusting the seat, make sure that it

is securely locked into position.

 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious

injury or death during deployment of the

driver’s airbag, always properly wear the

seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far

back as possible while maintaining a posi-

tion that still enables you to fully apply the

pedals, easily control the steering wheel,

and safely operate the vehicle.

 To reduce the risk to the front passenger

of serious injury or death during deploy-

ment of the passenger’s airbag, always

properly wear the seat belt and adjust the

front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-

ble.

 Always place children 12 years old and

under in the rear seat and use appropriate

child restraint systems.

CAUTION

 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an

adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-

pected accident might occur.

 Do not place a cushion or the like between

your back and the seatback while driving.

The effectiveness of the head restraints will

be reduced in the event of an accident.

 When sliding the seats, be careful not to

catch your hand or leg.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Front seats

4-4 Seat and restraint systems

N00401901397

Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired posi-

tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the

seat in place.

Operate the switch forward or backward to

move the seat to the desired position. Release

the switch to lock the seat in place.

 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,

pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-

gers.

CAUTION

To adjust the seat forward or

backward

Manual seat adjustment

WARNING

 To make sure that the seat is securely

locked, try to move it forward or back-

ward without using the adjusting lever.

Power seat adjustment (Driver’s

seat only)

1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle)

2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-

cle)

NOTE

 To prevent the battery from completely dis-

charging, operate the power seat with the

engine running.

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Front seats

Seat and restraint systems 4-5

N00402001441

To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,

gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then

lean backward to a comfortable position and

release the lever. The seatback will lock in

place.

Operate the switch in the direction of the

arrows to adjust the seatback.

N00402101295

Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower

the seat.

To adjust the seatbacks

Manual seat adjustment

CAUTION

 The reclining mechanism used in the seat-

back is spring loaded, and will cause the

seatback to return quickly to the vertical

position when the lock lever is operated.

When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-

back or hold the seatback with your hand to

control its return motion.

Power seat adjustment (Driver’s

seat only)

1- Move forward

2- Move backward

NOTE

 To prevent the battery from completely dis-

charging, operate the power seat with the

engine running.

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death in the event of an accident or sud-

den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in

the upright position while the vehicle is in

motion.

Seat belt performance during an accident

can be adversely affected if the seatbacks

are reclined. The more a seatback is

reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-

mance will be adversely affected. If the

seat belt is not properly positioned against

the body during an accident, there is

increased risk you will slide under the belt

and receive serious injury or death.

To adjust the seat height

(Driver’s seat only)

Manual seat adjustment

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear seats

4-6 Seat and restraint systems

Operate the switch in the direction of the

arrows to raise or lower the seat.

N00402301112

The lid on the floor console box can be

moved forward and backward and used as an

arm rest.

N00402501273

When sitting in the rear seat, adjust the head

restraints to an appropriate height where they

lock in position. Refer to “Head restraints” on

page 4-9.

1- Raise

2- Lower

Power seat adjustment

NOTE

 To prevent the battery from completely dis-

charging, operate the power seat with the

engine running.

1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat

cushion

2- Raise or lower the seat

Arm rest (if so equipped)

Rear seats

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear seats

Seat and restraint systems 4-7

Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired posi-

tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the

seat in place.

N00402801032

Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback by

hand to the desired position, and release the

lever. The seatback will lock in place.

To adjust the seat forward or

backward

NOTE

 You can adjust the seat forward or backward

on either side separately.

WARNING

 To make sure that the seat is securely

locked, try to move it forward or back-

ward without using the adjusting lever.

CAUTION

 When sliding the rear seat rearward, make

sure that there are no items behind the seat.

To adjust the seatbacks

CAUTION

 If your vehicle is equipped with the arm rest

and the seatback is reclined while the drink

holder is used, drinks could be spilled. If the

spilt drink is very hot, you could be burnt.

NOTE

 You can adjust the seatback forward or back-

ward on either side separately.

 If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo

area cover, the seatbacks cannot be reclined

unless the cargo area cover is installed in the

rear position or removed.

Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 5-223.

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death in the event of an accident or sud-

den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in

the upright position while the vehicle is in

motion.

 Seat belt performance during an accident

can be adversely affected if the seatbacks

are reclined. The more a seatback is

reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-

mance will be adversely affected. If the

seat belt is not properly positioned against

the body during an accident, there is

increased risk you will slide under the belt

and receive serious injury or death.

 When a person is sitting in the center seat-

ing position of the rear seats, the two sides

of the rear seats must have the same for-

ward/backward position and the same

seatback angle.

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Heated seats (if so equipped)

4-8 Seat and restraint systems

N00403001347

To use the arm rest, tilt the arm rest down for

use as shown.

The arm rest includes a cup holder.

N00404201027

The heated seats can be operated with the

ignition switch or the operation mode in ON.

Operate the switch as indicated by arrows.

The indicator light (A) will illuminate while

the heater is on.

Arm rest (if so equipped)

CAUTION

 Never sit on an arm rest. Doing so could

damage the arm rest.

Heated seats (if so equipped)

WARNING

 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-

ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-

ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,

fatigue or other physical conditions or

who have sensitive skin may suffer burns

when using the heated seat even at low

temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,

people with such conditions must use care

when using the heated seat.

CAUTION

 Switch off the heated seats when not in use.

 Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for

quick heating. After the seat has become

warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-

tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the

seat temperature may be felt while using the

heated seats. This is caused by the operation

of the heater’s internal thermostat and does

not indicate a malfunction.

 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or

stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects

into the seat.

 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other

insulating material on the seat while using

the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-

ment to overheat.

 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,

kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic

solvents; doing so can cause damage not

only to the surface of the seat, but also to the

heater.

 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the

seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before

attempting to use the heater.

 Turn the heater off immediately if it appears

to be malfunctioning during use.

NOTE

 Do not use the heated seats for a long time

when the engine is not running, doing so will

cause the battery to be discharged.

For the front seats

1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating)

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Head restraints

Seat and restraint systems 4-9

Each time the switch is pressed, the mode

changes to the next one in the following

sequence: OFF  HI  LO  OFF.

N00404301640

Head restraints can reduce the risk of a whip-

lash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear.

The head restraints are equipped in the illus-

trated position.

To maximize the effectiveness of the head

restraints, adjust the seatback to the upright

position, and the head restraint to the proper

position. Sit back against the seatback with

your head close to the head restraint.

2 (OFF) - Heater off

3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat-

warm)

For the rear outboard seats

OFF - Heater off

HI - Heater high (for quick heating)

LO - Heater low (to keep the seat warm)

NOTE

 The rear seat switch will automatically

return to “OFF” after the engine is stopped.

Head restraints

WARNING

 Driving without the head restraints in

place can cause you and your passengers

serious injury or death in an accident. To

reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

always make sure the head restraints are

installed and properly positioned when

the seat is occupied.

 In order to minimize the risk of a neck

injury due to a rear impact, the seatback

must be adjusted to the upright position

and the head restraint must be adjusted to

the proper position before vehicle opera-

tion. The driver should never adjust the

seat while the vehicle is in motion.

 Never place a cushion or similar device on

the seatback. This can adversely affect

head restraint performance by increasing

the distance between your head and the

restraint.

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Head restraints

4-10 Seat and restraint systems

To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

adjust the head restraint height so that the

center of the restraint is at your ear level

when seated. Any person too tall for the

restraint to reach their ear level when seated

should raise the restraint to the highest locked

position.

 To raise the head restraint, pull it straight

up.

 To lower the restraint, push down on it

while pressing the lock knob (A) in the

direction shown by the arrow.

 After adjusting the height, push down on

the restraint to make sure it is locked in

position.

To raise the head restraint, move it upward,

and then push the bottom of the restraint rear-

ward.

To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

pull up the head restraint to the locked posi-

tion.

 To raise the head restraint, move it

upward.

 After adjustment, push the head restraint

downward and make sure that it is locked.

 To lower the restraint, move it downward

while pushing the height adjusting knob

(A) in the direction of the arrow.

Adjustment of the head

restraint height

Front seats and rear outboard

seats

Rear outboard seats

Rear center seat

BK0277700US.book 10 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Head restraints

Seat and restraint systems 4-11

Press the lock knob (A) in the direction

shown by the arrows. Then pull the head

restraint up and out of the seatback.

First check that the head restraint stalk with

the notches (B) is positioned toward the hole

with the lock knob (A), and then insert the

head restraint into the seatback.

And then insert it into the seatback. Push the

head restraint down while pressing the lock

knob (A) until the restraint locks into place.

To remove

WARNING

 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in

the event of an accident, the head

restraints must be properly installed and

positioned to proper height before vehicle

operation.

WARNING

 When a person sits in the rear seating

position, pull up the head restraint to a

height at which it locks in position. Be

sure to make this adjustment before start-

ing to drive. Serious injuries could other-

wise be suffered in the result of an impact.

NOTE

 If a front seat head restraint contacts the

headliner and cannot be removed, tilt the

seatback rearward slightly.

Refer to “To adjust the seatbacks” on page

4-5.

 To remove the head restraint from the left or

right rear seat, tilt the seatback forward

slightly.

Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6.

To install

NOTE

 Before installing the head restraint to the left

or right rear seat, tilt the seatback forward

slightly.

Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6.

BK0277700US.book 11 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Making a cargo area

4-12 Seat and restraint systems

N00405501131

N00405701162

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to

create an additional cargo area.

1. When folding the left side rear seat, store

the seat belt for the center seating position

of the rear seat.

Refer to “Detachable rear center seat belt”

on page 4-17.

CAUTION

 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out

as shown in the illustration. Then pull the

head restraint up to make sure that it is

locked in place and will not come out of the

seatback.

 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-

fers according to the seat. Always use the

correct head restraint provided for the seat

and do not install the head restraint in the

wrong direction.

Making a cargo area

WARNING

 Never adjust the seats to make a cargo

area when the vehicle is in motion or on a

slope. The seats could move more than

necessary or move suddenly causing a

serious accident and/or injury.

 When returning a seatback to its seating

position after folding down, make sure

that the seat is firmly secured. If the seat is

not secured, it could move causing a seri-

ous accident.

 Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area while the vehicle is in motion. People

who are not properly seated and

restrained can be seriously injured or

killed in an accident.

CAUTION

 In the cargo area, do not load the luggage

higher than the top of the seats and make

sure that the luggage is firmly secured.

Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-

ing the passenger compartment during sud-

den braking could result in a serious accident

and/or injury.

 Seats should always be operated by an adult.

Seat adjustments by a child could lead to an

unexpected accident.

 When adjusting the seats, be careful not to

catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could

result.

NOTE

 When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,

return it to the upright position before driv-

ing.

Folding the rear seatbacks for-

ward

NOTE

 You can separately fold the right and left side

of the rear seat.

To fold the seatbacks

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 12 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

Seat and restraint systems 4-13

2. Lower the head restraints of the rear seat

to the lowest position.

Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9.

3. Place the buckles in the pockets.

4. Adjust the rear seat to its most rearward

position.

Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6.

5. Pull up the lever (A), then fold the seat-

back forward.

1. Tilt the seatback up until it is locked prop-

erly in position.

2. Make sure the seatback is locked securely

in place.

N00406001553

Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help

reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-

senger in the event of an accident. Always

use the provided seat belts.

Carefully review the following information

for proper seat belt usage.

NOTE

 If you do not move the rear seat to its most

rearward position, items may fall into the

gap between the rear seat and the luggage

floor.

To return the seatbacks

Seat belts

WARNING

 To help reduce the risk of injury or death

in an accident, seat belts and child

restraint systems must always be used.

Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page

4-22 for additional information.

 Never use one seat belt for more than one

person.

 Never carry more people in your vehicle

than there are seat belts.

 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.

 Always place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never put

it behind you or under your arm.

 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible

across your hips, not around your waist.

 Never insert any foreign object, such as a

piece of plastic, paper clip, button or coin,

into the seat belt buckle.

 Never modify or alter the seat belts in

your vehicle.

BK0277700US.book 13 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

4-14 Seat and restraint systems

N00406201542

All seats are equipped with a seat belt which

uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with

an emergency locking retractor.

This system is designed to provide both com-

fort and safety. It permits full extension and

automatic retraction of the belts during nor-

mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the

retractor in the event of a sudden change in

the vehicle’s motion.

 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious

injury or death during deployment of the

driver’s airbag, always properly wear the

seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far

back as possible while maintaining a posi-

tion that still enables you to fully apply the

pedals, easily control the steering wheel,

and safely operate the vehicle.

 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-

ger of serious injury or death from a

deploying airbag, make sure the passenger

always wears the seat belt properly,

remains seated all the way back and

upright in their seat, and moves the seat as

far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen-

tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on

page 4-30 for additional information.

 Never hold an infant or child in your arms

or on your lap when riding in this vehicle

even when you are wearing your seat belt.

Never place any part of the seat belt you

are wearing around an infant or child.

Failure to follow these simple instructions

creates a risk of serious injury or death to

your child in the event of an accident or

sudden stop.

WARNING

 Children 12 years old and under should

always ride in the rear seat and be prop-

erly restrained. This reduces their risk of

serious injury or death in an accident,

especially due to a deploying front passen-

ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” on page 4-22 for additional

information.

 Any child who is too small to properly

wear a seat belt must be properly

restrained in an appropriate child

restraint system.

 Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing

child safety seat and positioned in the rear

seat.

 In the event of an accident, all seat belt

assemblies, including retractors and

attachment hardware, should be inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer to determine whether replacement

is necessary.

Seat belt instructions

WARNING

NOTE

 For instructions on installing a child restraint

system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a

child restraint system using the seat belt” on

page 4-27.

BK0277700US.book 14 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

Seat and restraint systems 4-15

1. Occupants should always sit back in their

seats with their backs against the upright

seatback. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death during deployment of the

airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back

as possible while maintaining a position

that still enables you to fully apply the

pedals, easily control the steering wheel,

and safely operate the vehicle. The front

passenger seat should also be moved as

far back as possible. Refer to “Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”

on page 4-30. Also refer to “To adjust the

seat forward or backward” on page 4-4.

2. Before using the rear center seat belt,

make sure that the detachable anchor is

securely latched and the seat belt is not

twisted. For details, refer to page 4-17.

3. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the

webbing so that it easily pulls across your

body.

4. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding

the latch plate. Push the latch plate into

the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull

up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is

locked securely in the buckle.

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death in the event of an accident or sud-

den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in

the upright position while the vehicle is in

motion.

Seat belt performance during an accident

can be adversely affected if the seatbacks

are reclined. The more a seatback is

reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-

mance will be adversely affected. If the

seat belt is not properly positioned against

the body during an accident, there is

increased risk you will slide under the belt

and receive serious injury or death.

BK0277700US.book 15 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

4-16 Seat and restraint systems

5. The lap part of the belt must always be

worn low and snug across the hips. Pull

up on the shoulder portion of the belt to

take up any slack in the lap belt.

6. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it

out and check for kinks or twists in the

webbing. Then make sure it remains

untwisted as it retracts.

NOTE

 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled

out, pull it once with force and let it retract

all the way.

Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

NOTE

 With the exception of the seat belt for the

driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-

tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the

seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-

tor will switch to its ALR child restraint

installation function (see page 4-27).

When the ALR function has been activated,

the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,

let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat

belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.

WARNING

 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and

is worn as low as possible across the hips,

not around the waist. Failure to follow this

instruction will increase the risk of serious

injury or death in the event of an accident.

 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not

twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may

adversely affect seat belt performance.

NOTE

 If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,

the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat

belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a

mild soap or detergent solution.

BK0277700US.book 16 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

Seat and restraint systems 4-17

N00409900051

The rear center seat belt can be detached to

fold the left side rear seat.

This seat belt must be worn correctly as illus-

trated.

1. Pull out the detachable anchor (C)

between the seatback and the seat cush-

ion.

2. Pull out the latch plate (A) and then pull

out the small latch plate (B) by tilting it as

shown in the illustration.

3. Pull the seat belt out slowly and pass it

through the seat belt guide (E) so that the

latch plate (A) is turned to the front side.

4. Pull the small latch plate (B) slowly and

insert it into the detachable anchor (C)

until a click is heard. Make sure that the

seat belt is not twisted.

Detachable rear center seat belt

WARNING

 Never detach the center seat belt except

when the left side rear seatback is folded.

Using the rear center seat belt with the

detachable anchor unlatched increases the

risk of serious injury or death in an acci-

dent. Make sure the small latch plate (B) is

properly latched to the detachable anchor

To attach

NOTE

 Pulling out the latch plate by force may dam-

age the interior trim.

NOTE

 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled

out, pull it once with force and let it retract

all the way.

Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

BK0277700US.book 17 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

4-18 Seat and restraint systems

1. While holding the center seat belt, insert

the latch plate (A) into the slot (F) in the

detachable anchor (C) to release the seat

belt from the detachable anchor.

2. Pass the seat belt through the seat belt

guide (E) and retract it completely toward

the rear trim.

3. After the seat belt is retracted completely,

insert the small latch plate (B) into the

upper slit (G) and the latch plate (A) into

the lower slit (H).

4. Store the detachable anchor between the

seatback and the seat cushion.

N00418401411

A tone and warning light are used to remind

the driver to fasten the seat belt.

 The seat belt can be buckled up by inserting

the latch plate (A) into the buckle (D) like

other seat belts.

 If the seat belt switches to the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) child restraint

installation function and cannot be pulled

out, detach the latch plate (A) and move the

rear seat fully backward.

Refer to “Installing a child restraint system

using the seat belt” on page 4-27.

To detach

NOTE

Driver’s seat belt

reminder/warning light and

display

BK0277700US.book 18 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

Seat and restraint systems 4-19

If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the operation mode is put in ON

without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a

warning light will come on and a tone will

sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind

you to fasten your seat belt.

If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still

unfastened, the warning light will blink and

the tone will sound intermittently until the

seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS-

TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-

mation screen in the multi-information

display.

N00418301276

The front passenger seat belt warning light is

located in the instrument panel.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, this indicator normally comes on and

goes off a few seconds later.

The light comes on when a person sits on the

front passenger seat but does not fasten the

seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-

sequently fastened.

N00406301367

The seat belt shoulder anchor height can be

adjusted. To move the anchor (A), pull the

lock knob (B) and slide the anchor to the

desired position.

WARNING

 In order to reduce the risk of serious

injury or death in an accident, always fas-

ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-

one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she

is also seated and fastening a seat belt.

Children should additionally be restrained

in a secure child restraint system.

NOTE

 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-

tened, the warning light and the tone will

issue further warnings each time the vehicle

starts moving from a stop.

Front passenger seat belt warn-

ing light

WARNING

 When a child booster seat is used on the

front passenger seat, the front passenger

seat belt warning light will not come on, if

the seat belt is not fastened when the

booster seat is used. Confirm that the

child is wearing the seat belt properly.

 Do not install any accessory or sticker that

makes the light difficult to see.

Adjustable seat belt shoulder

anchor (front seats)

BK0277700US.book 19 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belts

4-20 Seat and restraint systems

N00406501138

When the seat belts for the rear outboard seat-

ing positions are not used, the seat belts can

be stored.

Put the seat belt webbing in the back slot (A)

on the clip and insert the metal plate of the

latch plate into the front slot (B) as shown in

the illustration.

N00406701202

If your seat belt is not long enough, even

when fully extended, a seat belt extender

must be obtained. The extender may be used

for either of the front seats.

WARNING

 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so

that the shoulder belt is positioned across

the center of your shoulder without touch-

ing your neck. The shoulder belt should

not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-

ure to follow this instruction can adversely

affect seat belt performance and increase

the risk of serious injury or death in the

event of an accident.

 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when

the vehicle is not in motion.

 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in

position after adjusting it.

Storing the rear seat belts (out-

board seating positions)

Seat belt extender

WARNING

 The extender should only be used if the

existing belt is not long enough. Anyone

who can use the standard seat belt should

not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an

extender can adversely affect seat belt

performance in an accident.

 When not required, the extender must be

removed and stowed.

BK0277700US.book 20 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Seat belt use during pregnancy

Seat and restraint systems 4-21

N00406800134

Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-

nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant

women are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed in an accident if they do not wear

seat belts.

N00417701765

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each

have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner

system and force limiter system.

The driver and front passenger seat belts are

equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-

tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side

collision or when a rollover or overturning of

the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-

tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-

ment of the front airbags, side airbags or

curtain airbags.

The seat belt pre-tensioners are located in the

driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt retrac-

tors (A) and final anchor (B). When activated,

the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt

webbing and increase seat belt performance.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes

the following components:

The airbag control unit monitors the readiness

of the electronic parts of the system whenever

the ignition switch or the operation mode is

under the following conditions. These include

all of the items listed above and all related

wiring.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“START” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in ON.

Seat belt use during preg-

nancy

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death to pregnant women and unborn

children in an accident, pregnant women

should always wear a seat belt. The lap

portion of the seat belt should be worn

snug and low across the hips and below

the rounding. Consult your doctor if you

have any additional questions or concerns.

Seat belt pre-tensioner and

force limiter systems

Pre-tensioner system

1- SRS warning light

2- Front impact sensors

3- Seat belt pre-tensioner

4- Airbag control unit

5- Side impact sensors

6- Seat belt buckle switches

BK0277700US.book 21 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

4-22 Seat and restraint systems

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate

under the same conditions as the airbag con-

trol unit.

When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,

some smoke is released and a loud noise will

be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care

should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,

as it may cause some temporary irritation to

people with respiratory problems.

Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-

tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are

not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may

not activate in certain collisions, even though

the vehicle may appear to be severely dam-

aged. Such non-activation does not mean that

something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten-

sioner system, but rather that the collision

forces were not severe enough to activate the

system.

N00408701147

This warning light tells you if there is a prob-

lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat

belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS

warning light/display” on page 4-36.

N00408901152

In the event of an accident, the seat belt force

limiter system will help reduce the force

applied to the driver and front seat passenger.

N00407101812

When transporting infants or small children

in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint

system must always be used. This is required

by law in the U.S. and Canada.

Child restraint systems specifically designed

for infants and small children are offered by

several manufacturers. Choose only a child

restraint system with a label certifying that it

complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle

Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety

Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-

turer’s statement of compliance on the box

and child restraint system itself.

The child restraint system should be appropri-

ate for your child’s weight and height, and

should properly fit your vehicle’s seat.

For detailed information, refer to the instruc-

tion manual accompanying the child restraint

system.

All children should be properly restrained in

a restraint device that offers the maximum

protection for their size and age as specified

by local, state, or provincial laws.

Be sure to check local, state, or provincial

requirements for child size and age that may

vary from the recommendations listed below.

 Children less than 2 years old and who

weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST

ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that

MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

 Children older than 2 years of age and

who weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or

who are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall

must be in a forward-facing restraint used

only in the rear seat.

WARNING

 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is

designed to work only once. After the seat

belt pre-tensioners have been activated,

they will not work again. They must

promptly be replaced and the entire seat

belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

SRS warning

Force limiter system

Child restraint systems

Recommendations for child

restraint system selection

BK0277700US.book 22 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-23

 Children who weigh more than 40 pounds

(18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches

(100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should

use a suitable child seat or a booster seat

in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-

shoulder belt fits them properly.

WARNING

 All children must be seated in the rear

seat, and properly restrained.

Accident statistics show that children of

all sizes and ages are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat, rather than in

the front seat.

 Be sure to select a child restraint system

that is appropriate not only for the child’s

size and age but also for your vehicle.

Some child restraint systems may not fit

your vehicle properly.

 Any child who is too large to use a child

restraint system should ride in the rear

seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt

properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-

tioned over the shoulder and across the

chest, not across their neck, and with the

lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,

not across their stomach. If necessary, a

booster seat should be used to help achieve

a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster

seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use

a booster seat that is certified as comply-

ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-

tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-

tions.

WARNING

 Never hold an infant or child in your arms

or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,

even when you are wearing your seat belt.

Never place any part of the seat belt you

are wearing around an infant or child.

Failure to follow these simple instructions

creates a risk of serious injury or death to

your child in the event of an accident or

sudden stop.

BK0277700US.book 23 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

4-24 Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front

passenger’s airbag.

Never put REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-

senger seat. This places the infant too

close to the passenger’s airbag. During

deployment of that airbag, the infant can

be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing

child restraint systems or infant restraint

systems must only be used in the rear seat.

Airbag

WARNING

 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat

whenever possible. If one must be used in

the front passenger seat, move the seat to

the most rearward position and make sure

the child stays in the child restraint sys-

tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow

these instructions could result in serious

injury or death to the child.

 It is important to use an approved rear-

facing infant restraint until the infant is

one year old (unless the infant outgrows

the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s

neck and spine to develop enough to sup-

port the weight of their head in the event

of an accident.

 When installing a child restraint system,

follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer and follow the directions in

this manual. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death to your child in an

accident or sudden stop.

 After installation, push and pull the child

restraint system back and forth, and side

to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If

the child restraint system is not installed

securely, it may cause injury to the child

or other occupants in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

 When not in use, keep your child restraint

system secured with the seat belt, or

remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-

vent it from being thrown around inside

the vehicle during an accident.

 When attaching a child restraint system to

the rear seat, prevent the front seatbacks

from touching the child restraint system.

Otherwise, the child could be seriously

injured in the event of hard braking or a

collision.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 24 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-25

N00418801196

The outboard seating positions in the rear seat

of your vehicle are equipped with lower

anchors for attaching child restraint systems

compatible with the LATCH system.

N00418901243

Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the

backside of the rear seats. These are for

securing a child restraint system tether strap

to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your

vehicle.

NOTE

 Before purchasing a child restraint system,

try installing it in the rear seat to ensure

proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt

buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it

may be difficult to securely install some

manufacturer’s child restraint systems.

If the child restraint system can be pulled

forward or to either side easily on the seat

cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,

choose another manufacturer’s child restraint

system.

Depending on the seating position in the

vehicle and the child restraint system that

you have, the child restraint system can be

attached using one of the following 2 meth-

ods:

• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear

seat ONLY if the child restraint system is

compatible with the LATCH system (See

page 4-25).

• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-27).

Installing a child restraint sys-

tem using the LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for chil-

dren) system

Lower anchor locations

NOTE

 The symbols on the seatback show the loca-

tion of the lower anchor points.

Tether anchor locations

BK0277700US.book 25 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

4-26 Seat and restraint systems

N00419001212

N00419101314

1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

remove the head restraint from the loca-

tion where you wish to install the child

restraint system.

Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9.

2. Adjust the rear seat to its most rearward

position.

Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6.

3. Push the anchor connectors (A) on the

child restraint system into the lower

anchors (B) in accordance with the

instructions provided by the child restraint

system’s manufacturer.

Remember, the lower anchors (B) pro-

vided with your vehicle are designed to

secure suitable child restraint systems

compatible with the LATCH system in

the outboard positions of the rear seats

only. The anchor connectors are NOT

designed to secure a suitable child

restraint system in the center seating

position of the rear seat.

Examples of child restraint sys-

tems compatible with the LATCH

system

A- Rear-facing child restraint system

B- Front-facing child restraint system

C- Child restraint system lower anchor

connectors

D- Tether strap

(These are only examples.)

CAUTION

 Do not sit in the center seating position of

the rear seat when installing a child restraint

system on the left side of the rear seat.

Using the LATCH system

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the cargo area

cover, install the cargo area cover in the rear

position or remove it.

Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 5-223.

A- Connector

B- Lower anchor

NOTE

 In order to secure a child restraint system

compatible with the LATCH system, use the

lower anchor points in the outboard positions

of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the

vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,

however, MUST be used to secure a child

restraint system in the center seating position

of the rear seat.

BK0277700US.book 26 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-27

4. Latch the tether strap hook (C) of the

child restraint system to the tether anchor

bar (D) and tighten the tether strap so it is

securely fastened.

5. Push and pull the child restraint system in

all directions to ensure it is firmly

secured.

N00407301566

With the exception of the driver, the seat belt

in all other seating positions can be converted

from normal Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull

the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the

retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint

installation function. Always use the ALR

child restraint installation function when you

install a child restraint system using the seat

belt.

Children 12 years old and under should

always be restrained in the rear seat, when-

ever possible, although the front passenger

seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.

WARNING

 If there is any foreign material in or

around the lower anchors, remove it

before installing the child restraint sys-

tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away

from, not looped through or otherwise

interfering with, the child restraint sys-

tem. If foreign matter is not removed

and/or the seat belt interferes with the

child restraint system, the child restraint

system will not be secured properly, could

detach and move forward in the event of

sudden braking or an accident, and could

result in injury to the child or other vehi-

cle occupants.

 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust

the seat where the child restraint system is

installed.

WARNING

 Child restraint system tether anchors are

designed only to withstand loads from cor-

rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under

no circumstances are they to be used for

adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching

other items, or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing a child restraint sys-

tem using the seat belt (with

emergency/automatic locking

mechanism)

WARNING

 When you install a child restraint system

using the seat belt, always make sure the

retractor has been switched to the ALR

child restraint installation function. The

ALR function will keep the child restraint

system tightly secured to the seat.

Failure to convert the retractor to the

ALR function may allow the child

restraint system to move forward during

sudden braking or an accident, resulting

in serious injury or death to the child or

other occupants.

CAUTION

 Do not sit in the center seating position of

the rear seat when installing a child restraint

system on the left side of the rear seat.

Installation

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the cargo area

cover, install the cargo area cover in the rear

position or remove it.

Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 5-223.

BK0277700US.book 27 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

4-28 Seat and restraint systems

1. Remove the head restraint from the loca-

tion in which you wish to install a child

restraint system.

Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9.

2. Adjust the seat where the child restraint

system will be installed to the most rear-

ward position.

3. Adjust the seatback of the seat where the

child restraint system will be installed as

follows.

[For front passenger’s seat]

Adjust the seatback angle to six steps

rearward from the most upright position.

Refer to “Front seats: To adjust the seat-

backs” on page 4-5.

[For rear seats]

Adjust the seatback angle to four steps

rearward from the most upright position.

Refer to “Rear seats: To adjust the seat-

backs” on page 4-7.

4. Place the child restraint system on the

seat.

5. Route the seat belt through the child

restraint system according to the instruc-

tions provided by the child restraint sys-

tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat

belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure

you hear a “click” when you insert the

latch plate into the buckle.

6. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-

lation function, slowly pull the shoulder

part of the belt all the way out of the

retractor until it stops. Then let the belt

feed back into the retractor.

7. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.

If the belt is in the ALR function, you will

not be able to pull it out. If the webbing

can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR

function has not been activated and you

will need to repeat steps 6 and 7.

8. After confirming that the belt is locked,

grab the shoulder part of the belt near the

buckle and pull up to remove any slack

from the lap part of the belt allowing the

slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,

if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child

restraint system will not be secure. It may

help to put your weight on the child

restraint system and/or push on its seat-

back while pulling up on the belt (See

illustration).

9. Push and pull the child restraint system in

all directions to check that it is installed

securely.

If the child restraint system is not installed

securely, proceed to step 10.

BK0277700US.book 28 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-29

10. [For front passenger’s seat]

Repeat steps 8 and 9.

[For rear seats]

Adjust the seatback angle forward until

the child restraint system is firmly

secured, and then check that the seatback

is locked in place. Then push and pull the

child restraint system in all directions to

check that it is installed securely.

If your child restraint system requires the

use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap

in accordance with the following step 11.

11. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the

child restraint system to the tether anchor

bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is

securely fastened.

12. Before putting your child in the restraint,

push and pull the restraint in all directions

to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this

before each use. If the child restraint sys-

tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 4

through 11.

13. To remove a child restraint system from

the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,

remove the child from the restraint.

Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt

from the restraint and let the belt fully

retract.

14. Reinstall the head restraint.

Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9.

N00407601628

Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and

wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses

their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses

their stomach, a commercially available

booster seat must be used to raise the child so

that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder

and the lap belt remains positioned low

across their hips. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certifying

compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint

Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-

tions.

WARNING

 Child restraint system tether anchors are

designed only to withstand loads from cor-

rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under

no circumstances are they to be used for

adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching

other items, or equipment to the vehicle.

Children who have outgrown

child restraint systems

WARNING

 Any child who is too small to properly

wear a seat belt must be properly

restrained in an appropriate child

restraint system, to reduce their risk of

serious injury or death in an accident.

 A child should never be left unattended in,

or unsupervised around, your vehicle.

When you leave the vehicle, always take

the child out as well.

 Children can die from heat stroke if left or

trapped inside the vehicle, especially on

hot days.

 Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.

Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-

dren.

BK0277700US.book 29 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

4-30 Seat and restraint systems

N00407001417

Regularly check your seat belt buckles and

their release mechanisms for positive engage-

ment and release of the latch plate. Check the

retractors for automatic locking when in the

Automatic Locking Retractor function.

The entire seat belt assembly should be

replaced if the webbing shows any obvious

cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-

tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or

severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-

ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,

which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-

mance in an accident.

N00407701892

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-

bags for the driver and passengers.

The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-

ment the primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems by provid-

ing those occupants with protection against

head and chest injuries in certain moderate to

severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-

bags, together with sensors at the front of the

vehicle and sensors attached to the front

seats, form an advanced airbag system.

The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to

supplement the primary protection of the

driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the

forward movement of the driver’s lower legs

and provide increased overall body protection

in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-

sions.

The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags

are also designed to supplement the seat belts.

The SRS side airbags provide the driver and

front passenger with protection against chest

injuries by deploying the bag on the side

impacted in moderate to severe side impact

collisions.

The SRS curtain airbags provide the driver

and the passengers on the front seat and the

rear outboard seats with protection against

head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag

on the side impacted in moderate to severe

side impact collisions and by deploying both

curtain airbags when a rollover is detected.

The curtain airbags are also designed to help

reduce the risk of complete and partial ejec-

tion from the vehicle through side windows

Maintenance and inspection

of seat belts

WARNING

 Do not attempt to repair or replace any

part of the seat belt assemblies. This work

should be done by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

perform the work could reduce the effec-

tiveness of the belts and could result in a

serious injury or death in an accident.

 Never use an organic solvent to clean the

seat belt webbing. Do not attempt to

bleach or re-dye the seat belt webbing.

These may weaken the seat belt webbing,

increasing risk of injury or death in an

accident.

Clean seat belt webbing only with mild

soap or detergent solution and rinse it

with lukewarm water, and dry the seat

belt webbing completely before retracting

it.

Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem (SRS) - airbag

NOTE

 The SOS emergency assistance (if so

equipped) is designed to operate when any of

the airbags deploy or severe collision occurs.

Refer to “Telematics Control Unit (TCU)”

on page 3-5.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 30 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-31

in both side impact and rollover type acci-

dents.

The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use

of the seat belts. For maximum protection in

all types of accidents, seat belts must

ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or

rides in this vehicle (with infants and small

children in an appropriate child restraint sys-

tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-

led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint

systems” on page 4-22.

WARNING

 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS

WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY

EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.

• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-

sengers properly positioned. This

reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,

and reduces the risk of serious injuries or

death when the airbags inflate.

During sudden braking just before a col-

lision, an unrestrained or improperly

restrained driver or front passenger can

move forward into direct contact with, or

within close proximity to, the airbag

when it begins to inflate.

The beginning stage of airbag inflation is

the most forceful and can cause serious

injuries or death if the occupant comes in

contact with the airbag at this time.

• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in

rear impact collisions, and in lower-

speed frontal collisions because the air-

bags are not designed to inflate in those

situations.

• Seat belts reduce the risk of being

thrown from your vehicle in a collision or

rollover.

 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-

ERLY SEATED.

• A driver or front passenger sitting too

close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during airbag deployment can be

seriously injured or killed.

• Airbags inflate very quickly and with

great force. If the driver and front pas-

senger are not properly seated and

restrained, the airbag may not provide

the proper protection, and can cause

serious injuries or death when it inflates.

• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious

injury or death due to a deploying

driver’s airbag, always properly wear

your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat

as far back as possible, maintaining a

position that still allows the driver to

have good control of the steering wheel,

brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-

trols.

WARNING

• To reduce the risk to the front passenger

of serious injury or death from a deploy-

ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the

passenger always wears the seat belt

properly, remains seated upright and all

the way back in the seat, and positions

the seat as far back as possible.

• Seat all infants and children in the rear

seat, properly restrained in an appropri-

ate child restraint system.

 Airbags inflate very quickly and with

great force. Do not sit on the edge of the

seat or sit with your lower legs too close to

the instrument panel, or lean your head or

chest close to the steering wheel or the

instrument panel.

 Do not put your feet or legs on or against

the instrument panel.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 31 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-32 Seat and restraint systems

 Infants and small children should never

ride unrestrained, or lean against the

instrument panel. They should never ride

held in your arms or on your lap. They

can be seriously injured or killed in an

accident, especially when the airbags

inflate. Seat all infants and children in the

rear seat, properly restrained in an appro-

priate child restraint system. Refer to

“Child restraint systems” on page 4-22.

WARNING

 NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-

senger seat. This places the infant too

close to the passenger’s airbag. During

deployment of that airbag, the infant can

be seriously injured or killed.

Rear-facing child restraint systems or

infant restraint systems must only be used

in the rear seat.

WARNING

Airbag

 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat

whenever possible. If they must be used in

the front passenger seat, move the seat to

the most rearward position and make sure

the child stays in the child restraint sys-

tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow

these instructions could result in serious

injury or death to the child.

 Older children should be seated in the

rear seat with their seat belt properly

worn, and with an appropriate booster

seat if needed.

Refer to “Children who have outgrown

child restraint systems” on page 4-29.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 32 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-33

N00407801617

The SRS includes the following components:

The airbag control unit monitors the readiness

of the electronic parts of the system whenever

the ignition switch or the operation mode is

under the following conditions. These include

all of the items listed above and all related

wiring.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“START” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in ON.

The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit.

When the impact sensors detect a sufficient

front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),

the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.

When the airbag control unit detects rollover

of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be

deployed.

When airbags deploy, some smoke is released

accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is

not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale

the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-

tion to people with respiratory problems.

An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you

may not even notice that the airbag was

inflated.

Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver

from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,

and does not prevent people from leaving the

vehicle.

N00417901233

The driver’s seat position sensor is attached

to the seat rail and provides the airbag control

How the Supplemental

Restraint System works

1- Airbag module (Driver)

2- SRS warning light

3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator

4- Front impact sensors

5- Airbag module (Passenger)

6- Airbag module (Driver’s knee)

7- Driver’s seat position sensor

8- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica-

tion sensor system

9- Airbag control unit

10- Side airbag modules

11- Curtain airbag modules

12- Side impact sensors

CAUTION

 Airbags inflate very quickly and with great

force. In certain situations, contact with an

inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-

sions, and bruises.

Driver’s seat position sensor

BK0277700US.book 33 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-34 Seat and restraint systems

unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft

position. The airbag control unit controls

deployment of the driver’s front airbag in

accordance with the information it receives

from this sensor.

If there is a problem involving the driver’s

seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in

the instrument panel will come on. Refer to

“SRS warning light/display” on page 4-36.

N00418001374

The passenger’s seat occupant classification

sensor system is attached to the front passen-

ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-

trol unit with information regarding the

occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-

bag control unit controls deployment of the

passenger’s front airbag in accordance with

the information it receives from this system.

The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy

in an impact when the system senses no occu-

pant on the front passenger’s seat or a child in

a child restraint system. In this case, the pas-

senger airbag off indicator will come on.

Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on

page 4-35.

If there is a problem involving the passen-

ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys-

tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument

panel will come on. Refer to “SRS warning

light/display” on page 4-36.

WARNING

 If the SRS warning light or warning dis-

play comes on, have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer as soon as possible.

 Please observe the following instructions

to ensure that the driver’s seat position

sensor can operate correctly.

• Adjust the seat to the correct position,

and sit well back against the seatback.

Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

• Do not recline the seatback more than

necessary when driving.

• Do not place metallic objects or luggage

under the front seat.

 If the vehicle is involved in a severe

impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as

soon as possible.

Passenger’s seat occupant clas-

sification sensor system

WARNING

 If any of the following conditions occur,

you should immediately have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer as soon as possible:

• The SRS warning light does not initially

come on when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is under the following

conditions.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“START” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in ON.

• The SRS warning light does not go out

after several seconds.

• The SRS warning light comes on while

you are driving.

 To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-

pant classification sensor system can sense

correctly, observe the following instruc-

tions. Failure to follow these instructions

can adversely affect the performance of

the passenger’s airbag system.

• Adjust the seat to the correct position,

and sit well back against the seatback.

Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

• Do not recline the seatback more than

necessary.

• Never have more than one person (adult

or child) sitting on the seat.

• Do not place anything between the seat

and the floor console.

• When attaching a child restraint system,

secure it firmly.

• Do not place luggage or other objects on

the seat.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 34 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-35

N00418101375

The passenger’s airbag off indicator is

located in the instrument panel.

The indicator normally comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position

or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes

out a few seconds later. In the following situ-

ations, the indicator will stay on to show that

the passenger front airbag is not operational.

 The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.

 The system senses that a child is using a

child restraint system on the front passen-

ger’s seat.

When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi-

cation sensor system sense there is a person

seated in the front passenger’s seat, the indi-

cator goes out to show that the passenger’s

front airbag is operational.

• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.

• Do not modify or replace the seat and

seat belt.

• Do not place luggage or other objects

under the seat.

• Do not place and use an electronic device

such as a computer on the seat.

• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or

stick pins, needles, or other objects into

it.

• Do not remove the seat cushion skin.

• If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it

and dry the seat immediately.

 If the vehicle is involved in a severe

impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as

soon as possible.

Passenger’s airbag off indicator

WARNING

 If any of the following conditions occur,

you should immediately have the airbag

system in your vehicle inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as

soon as possible:

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator

comes on when an adult is sitting on the

front passenger seat.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does

not come on when the front passenger

seat is not occupied.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does

not come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position or the oper-

ation mode is put in ON.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does

not come on when a child is in a child

restraint system on the front passenger’s

seat.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator

comes on and goes out repeatedly.

 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-

cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off

indicator difficult or impossible to see.

You must be able to see the passenger’s

airbag off indicator and verify the status

of the passenger’s airbag system.

BK0277700US.book 35 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-36 Seat and restraint systems

N00408301710

There is a Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.

The system checks itself every time the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or

the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS

warning light will come on for several sec-

onds and then go out. This is normal and

means the system is working properly.

If there is a problem involving one or more of

the SRS components, the warning light will

come on and stay on. At the same time, the

warning display will appear on the informa-

tion screen in the multi-information display.

The SRS warning light/display is shared by

the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner

system.

N00407901357

The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-

ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s airbag is contained in

the instrument panel above the glove com-

partment. The driver’s airbag and the front

passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at

the same time. However, the front passen-

ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front

passenger seat is not occupied or when the

system senses that a child is in the child

restraint system.

N00404501046

The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is

SRS warning light/display

WARNING

 If any of the following conditions occur,

there may be a problem with the SRS air-

bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and

they may not function properly in a colli-

sion or may suddenly activate without a

collision:

• Even when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-

ing light does not come on or it remains

on.

• The SRS warning light and/or the warn-

ing display comes on while driving.

The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-

sioners are designed to help reduce the

risk of serious injury or death in certain

collisions. If either of the above conditions

occurs, immediately have your vehicle

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the SOS emer-

gency assistance, if the SOS emergency

assistance system operates, the SRS warning

light illuminates.

Driver’s and passenger’s front

airbag system

Driver’s knee airbag system

Driver

Front passenger

BK0277700US.book 36 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-37

designed to deploy at the same time as the

driver’s front airbag.

N00408001661

Deployment of front airbags

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …

Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h)

or higher

Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area

between the arrows

BK0277700US.book 37 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-38 Seat and restraint systems

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a

moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical

condition is shown in the illustration to the

left.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

designed to deploy only in certain moderate

to severe frontal collisions within the shaded

area between the arrows in the illustration to

the right.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main

structure is above a specific threshold level.

The threshold level is approximately 15 mph

(25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a

solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If

the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is

below this threshold level, the front airbags

and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This

threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-

cle hits something that absorbs the impact,

either by bending or moving (for example,

another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard

rail).

The initial stage of airbag inflation is the

most forceful, and can cause serious injury or

death if you are too close to the deploying air-

bag. Accordingly, it is important that you

always wear the available seat belt.

In certain types of front collisions, the front

airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not

deploy, even if the deformation of the body

seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body

structure is designed to absorb the impact and

deform in order to help protect the occupants.

Some typical situations where the front air-

bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy

are shown in the illustrations.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag do not protect the occupant in all types of

frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your

seat belts properly.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY

when …

The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag ARE NOT

DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when

…

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other

narrow object

Collision where the vehicle slides under the

rear body of a truck

Oblique frontal impact

BK0277700US.book 38 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-39

they cannot provide protection to the occu-

pants.

Some typical situations are shown in the

illustration.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag do not protect the occupants in all types

of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat

belts properly.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

may deploy if the underside of the vehicle

suffers a moderate to severe impact (under-

carriage impact). Some typical situations are

shown in the illustration.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex-

pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,

and these unexpected impacts can move you

out of position, it is important to always wear

your seat belts properly. When worn properly,

seat belts can help maintain your distance

from the airbags when they begin to inflate.

The initial stage of airbag inflation is the

most forceful and can cause serious injury or

death if you are close to the deploying airbag.

Rear end collision to your vehicle

Side collision to your vehicle

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when

…

WARNING

 Do not attach anything to the steering

wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-

rial, badges, etc. These could strike and

injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Collision with an elevated median/island or

curb

Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the

ground

BK0277700US.book 39 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-40 Seat and restraint systems

N00408101473

The side airbags (A) are contained in the

driver and front passenger seatbacks.

The side airbag is designed to inflate only on

the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even

with no passenger in the front seat.

There is a symbol on the seatbacks that are

equipped with side airbags.

 Do not set anything on, or attach anything

to, the instrument panel above the glove

compartment. Such items could strike and

injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

 Do not attach accessories to, or put them

in front of, the windshield. They could

restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and

injure an occupant, when the airbag

inflates.

 Do not attach additional keys or accesso-

ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the

ignition key. Such objects could prevent

the driver’s knee airbag from inflation

normally or could be propelled to cause

serious injury if the airbag inflates.

WARNING

 Do not attach accessories to the lower por-

tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.

Such objects could prevent the driver’s

knee airbag from inflating normally or

could be propelled to cause serious injury

if the airbag inflates.

 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-

semble or repair the SRS airbags.

 Do not place objects, such as packages or

pets, between the airbags and the driver

or the front passenger. Such objects can

adversely affect airbag performance, or

cause serious injury or death when the

airbag deploys.

 Immediately after airbag inflation, some

parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do

not touch them. You could otherwise be

burned.

 The airbag system is designed to work

only once. After the airbags deploy, they

will not work again. They must promptly

be replaced and the entire airbag system

must be inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

WARNING

Side airbag system

BK0277700US.book 40 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-41

N00419201331

The curtain airbags are contained in the front

pillar, the rear pillar and the side sections of

the roof.

The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only

on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,

even with no passenger in the seat.

Also, when the airbag control unit detects

rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags

will deploy.

Curtain airbag system

WARNING

 The side airbags and curtain airbags can

cause serious injury or death to anyone

too close to the airbag when it deploys. To

reduce the risk of injury from a deploying

side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and

front passenger must be properly

restrained and seated well back, upright,

and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean

against the door.

 In order to reduce the risk of injury from

a deploying side airbag, do not allow any

rear seat passengers to hold onto the back

of either front seat. Special care should be

taken with children.

 Do not place any objects around the area

where the side airbags deploy. Such

objects can interfere with proper side air-

bag deployment, and cause injury during

deployment of the side airbag.

 Do not place stickers, labels or additional

trim on the back of either front seat. They

can interfere with proper side airbag

deployment.

 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any

other object around the part where the

curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the

windshield, side door glass or front and

rear pillars and roof side rail. When the

curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or

other object may be hurled with great

force or the curtain airbag may not inflate

correctly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or

pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-

tain airbag was activated, any such item

could be propelled away with great force

and could prevent the curtain airbag from

inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly

on the coat hook (without using a hanger).

Make sure there are no heavy or sharp

objects in the pockets of clothes that you

hang on the coat hook.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 41 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-42 Seat and restraint systems

N00408201618

The side airbag and curtain airbag are

designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a

moderate to severe side impact to the middle

of the passenger compartment.

Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the

vehicle, the curtain airbags will deploy.

Typical situations are shown in the illustra-

tion.

 Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats

that have side airbags. Covers can inter-

fere with proper side airbag deployment

and adversely affect side airbag perfor-

mance.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint

system in the front passenger seat. Rear-

facing child restraint systems MUST

ONLY be used in the rear seat.

 Front-facing child restraint systems

should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.

If a front-facing child restraint system

must be used in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible, and

make sure that the child stays in the child

restraint system, properly restrained and

away from the door.

 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit

close to the passenger door, even if the

child is seated in a child restraint system.

The child’s head should also not lean

against or be close to the section of the

seatback where the side airbag and cur-

tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if

the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.

Failure to follow all of these instructions

could lead to serious injury or death to the

child.

WARNING

 Work done on or in the vicinity of the side

airbag or curtain airbag components

should be done only by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk

of a serious injury or death. Improper

work methods can cause accidental side

airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or

render a side airbag or curtain airbag

inoperable. Either of these situations

could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

Deployment of side airbag and

curtain airbag

The side airbag and curtain airbag

ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY

when...

Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the

vehicle body’s side structure

When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle

(Curtain airbag only)

BK0277700US.book 42 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-43

The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in an accident. The

SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are

designed to provide additional protection.

Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all

occupants, be sure to always wear your seat

belts properly.

In certain types of side collisions, the side air-

bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even

if the deformation of the body seems to be

large, because the vehicle’s body structure is

designed to absorb the impact and to deform

in order to help protect the occupants. There

are also cases where the side airbag and cur-

tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,

depending on the location of the impact.

Some typical situations where the side air-

bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are

shown in the illustrations.

Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

not protect the occupant in all types of side

collisions, be sure to always wear the seat

belts properly.

The side airbag and curtain airbag are not

designed to deploy in situations where they

cannot provide protection to the occupants.

Some typical situations are shown in the

illustration.

The side airbag and curtain airbag

MAY NOT DEPLOY when...

Side impact in an area away from the passenger

compartment

Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle

collision with the side of vehicle

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other

narrow object

The side airbag and curtain airbag

ARE NOT DESIGNED TO

DEPLOY when...

Oblique side impact

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag

only)

BK0277700US.book 43 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-44 Seat and restraint systems

Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

not protect the occupant in all types of colli-

sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts

properly.

N00408500669

Head-on collision

Rear end collision to your vehicle

Pitch end over end

SRS servicing

WARNING

 Any maintenance performed on or near

the components of the SRS should be per-

formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else

to do any service, inspection, maintenance

or repair on any SRS components or wir-

ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should

ever be handled, removed or disposed by

anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

Improper work methods on the SRS com-

ponents or wiring could result in an acci-

dental airbag deployment or could make

the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

 Do not modify your steering wheel or any

other SRS component or related vehicle

part. For example, replacement of the

steering wheel, or modifications to the

front bumper or body structure can

adversely affect SRS performance and

may lead to injury.

 If your vehicle has received any damage,

you should have the SRS inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to

make sure it is in proper working order.

 Do not modify your front seats, center pil-

lar or center console. Such modifications

can adversely affect SRS performance and

may lead to injury.

Also, if you discover any tear or open

seam in the seat fabric near the side air-

bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 If you have found any scratch, crack or

damage to the portion of the front and

rear pillars and roof side rail, you should

have the SRS inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

 When you transfer ownership of the vehicle

to another person, we urge you to alert the

new owner that it is equipped with the SRS

and refer that owner to the applicable sec-

tions in this owner’s manual.

 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,

we urge you to first take it to an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can

be made safe for disposal.

 If any of the following parts needs to be

modified for use by a handicapped person,

the advanced airbag system will be greatly

affected. Please consult an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

• Driver’s seat

• Front passenger seat

• Front seat belt

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 44 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-45

• Steering wheel

• Instrument panel

[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]

To contact Mitsubishi Motors North

America, Inc.

call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 6400

Cypress, CA 90630-0064

[For vehicles sold in Canada]

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of

Canada, Inc.

call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 41009

4141 Dixie Road

Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

NOTE

[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico]

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of

Caribbean, Inc.

call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean,

Inc.

Customer Service Department

P.O. Box 192216

SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

[For vehicles sold in Guam]

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

call (671) 649-3673 or write to:

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.

P.O. Box 6066

TAMUNING

GUAM 96931

[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors

call (670) 234-7133 or write to:

Triple J Motors

P.O. Box 500487

SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

[For vehicles sold in American Samoa]

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.

call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:

Pacific Marketing, Inc.

P.O. Box 698

PAGO PAGO,

AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799

BK0277700US.book 45 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-46 Seat and restraint systems

N00408601407

Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the

illustration.

Warning label

* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

BK0277700US.book 46 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Features and controls

Keys .................................................................................................5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)..............................................5-6

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)

(if so equipped) ..........................................................................5-13

Door locks ......................................................................................5-35

Power door locks ...........................................................................5-37

Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-38

Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-39

Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-41

Power window control ...................................................................5-43

Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped).....................................5-46

Parking brake .................................................................................5-49

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................5-53

Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-54

Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-56

Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-60

Starting the engine .........................................................................5-61

Turbocharger operation ..................................................................5-63

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...................................5-63

S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped) .....................5-70

4-wheel drive operation .................................................................5-72

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........5-74

Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles ......................5-75

Service brake .................................................................................5-76

Brake auto hold (if so equipped) ....................................................5-77

Hill start assist ................................................................................5-79

Brake assist system ........................................................................5-80

Active Yaw Control (AYC) ...........................................................5-81

Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-81

Electric power steering system (EPS) ...........................................5-84

Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-84

Cruise control ................................................................................5-87

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)..............5-92

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped) ....5-104

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)

(if so equipped)........................................................................ 5-113

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)....................... 5-119

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) .......................5-123

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ...................................5-126

Rear-view camera ........................................................................5-131

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)........................................5-133

Instrument cluster ........................................................................5-142

Multi-information display ...........................................................5-144

Indicator light, warning light, and information

screen display list .....................................................................5-163

Indicators .....................................................................................5-183

Warning lights ..............................................................................5-184

Information screen display .........................................................5-186

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)....................................5-187

Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-191

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)...................................5-199

Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-199

Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-200

ECO mode switch ........................................................................5-201

Front fog light switch ..................................................................5-201

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Features and controls

Wiper and washer switch ............................................................ 5-201

Electric rear window defogger switch ......................................... 5-207

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)............................. 5-208

Horn switch ................................................................................. 5-209

USB input terminal ...................................................................... 5-209

Sun visors .................................................................................... 5-210

12 V power outlets ...................................................................... 5-211

HomeLink

Wireless Control System (if so equipped)............... 5-212

Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-218

Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-221

Drink holders ...............................................................................5-222

Bottle holders .............................................................................. 5-223

Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ................................................ 5-223

Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-225

Coat hooks ...................................................................................5-226

Luggage hooks ............................................................................ 5-226

Convenient hook .........................................................................5-226

Luggage floor board ................................................................... 5-226

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keys

Features and controls 5-3

N00508801787

Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.

Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys

are provided.

Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency

key in a safe place together as a set of spare

keys.

Keys

Type 1

1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and

keyless entry system

2- Key number plate

Type 2

1- F.A.S.T.-key

(with electronic immobilizer and key-

less entry system function)

2- Emergency key

3- Key number plate

NOTE

 The key (except for the emergency key) is a

precision electronic device with a built-in

signal transmitter. Please observe the follow-

ing in order to prevent damage.

• Do not leave where it may be exposed to

heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on

top of the dashboard.

• Do not take the key apart.

• Do not excessively bend the key or subject

it to strong impacts.

• Keep the key dry.

• Keep away from magnetic objects such as

key rings.

• Keep away from devices that produce mag-

netism, such as audio systems, computers

and televisions.

• Keep away from devices that emit strong

electromagnetic waves, such as cellular

phones, wireless devices and high fre-

quency equipment (including medical

devices).

• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.

• Do not leave the key where it may be

exposed to high temperature or high humid-

ity.

 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of

the vehicle immediately contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer of the key number, they can

make a new key. The key number is stamped

on the key number plate. Keep the key num-

ber plate in a safe place separate from the

key itself.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

5-4 Features and controls

N00509101905

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

For information on operations for vehicles

equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to

“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)” on page 5-28.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-

nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle

theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-

bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be

achieved (subject to certain conditions) using

a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehi-

cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s

electronics.

 No keys other than those registered in

advance can be used to start the engine.

Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft

starting system)” on page 5-4.

Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security

Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic

immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on

page 5-28.

 When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-

tional status, the alarm operates if a door or

liftgate is opened after using the key, the

door lock knob or the power door lock

switch to unlock the vehicle.

 The system does not enter the preparation

state if the keyless entry system or the

F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-

cle.

Electronic immobilizer

(Anti-theft starting system)

CAUTION

 Do not make any alterations or additions to

the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-

tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.

NOTE

 In the following cases, the vehicle may not

be able to recognize the registered ID code

from the key. This means the engine will not

start even when the key is turned to the

“START” position.

• When the key contacts a key ring or other

metallic or magnetic object

• When the key grip contacts metal of

another key

• When the key contacts or is close to other

immobilizer keys (including keys of other

vehicles)

In cases like the above, move the offending

object(s) away from the key and turn the key

back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then

try to start the engine again. If the engine

does not start, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 The key may not operate properly when it is

near an object or facility that emits strong

electromagnetic waves.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

Features and controls 5-5

Only keys that have been programmed to the

vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the

vehicle.

If you lose the key, you can order a key from

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by

referring to the key number.

To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the

vehicle keys must be changed.

Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to

have your ID code changed.

To add a key, you must already have two reg-

istered keys. You need to register the ID code

to the vehicle.

Registering the ID code can be done by your-

self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or

by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-

low the “Customer key programming” proce-

dure below.

If you choose to have your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID

code, take your vehicle and all remaining

keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

N00562201208

You can program new keys to the system if

you have two valid (already registered) keys

and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for

your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors

dealer) by doing the following:

1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition

switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-

tion for 5 seconds.

2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and

remove the first key.

3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first

key, insert the second valid key into the

ignition and turn it to the “ON” position.

Approximately 10 seconds later, the

immobilizer display will start to blink.

4. When the immobilizer display starts

blinking, turn the second valid key to the

“OFF” position and remove it. Within

30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank

immobilizer key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform

this operation no more than 30 seconds

after the immobilizer display starts blink-

ing. When registration of the ID code is

complete, the immobilizer display will

come on for 30 seconds then go off. If an

error occurs, the blinking immobilizer dis-

play will go off during the procedure.

 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible

with commercially available remote starting

systems. Use of commercially available

remote starting systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and a loss of security pro-

tection.

 A system failure is suspected when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “START” posi-

tion, and the engine does not start. In such a

case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

Replacement keys

NOTE

Additional keys

NOTE

 You are provided with two keys, but you

may register up to eight keys.

Customer key programming

(Except for vehicles sold in

Canada)

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5-6 Features and controls

5. If you wish to register another key, per-

form the process again from step 1.

N00562301094

Your electronic immobilizer operates on a

radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-

cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-

cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada

Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This

device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules

and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS

standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

N00509002145

Press the key buttons to lock or unlock the

doors and the liftgate.

It can also help you signal for attention by

setting off the panic alarm.

NOTE

 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-

play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-

play screen may prevent you from seeing the

immobilizer display.

 It is not possible to register a key if:

• the immobilizer display goes off during the

procedure

• the immobilizer display does not come on

within 30 seconds after step 4.

 The procedure will be terminated automati-

cally if:

• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses

from the moment when the first key is

turned to the “OFF” position to the moment

when the second key is turned to the “ON”

position

• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses

from the moment when the second key is

turned to the “OFF” position to the moment

when the blank immobilizer key is turned

to the “ON” position

 To use the new keys, it is necessary to regis-

ter the key with both the electronic immobi-

lizer and keyless entry system.

Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-

tomer key programming” on page 5-9.

General information

CAUTION

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

Keyless entry system (if so

equipped)

LOCK ( ) button

UNLOCK ( ) button

3- PANIC button

4- Indicator light

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-7

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the

doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will also blink once.

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the

driver’s door only.

Within approximately 2 seconds, press the

UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all

the doors and liftgate.

The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.

The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

The front side-marker and parking lights will

also turn on for approximately 30 seconds.

Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-198.

Locking the doors and liftgate using the

LOCK button, the outside rearview mirrors

are retracted automatically.

Unlocking the doors and liftgate using the

UNLOCK button, the outside rearview mir-

rors are extended automatically.

N00543501127

The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless

entry system answerback function can be

changed as required. This is done with the

key removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-

tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-

matically retract or extend when the doors

and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using

the key buttons of the keyless entry system.

Refer to “Outside rearview mirrors” on page

5-56.

To lock

NOTE

 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the

horn will sound once.

To unlock

NOTE

 The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when

the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.

Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock

function” on page 5-8.

Operation of the outside rear-

view mirrors (Vehicles

equipped with the mirror

retractor switch)

To retract

To extend

NOTE

 Functions can be modified as stated below.

Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, it is possible to change

the setting by means of screen operations.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

• Automatically extend when the driver’s

door is closed and the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

In addition, automatically retract when the

ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” or

“ACC” position, and the driver’s door is

then opened.

• Automatically extend when the vehicle

speed reaches approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h).

• Deactivate the automatic extension func-

tion.

Answerback function

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5-8 Features and controls

N00597000030

The answerback function can be set in the

following three ways.

Each time the answerback function is set, a

chime will sound to tell you the condition of

the answerback function.

To change the setting, refer to “Customizing

the keyless entry system” on page 5-11.

N00597100031

The answerback function can be turned ON

or OFF separately.

To change the setting, refer to “Customizing

the keyless entry system” on page 5-11.

N00543601232

The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set to the following two conditions.

Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-

tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the

condition of the door and liftgate unlock

function.

To change the setting, refer to “Customizing

the keyless entry system” on page 5-11.

NOTE

 The answerback function will not operate if

any of the doors are open.

Horn deactivation/reactivation

Number of

chimes

Condition

One chime The horn will not sound.

Two chimes The horn will sound.

Four chimes

The horn will sound if the

LOCK button (1) is pressed

twice within 1 second.

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

Turn signal lights deactiva-

tion/reactivation

Number of

chimes

To lock To unlock

One chime One flash Two flashes

Two chimes One flash No flash

Three chimes No flash Two flashes

Four chimes Two flashes One flash

Five chimes No flash One flash

Six chimes Two flashes No flash

Seven

chimes

No flash No flash

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

Setting of door and liftgate

unlock function

Number of

chimes

Condition

One chime

When the UNLOCK button

(2) is pressed one time, all

doors and the liftgate unlock.

Two chimes

When the UNLOCK button

(2) is pressed one time, only

the driver’s door unlocks.

Within approximately 2 sec-

onds, press the UNLOCK

button one more time to

unlock all the doors and the

liftgate. [Factory setting]

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-9

N00543701086

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten-

tion as follows:

1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than

1 second.

2. The headlights will blink on and off and

the horn will sound intermittently for

approximately 3 minutes.

3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on

the key.

N00543801104

Only keys programmed with the vehicle’s

electronics can lock or unlock all doors and

the liftgate.

If you lose the key, you can order a key from

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by

referring to the key number.

To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the

key must be changed.

Take your vehicle and all keys to your autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your

ID code changed.

N00543901075

To add a key, you must already have one reg-

istered key.

Registering the ID code can be done by your-

self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer. For you to register the ID code your-

self, follow the “Customer key program-

ming” procedure below.

If you choose to have your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID

code, take your vehicle and any remaining

keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

N00544001259

You can program new keys to the system if

you have one valid (already registered) key

by doing the following:

1. Have available all (current and new) keys

you wish to register.

2. Using a valid (already registered) key,

activate the registration mode according

to the following steps. Steps ii to iv should

be completed within 8 seconds.

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

Using the panic alarm

Replacement keys

Additional keys

NOTE

 You are provided with two keys, but you

may register up to eight keys.

Customer key programming

(Except for vehicles sold in

Canada)

i) Press and hold the

UNLOCK button (2)

for 4 to 8 seconds.

ii) While holding the

UNLOCK button (2),

press the LOCK but-

ton (1).

iii) While holding the

UNLOCK button (2),

release the LOCK

button (1).

iv) Release the

UNLOCK button (2).

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5-10 Features and controls

3. Within 60 seconds after step 2, complete

the following ID code registration opera-

tion using the next key you wish to regis-

ter within 4 seconds.

4. To register the ID codes of additional

keys, repeat step 3 within 60 seconds after

step 3.

5. If no ID code of a key is registered within

60 seconds after step 3, the registration

mode is canceled and the normal mode

returns.

NOTE

 ID codes for all keys except for the key used

in step 2 are erased and the answerback func-

tion (door is locked and unlocked) informs

you that the registration mode has been acti-

vated.

i) Press both the LOCK

and UNLOCK but-

tons for 2 seconds.

ii) Release both the

LOCK and UNLOCK

buttons for 1 second.

iii) Press the UNLOCK

button. The answer-

back function informs

you that the ID code

registration of the key

is completed.

NOTE

 Be sure to press the buttons correctly when

performing the procedures. If you perform

the procedures incorrectly, the registered ID

code information could be deleted or the set-

tings could be changed unintentionally. If the

registered ID code information is deleted,

 For verification purposes, try to lock and

unlock the doors after the registration is

completed.

 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a

button is pressed.

 The keyless entry system does not work if

the key is in the ignition switch.

 The key can be used from approximately

40 feet (12 m) away. However, this distance

may change if your vehicle is near a TV

transmitting tower, a power station, or a

radio station.

 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed and no

doors or the liftgate are opened within

approximately 30 seconds, the doors and the

liftgate will automatically re-lock.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

 If the following conditions are observed after

pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-

ton on the key, the battery in the key may

need to be replaced.

• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked

or unlocked.

• The panic alarm cannot be operated.

• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not

come on.

 If you lose your key, please contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a replace-

ment.

 If you wish to obtain an additional key,

please contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer. A maximum of eight keys can

be programmed for your vehicle.

 To use the new keys, it is necessary to regis-

ter the key with both the electronic immobi-

lizer and keyless entry system.

Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system): Customer key pro-

gramming” on page 5-5.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 10 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-11

N00596500025

You can change the settings for the following functions according to your preferences. When changing a setting, perform the following steps.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position.

3. Complete steps i to iv of the procedure. Steps ii to iv should be completed within 8 seconds.

Customizing the keyless entry system

Item Step i Step ii Step iii Step iv Notification

Horn deactiva-

tion/reactivation

Press and hold the

LOCK button (1) for 4 to

8 seconds.

While holding the

LOCK button (1), press

the UNLOCK button (2).

While holding the

LOCK button (1),

release the UNLOCK

button (2).

Release the LOCK but-

ton (1).

Chimes

 Page 5-8

Turn signal lights

deactivation/reacti-

vation

Press and hold the

UNLOCK button (2) for

4 to 8 seconds.

While holding the

UNLOCK button (2),

press the LOCK button

(1).

While holding the

LOCK button (1),

release the UNLOCK

button (2).

Release the LOCK but-

ton (1).

Chimes

 Page 5-8

Setting of door and

liftgate unlock func-

tion

Press and hold the

LOCK button (1) for 4 to

8 seconds.

While holding the

LOCK button (1), press

the UNLOCK button (2).

While holding the

UNLOCK button (2),

release the LOCK button

(1).

Release the UNLOCK

button (2).

Chimes

 Page 5-8

BK0277700US.book 11 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5-12 Features and controls

N00546101124

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio

frequency subject to Federal Communica-

tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles

sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules

(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device

complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and

Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-

dard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

N00544101250

1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a

metal grounded object.

2. Remove the screw (A) from the key.

3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,

insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade

screwdriver into the notch in the key case

and use it to open the case.

NOTE

 Be sure to press the buttons correctly when performing the procedures. If you perform the procedures incorrectly, the registered ID code information could

be deleted or the settings could be changed unintentionally. If the registered ID code information is deleted, register the keys again.

Refer to “Customer key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-9.

General information

CAUTION

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

Procedure for replacing the key

battery

NOTE

 Be sure to perform the procedure with the

Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the

Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you

open the key case, the buttons may come out.

BK0277700US.book 12 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-13

4. Remove the old battery.

5. Install a new battery with the + side (B)

up.

6. Close the key case firmly.

7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that

it works.

N00503101176

The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-

ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the

liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine

to be started and the operation mode to be

changed simply by carrying it.

The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the key

of the keyless entry system.

Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security

Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry

system” on page 5-29.

 The Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)

number and the model number (radio certifi-

cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-

tion.

NOTE

+ side

- side

Coin type

battery

CR1620

NOTE

 You may purchase a replacement battery at

an electric appliance store.

 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can

replace the battery for you if you prefer.

CAUTION

 When the key case is opened, be careful to

keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch

the internal components.

Free-hand Advanced Secu-

rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-

key)

(if so equipped)

The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the

driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for

vehicle operations such as locking and

unlocking the doors and the liftgate,

starting the engine and changing the

operation mode. When leaving the vehi-

cle, make sure you are carrying the

F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.

WARNING

 Individuals who use implantable pace-

makers or implantable cardiovascular-

defibrillators should keep away from the

external and internal transmitters. The

electromagnetic waves used in the

F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of

implantable pacemakers and implantable

cardiovascular-defibrillators.

BK0277700US.book 13 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-14 Features and controls

The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-

key can be modified as stated below.

(Keyless entry operations are possible.)

For details, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

• Enabling only the locking and unlocking

of the doors and the liftgate

• Enabling only the starting of the engine

• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key

N00503201236

When a person enters the operating range of

the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-

key and presses the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate

lock switch or the liftgate open switch, verifi-

cation of the ID code is performed.

The doors and the liftgate can be locked and

unlocked and the engine can be started only

when the ID codes of the vehicle and

F.A.S.T.-key match.

A- External transmitter

B- Internal transmitter

WARNING

 Individuals using other electro-medical

apparatus besides implantable pacemak-

ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-

brillators should check with the

manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm

the effect of the electromagnetic waves

used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-

netic waves may affect the operations of

the electro-medical apparatus.

NOTE

 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic

waves.

In cases such as the following, operation

may be improper or unstable.

• The vehicle is near a facility that emits

strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV

transmitting tower, a power station, a radio

station or an airport

• The key is carried together with other com-

munication devices such as cellular phones

or radios, or electrical appliances such as

computers

• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a

metal object

• A keyless entry system is being used

nearby

• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down

• The vehicle is in a location with strong

electromagnetic waves or noise

Use the emergency key in such circum-

stances.

Refer to “To operate without using the

F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-27.

 The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing

reception operations in its communication

with the vehicle. This means that the battery

is always running down, regardless of how

often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery

life is approximately 1 to 2 years, depending

on the usage conditions.

 Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-

ing reception operations, the reception of

strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate

the running down of the battery. Do not place

near to electrical appliances such as televi-

sions or computers.

Operating range of the

F.A.S.T.-key

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 14 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-15

The operating range is within approximately

2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s door lock/unlock switches, the lift-

gate lock switch and the liftgate open switch.

N00503301107

The operating range is the interior of the

vehicle.

NOTE

 When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run

down or there are strong electromagnetic

waves or noise in the area, the operating

range could decrease or operations could

become unstable.

Operating range for locking and

unlocking the doors and the lift-

gate

*: Front of the vehicle

Operating range

NOTE

 Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the

F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked.

 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-

key is too close to the windshield, door win-

dows or liftgate.

 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within approxi-

mately 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s or

front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,

the liftgate lock switch or the liftgate open

switch, the system may not operate if the key

is close to the ground or in a high position.

 If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating

range, even a person not carrying the

F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors

or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s or

front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,

the liftgate lock switch or the liftgate open

switch.

Operating range for starting the

engine and changing the opera-

tion mode

*: Front of the vehicle

Operating range

NOTE

 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-

ing range, it may not be possible to start the

engine and change the operation mode if the

key is in a storage space such as the glove

compartment, on top of the instrument panel,

or in the door pocket or luggage compart-

ment.

BK0277700US.book 15 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-16 Features and controls

N00503401485

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock

switch (A), or the liftgate lock switch (B)

within the operating range to lock all the

doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will blink once and the

buzzer will sound once.

Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door

locks”, and “Liftgate” on pages 5-35, 5-37

and 5-39 respectively.

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the

operating range, you can unlock the doors

 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,

it may not be possible to start the engine and

change the operation mode if the key is too

close to a door or door window.

To operate using the F.A.S.T.-

key

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-

tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-

matically retract or extend when all the doors

and liftgate are locked or unlocked using the

F.A.S.T.-key function.

Refer to “Outside rearview mirrors” on page

5-56.

To lock

NOTE

Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock

switches

Liftgate switches

NOTE

 Be sure to have the F.A.S.T.-key with you

before locking the vehicle. Even if the

F.A.S.T.-key is left in the vehicle in the glove

compartment or other small storage compart-

ment, the vehicle may be locked depending

on the radio waves and other conditions in

the surrounding environment, trapping the

key inside the vehicle.

 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-

key does not operate.

• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar.

• The operation mode is not in OFF.

 The liftgate open switch (C) can be used to

confirm that the vehicle is locked properly.

Press the liftgate open switch within approx-

imately 3 seconds of locking.

 If the liftgate open switch is pressed 3 sec-

onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the

doors and the liftgate are unlocked.

 The time within which locking confirmation

is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the function can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

To unlock

BK0277700US.book 16 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-17

and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key

operation.

The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.

The turn signal lights will blink twice and the

buzzer will sound twice.

Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door

locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-35, 5-37 and

5-39 respectively.

Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch

(A) to unlock only the driver’s door.

Within approximately 2 seconds, press the

driver’s door lock/unlock switch one more

time to unlock all the doors and the liftgate.

Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock

switch (B) or the liftgate open switch (C) to

unlock all the doors and the liftgate.

Driver’s door lock/unlock switch

NOTE

 Settings can be changed so that all doors and

the liftgate are unlocked automatically by

pressing the driver’s door lock/unlock switch

once.

Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock

function” on page 5-31.

Front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch

NOTE

 If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked

using the driver’s or front passenger’s door

lock/unlock switch when no doors or the lift-

gate are opened within approximately

30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will

automatically re-lock.

 The amount of time after unlocking until the

vehicle re-locks automatically can be

adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer for details.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

 The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate when the

operation mode is not in OFF.

 The doors and the liftgate cannot be

unlocked by using the liftgate open switch

for approximately 3 seconds after locking.

Liftgate open switch

BK0277700US.book 17 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-18 Features and controls

N00585700102

Locking the doors and liftgate using the

driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock

switch or the liftgate lock switch or the

LOCK button on the F.A.S.T.-key, the outside

rearview mirrors are retracted automatically.

Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security

Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry

system” on page 5-29.

Unlocking the doors and liftgate using the

driver’s lock/unlock switch, front passenger’s

door lock/unlock switch or the liftgate open

switch or the UNLOCK button on the

F.A.S.T.-key, the outside rearview mirrors are

extended automatically.

Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security

Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry

system” on page 5-29.

 The time within which locking confirmation

is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the function can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

 Functions settings can be modified as stated

below.

See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for details.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

• Activating the operation confirmation func-

tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only

during locking, or only during unlocking.

• Deactivating the operation confirmation

function (blinking of the turn signal lights)

and buzzer.

• Modifying the number of blinks in the

operation confirmation function (blinking

of the turn signal lights).

• Making the buzzer sound when the

F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger

compartment when all the doors and the

liftgate are closed.

NOTE

Operation of the outside rear-

view mirrors (Vehicles

equipped with the mirror

retractor switch)

To retract

To extend

NOTE

 Functions can be modified as stated below.

Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, it is possible to change

the setting by means of screen operations.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

• Automatically extend when the driver’s

door is closed and the operation mode is put

in ON.

In addition, automatically retract when the

operation mode is put in OFF or ACC, and

the driver’s door is then opened.

• Automatically extend when the vehicle

speed reaches approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h).

• Deactivate the automatic extension func-

tion.

BK0277700US.book 18 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-19

N00513501131

To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys

other than those registered in advance can be

used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-

lizer function)

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine

switch can be used to start the engine.

The indicator light on the engine switch turns

off.

The operation mode cannot be put in OFF

when the selector lever is in any position

other than the “P” (PARK) position.

Allows operation of electrical accessories.

The indicator light on the engine switch illu-

minates in orange.

All electrical accessories can be used.

The indicator light on the engine switch illu-

minates in green.

The indicator light goes off when the engine

is running.

Engine switch

CAUTION

 The indicator light (A) will flash orange

when there is a problem or malfunction in

F.A.S.T.-key. Never drive if the indicator

light on the engine switch is flashing orange.

Immediately contact your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 If the engine switch operation is not smooth

and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the

switch.

Immediately contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

 When operating the engine switch, press the

switch all the way in. If the switch is not

fully pressed, the engine may not start or the

operation mode may not change. If the

engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no

need to hold the engine switch down.

 When the battery in the F.A.S.T.-key has

worn out, or the F.A.S.T.-key is out of the

vehicle, a warning display will appear.

Warning display (when the engine switch is

pressed one time)

Warning display (when the engine switch is

pressed two times or more)

Operation mode of the engine

switch and its function

OFF

ACC

NOTE

 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code

which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the

one registered to the immobilizer computer.

Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft

starting system)” on page 5-28.

BK0277700US.book 19 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-20 Features and controls

N00568001136

If you press the engine switch without press-

ing the brake pedal while the vehicle is sta-

tionary, you can change the operation mode

in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.

N00568101108

After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed

with the operation mode in ACC, the function

automatically cuts out the power for the audio

system and other electric devices that can be

operated with that mode.

When the engine switch is pressed while the

operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup-

plied again to those devices.

Changing the operation mode

CAUTION

 When the engine is not running, put the oper-

ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation

mode in ON or ACC for a long time when

the engine is not running may cause the bat-

tery to be discharged, making it impossible

to start the engine.

 When the battery is disconnected, the current

operation mode is memorized. After recon-

necting the battery, the memorized mode is

selected automatically. Before disconnect-

ing the battery for repair or replacement,

make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.

Be careful if you are not sure which opera-

tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery

is run down.

 The operation mode cannot be changed from

OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not

detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-

ating range for starting the engine and

changing the operation mode” on page 5-15.

 When there is the F.A.S.T.-key in the vehicle

and the operation mode is not changed, the

battery in the F.A.S.T.-key may have worn

out.

Refer to “Warning activation” on page 5-21.

NOTE

 If the operation mode cannot be changed to

OFF, perform the following procedure.

1. Move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position, and then change the

operation mode to OFF.

2. One of the other causes could be low bat-

tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless

entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key opera-

tion will also not operate. Contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

CAUTION

ACC power auto-cutout function

NOTE

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

• The time until the power cuts out can be

changed to approximately 60 minutes.

• The ACC power auto-cutout function can

be deactivated.

For details, we recommend you to consult an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

 When the ACC power is automatically cut

out, you cannot lock and unlock the doors

using the keyless entry system or F.A.S.T.-

key operation.

BK0277700US.book 20 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-21

N00503501301

With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given through buzzers and displays on the information screen in the multi-information display in order to pre-

vent mistaken operations or vehicle theft.

When a warning operates, be sure to check the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is also displayed if there is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key.

Warning activation

Item Display Buzzer Solution Note

Detection of failure Inner buzzer sounds

once

There is a problem in the

F.A.S.T.-key.

—

Fall of battery voltage Inner buzzer sounds

once

The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is

run down.

The warning is not activated if the

battery is completely dead.

BK0277700US.book 21 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-22 Features and controls

F.A.S.T.-key not

detected

Engine switch is

pressed one time

Inner buzzer sounds

once

When the engine switch is

pressed to change the operation

mode from OFF or when the

engine is started, the warning is

activated, if any of the following

conditions has occurred.

—

 Carrying another F.A.S.T.-key

with a different code, or the

F.A.S.T.-key could be outside

the operating range.

Engine switch is

pressed two times or

 The battery of the F.A.S.T.-

key is dead.

 Communication is blocked by

electric wave environment.

In such case, touch the F.A.S.T.-

key to the engine switch to

change the operation mode or

start the engine.

Refer to “If the F.A.S.T.-key is

not operating properly” on page

5-26.

Item Display Buzzer Solution Note

BK0277700US.book 22 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-23

F.A.S.T.-key take-out

monitoring system

Inner buzzer sounds

once

Outer buzzer sounds

intermittently

When the vehicle is parked with

the operation mode in any mode

other than OFF, if you close the

door after opening any of the

doors and taking the F.A.S.T.-key

out of the vehicle, a warning is

issued until the F.A.S.T.-key is

detected in the vehicle.

 The F.A.S.T.-key take-out moni-

toring system does not function if

the F.A.S.T.-key is removed

through a window without open-

ing a door.

This setting can be changed.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer for details.

 The warning may display even if

the F.A.S.T.-key is in the operat-

ing range for starting the engine

and changing the operation

mode. The surrounding environ-

ment or electromagnetic waves

may make it impossible to verify

the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key

and vehicle.

Key lock-in preven-

tion system

Inner buzzer sounds

once

Outer buzzer sounds

approximately 3 sec-

onds intermittently

When the operation mode is in

OFF, the F.A.S.T.-key is left in

the passenger compartment, all

the doors and the liftgate are

closed, and someone tries to lock

the vehicle by pressing the

driver’s or front passenger’s door

lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate

lock switch, a warning is issued

and you cannot lock the doors

and liftgate.

Make sure you have the F.A.S.T.-key

with you before locking the doors.

Even if you leave the F.A.S.T.-key

inside the vehicle, it is possible that

the doors will lock depending on the

surrounding environment and wire-

less signal conditions.

Item Display Buzzer Solution Note

BK0277700US.book 23 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-24 Features and controls

N00514601416

 The operation mode can be in any mode

to start the engine.

 The starter motor will be turning for up to

approximately 15 seconds if the engine

switch is released at once. Pressing the

engine switch again while the starter

motor is still turning will stop the starter

motor.

The starter motor will be turning for up to

approximately 30 seconds while the

engine switch is pressed.

If the engine does not start, wait for a

while and then attempt to start the engine

again. Trying repeatedly with the engine

or starter motor still turning will damage

the starter mechanism.

 If the engine will not start because the bat-

tery is weak or discharged, refer to

“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2

for instructions.

 A longer warm up period will only con-

sume extra fuel.

Door ajar prevention

system

Inner buzzer sounds

once

Outer buzzer sounds

approximately 3 sec-

onds intermittently

When the operation mode is in

OFF, and someone tries to lock

the vehicle by pressing the

driver’s or front passenger’s door

lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate

lock switch while one of the

doors or the liftgate is not fully

closed, a warning is issued and

you cannot lock the doors and

liftgate.

—

Operation mode OFF

reminder system

Inner buzzer sounds

once

Outer buzzer sounds

approximately 3 sec-

onds intermittently

When the operation mode is in

any mode other than OFF, some-

one tries to lock the vehicle by

pressing the driver’s or front pas-

senger’s door lock/unlock switch,

or the liftgate lock switch, a

warning is issued and you cannot

lock the doors and liftgate.

—

Item Display Buzzer Solution Note

Starting and stopping the

engine

Tips for starting

BK0277700US.book 24 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-25

The engine is warmed up enough for driv-

ing when the bar graph of engine coolant

temperature display starts to move. Refer

to “Engine coolant temperature display”

on page 5-150.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-

cally controlled fuel injection system. This

system automatically controls fuel injection.

There is usually no need to depress the accel-

erator pedal when starting the engine.

To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds

between attempts to restart the engine.

1. Make sure all occupants are properly

seated with seat belts fastened.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal down

firmly with your right foot.

4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”

(PARK) position.

5. Press the engine switch.

6. Confirm that all warning lights and warn-

ing displays are functioning properly.

After several attempts, you may experience

that the engine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, such

as lights, air conditioning blower and rear

window defogger, are turned off.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, press

the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it

there, then crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal, immediately after the

engine starts.

WARNING

 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly

ventilated area any longer than is needed

to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-

bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and

extremely poisonous, could build up and

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

 Do not push-start the vehicle.

 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive

at high speeds until the engine has had a

chance to warm up.

Starting the engine

NOTE

 After the engine has not started for a while,

the brake pedal effort needed to start the

engine may become greater. If this occurs,

depress the brake pedal more firmly than

usual.

NOTE

 The engine can only be started when the

selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N”

(NEUTRAL) position.

For safety reasons, the engine should be

started when the selector lever is in the “P”

(PARK) position in which the driving wheels

lock.

NOTE

 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-

up. These will disappear as the engine warms

up.

When the engine is hard to start

BK0277700US.book 25 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-26 Features and controls

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine

could be flooded with too much gasoline.

While depressing the brake pedal, push

the accelerator pedal all the way down

and hold it there, then press the engine

switch to crank the engine. If the engine

does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push

the engine switch to stop cranking the

engine, and release the accelerator pedal.

Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a

few seconds, and then press the engine

switch to crank the engine again while

depressing the brake pedal, but do not

push the accelerator pedal. If the engine

fails to start, repeat these procedures. If

the engine still will not start, contact your

local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice for assistance.

Startability of the engine with an ambient

temperature of -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower

When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30

°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start

from a standstill even with the selector lever

in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)

position.

This phenomenon occurs because the trans-

axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does

not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position

and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.

The transaxle will warm up, and you will be

able to start normally.

Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up

operation.

N00568201053

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Fully engage the parking brake while

depressing the brake pedal.

3. Move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position, and then press the

engine switch to stop the engine.

N00568301113

The following operation can be used to start

the engine or change the operation mode.

1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your

right foot.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, touch

the portion of the F.A.S.T.-key shown in

the illustration to the engine switch.

Stopping the engine

WARNING

 Do not operate the engine switch while

driving except in an emergency. If the

engine is stopped while driving, the brake

servomechanism will cease to function and

braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,

the power steering system will not func-

tion and it will require greater manual

effort to operate the steering. This could

result in a serious accident.

NOTE

 If you have to bring the engine to an emer-

gency stop while driving, press and hold the

engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press

it quickly three times or more. The engine

will stop and the operation mode will go to

ACC.

 Do not stop the engine with the selector lever

in any position other than the “P” (PARK)

position. If the engine is stopped with the

selector lever in any position other than the

“P” (PARK) position, the operation mode

will go to ACC rather than OFF.

Put the operation mode in OFF after placing

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-

tion.

If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-

ing properly

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 26 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-27

3. If the F.A.S.T.-key is recognized, the indi-

cator light on the engine switch illumi-

nates in green, and then the engine can be

started and the operation mode can be

changed within approximately 10 sec-

onds. Refer to “Starting and stopping the

engine” on page 5-24 and “Changing the

operation mode” on page 5-20.

N00514800017

N00515201204

The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-

key.

When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such

as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the

vehicle has run down, the emergency key can

be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door.

To use the emergency key (A), unlock the

lock knob (B) and remove it from the

F.A.S.T.-key (C).

Turn the emergency key toward the front of

the vehicle to lock the door. After checking

that the door is locked, turn the emergency

key back to the center and remove it.

NOTE

 If metal objects or other keys are near the

F.A.S.T.-key, the F.A.S.T.-key may not be

recognized.

 Instead of depressing the brake pedal, the

F.A.S.T.-key can also be recognized in the

same way within approximately 30 seconds

after pushing the engine switch.

 To change the operation mode without start-

ing the engine, release the brake pedal after

the indicator light on the engine switch illu-

minates in green, and then push the engine

switch.

To operate without using the

F.A.S.T.-key

Emergency key

NOTE

 Only use the emergency key in an emer-

gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key

has run down, replace the battery as soon as

possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.

 After using the emergency key, be sure to

reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.

Locking and unlocking the driver’s door

1- Insert or remove the emergency key

2- Lock

3- Unlock

BK0277700US.book 27 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-28 Features and controls

N00529601140

The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-

nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle

theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-

bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be

achieved (subject to certain conditions) using

a F.A.S.T.-key “registered” to the immobi-

lizer system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehi-

cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s

electronics.

N00561000042

Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-

grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be

used to start the vehicle.

If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer by referring to the key number.

To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle

and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID

codes reprogrammed.

N00561101066

To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have

two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to

Registering the ID code can be done by your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it

can be done by yourself (except for vehicles

sold in Canada).

For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-

low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-

ming” procedure below.

If you choose to have your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID

code, take your vehicle and all remaining

F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

N00561201315

You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the

system if you have two valid (already regis-

tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and a blank (not regis-

tered) F.A.S.T.-key.

For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the

procedures below.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-

key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-

form the following procedure within

30 seconds.)

3. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the

UNLOCK button for 4 to 8 seconds and

press the LOCK button during this time.

4. Release in sequence the LOCK and

UNLOCK buttons within 8 seconds of

pressing the LOCK button in step 3. (Per-

form the following procedure within

30 seconds.)

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)

NOTE

 If the engine does not start, contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys

Additional F.A.S.T.-keys

NOTE

 You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but

you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.

You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially

cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-

ming (Except for vehicles sold in

Canada)

NOTE

 Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-

key programming is finished. Do not open or

close other doors.

BK0277700US.book 28 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-29

5. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press

the UNLOCK button for 4 to 8 seconds

and press the LOCK button during this

time.

6. Release in sequence the LOCK and

UNLOCK buttons within 8 seconds of

pressing the LOCK button in step 5. The

immobilizer display on the information

screen in the multi-information display

will blink. (Perform the following step

within 20 seconds.)

7. Touch the portion of the new F.A.S.T.-key

shown in the illustration to the engine

switch.

When registration of ID code is complete,

the buzzer will sound three times and the

immobilizer display will come on for

30 seconds.

If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-

ming will be terminated and the buzzer

will sound for 3 seconds.

8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-

key, repeat the process from step 1 after

the operation mode is put in OFF.

N00515501382

Press the key buttons to lock or unlock the

doors and the liftgate.

It can also help you signal for attention by

setting off the panic alarm.

NOTE

 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-

nated if the operation mode is put in OFF

before the immobilizer display starts blink-

ing.

NOTE

 The immobilizer display will go off immedi-

ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.

 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-

play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-

play screen may prevent you from seeing the

immobilizer display.

 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if

the immobilizer display goes off during the

procedure.

Keyless entry system

LOCK ( ) button

UNLOCK ( ) button

3- PANIC button

4- Operation indicator light

BK0277700US.book 29 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-30 Features and controls

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the

doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will also blink once.

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the

driver’s door only.

Within approximately 2 seconds, press the

UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all

the doors and liftgate.

The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.

The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

The front side-marker and parking lights will

also turn on for approximately 30 seconds.

Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-198.

N00544501124

The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless

entry system answerback function can be

changed as required. This is done with the

operation mode in OFF.

N00597200032

The answerback function can be set in the

following three ways.

Each time the answerback function is set, a

chime will sound to tell you the condition of

the answerback function.

To change the setting, refer to “Customizing

the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-33.

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-

tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-

matically retract or extend when the doors

and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using

the key buttons.

Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security

Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Operation of the

outside rearview mirrors” on page 5-18, and

“Outside rearview mirrors” on page 5-56.

To lock

NOTE

 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the

horn will sound once.

To unlock

NOTE

 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when

no doors or the liftgate are opened within

approximately 30 seconds, the doors and the

liftgate will automatically re-lock.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

 The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when

the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.

Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock

function” on page 5-31.

Answerback function

 Horn deactivation/reactivation

Number of

chimes

Condition

One chime The horn will not sound.

Two chimes The horn will sound.

Four chimes

The horn will sound if the

LOCK button (1) is pressed

twice within 1 second.

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

BK0277700US.book 30 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-31

N00597300033

The answerback function from the turn signal

lights can be turned ON or OFF separately.

To change the setting, refer to “Customizing

the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-33.

N00597400034

The buzzer answerback function can be

turned ON or OFF as required.

N00544601242

The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set to the following two conditions.

Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-

tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the

condition of the door and liftgate unlock

function.

To change the setting, refer to “Customizing

the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-33.

N00544701126

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-

tion as follows:

 Turn signal lights deactivation/reac-

tivation

Number of

chimes

To lock To unlock

One chime One flash Two flashes

Two chimes One flash No flash

Three chimes No flash Two flashes

Four chimes Two flashes One flash

Five chimes No flash One flash

Six chimes Two flashes No flash

Seven chimes No flash No flash

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

 Buzzer deactivation/reactivation

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a

separate owner’s manual.

Setting of door and liftgate unlock

function

Number

of chimes

Condition

One chime

When the UNLOCK button

(2), driver’s or front passen-

ger’s door lock/unlock switch,

or liftgate open switch is

pressed one time, all doors and

the liftgate unlock.

Two

chimes

When the UNLOCK button (2)

or the driver’s door

lock/unlock switch is pressed

one time, only the driver’s door

unlocks. Within approximately

2 seconds, press the UNLOCK

button or the driver’s door

lock/unlock switch one more

time to unlock all the doors and

the liftgate.

[Factory setting]

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

the separate owner’s manual.

Using the panic alarm

Number

of chimes

Condition

BK0277700US.book 31 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-32 Features and controls

1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than

1 second.

2. The headlights will blink on and off and

the horn will sound intermittently for

approximately 3 minutes.

3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on

the key.

NOTE

 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a

button is pressed.

 The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from approxi-

mately 40 feet (12 m) away. However, this

distance may change if your vehicle is near a

TV transmitting tower, a power station, or a

radio station.

 If the following conditions are observed after

pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-

ton on the key, the battery in the F.A.S.T.-key

may need to be replaced.

• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked

or unlocked.

• The panic alarm cannot be operated.

• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not

come on.

 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a

replacement.

 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-

key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-

keys can be programmed for your vehicle.

 To use the new keys, it is necessary to regis-

ter the key with both the electronic immobi-

lizer and keyless entry system.

Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-

key programming” on page 5-28.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 32 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-33

N00596600026

You can change the settings for the following functions according to your preferences. When changing a setting, perform the following steps.

1. Put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position.

3. Complete steps i to iv of the procedure. Steps ii to iv should be completed within 8 seconds.

Customizing the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)

Item Step i Step ii Step iii Step iv Notification

Horn deactiva-

tion/reactivation

Press and hold the

LOCK button (1) for 4 to

8 seconds.

While holding the

LOCK button (1), press

the UNLOCK button (2).

While holding the

LOCK button (1),

release the UNLOCK

button (2).

Release the LOCK but-

ton (1).

Chimes

 Page 5-30

Turn signal lights

deactivation/reacti-

vation

Press and hold the

UNLOCK button (2) for

4 to 8 seconds.

While holding the

UNLOCK button (2),

press the LOCK button

(1).

While holding the

LOCK button (1),

release the UNLOCK

button (2).

Release the LOCK but-

ton (1).

Chimes

 Page 5-31

Setting of door and

liftgate unlock func-

tion

Press and hold the

LOCK button (1) for 4 to

8 seconds.

While holding the

LOCK button (1), press

the UNLOCK button (2).

While holding the

UNLOCK button (2),

release the LOCK button

(1).

Release the UNLOCK

button (2).

Chimes

 Page 5-31

BK0277700US.book 33 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-34 Features and controls

N00562001091

Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-

quency subject to Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold

in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For

vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-

plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry

Canada’s applicable licence-exempt RSS

standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of this device.

N00562101106

1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a

metal grounded object.

2. Remove the emergency key from the key.

Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-27.

3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,

insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade

screwdriver into the notch in the case and

use it to open the case.

4. Remove the old battery.

5. Install a new battery with the + side (A)

up.

6. Close the case firmly.

7. Install the emergency key removed in step

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that

it works.

NOTE

 Be sure to press the buttons correctly when performing the procedures. If you perform the procedures incorrectly, the settings could be changed uninten-

tionally.

General information

CAUTION

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

Procedure for replacing the key

battery

NOTE

 Be sure to perform the procedure with the

Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the

Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you

open the case, the transmitter may come out.

+ side

- side

Coin type

battery

CR2032

BK0277700US.book 34 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Door locks

Features and controls 5-35

N00509201586

Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to

lock the door. After checking that the door is

locked, turn the key back to the center and

remove it.

NOTE

 You may purchase a replacement battery at

an electric appliance store.

 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can

replace the battery for you if you prefer.

CAUTION

 When the key case is opened, be careful to

keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch

the internal components.

Door locks

WARNING

 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and

locked while driving.

• Locked doors, in combination with the

use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk

of ejection in an accident.

• Locked doors can help keep passengers,

especially small children, from opening

doors and falling out of moving vehicles.

• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders

from gaining access to your vehicle when

you slow or come to a stop.

 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.

Children who get into unlocked vehicles

may not be able to get out. Children

trapped inside vehicles can quickly be

overcome by heat and suffer serious

injury or death due to heat stroke.

 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In

addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-

dren can activate switches and controls,

resulting in an injury or fatal accident.

 When closing a door, make sure that the

door is fully closed and the door-ajar

warning display goes out on the informa-

tion screen on the multi-information dis-

play. If the door is ajar it could open while

driving and cause an accident.

WARNING

To lock and unlock with the key

(driver’s door)

1- Insert or remove the key

2- Lock

3- Unlock

BK0277700US.book 35 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Door locks

5-36 Features and controls

Move the lock knob to the lock position to

lock the door.

All doors should be kept locked while driv-

ing.

The driver’s door can be unlocked without

using the lock knob by pulling on the inside

door handle.

1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked

position.

2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-

cle. Close the door.

N00549601263

If the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position and the driver’s door is opened with

the key in the ignition switch, the key

reminder buzzer will sound intermittently to

remind you to remove the key.

NOTE

 When locking or unlocking with the key,

only the driver’s door will be locked or

unlocked.

To lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, use

the power door lock switch, the keyless entry

system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.

Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-37,

“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and

5-29, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-

key” on page 5-16.

 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,

the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked

using the emergency key.

Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-27.

To lock or unlock the door from

the inside

1- Lock

2- Unlock

To lock the door without using

the key

Key reminder system (except

for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key)

BK0277700US.book 36 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Power door locks

Features and controls 5-37

The warning display will be displayed on the

information screen in the multi-information

display.

N00517301078

If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the operation mode is in any mode

other than OFF, when you push the lock knob

forward with the driver’s door or passenger’s

door open, the lock knob will automatically

return to the unlocked position.

N00503801173

If the driver’s door is opened while the engine

is stopped and the operation mode is in any

mode other than OFF, the operation mode ON

buzzer will sound intermittently to remind

you put the operation mode in OFF.

The warning display will be displayed on the

information screen in the multi-information

display.

N00509301659

All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked

or unlocked by pressing the power door lock

switch on the driver’s or the front passenger

door.

Lock out protection

Operation mode ON reminder

system (vehicles equipped with

F.A.S.T.-key)

Power door locks

NOTE

 When locking or unlocking with the key on

the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will

lock or unlock.

 Repeated continuous operation between lock

and unlock could activate the power door

locking system’s built-in protection circuit,

and prevent the system from operating. If

this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute

before operating the power door lock switch.

To lock and unlock the doors

and liftgate

Using the power door lock switch

1- Lock

2- Unlock

BK0277700US.book 37 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Child safety locks for rear door

5-38 Features and controls

N00563401210

All doors and the liftgate will unlock when

the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is put in OFF.

All doors and the liftgate will unlock when

the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK)

position with the ignition switch in the “ON”

position or the operation mode in ON.

N00509401328

Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-

gers, especially children, from opening the

rear door using the inside door handle.

A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-

vided on each rear door.

When the lever is in the lock position (1), the

rear door cannot be opened using the inside

door handle.

To open the rear door when the child safety

lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-

side door handle.

When the lever is in the release position (2),

the child safety lock is released and the rear

To unlock the doors and liftgate

You can select the functions to unlock the

doors and liftgate either using the ignition

switch position or the engine switch, or

using the selector lever position.

These functions are not activated when the

vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-

vate or deactivate these functions, please

contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

Using the ignition switch or the

engine switch

Using the selector lever position

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a

separate owner’s manual.

Child safety locks for rear

door

1- To lock

2- To release

BK0277700US.book 38 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Liftgate

Features and controls 5-39

door can be opened using the inside door han-

dle.

N00510101325

1. After unlocking, push the liftgate open

switch (A) and pull up the liftgate.

WARNING

 Always keep the doors tightly closed and

locked when driving. An unlocked door

may be accidentally opened by a passen-

ger, especially by a child who could fall

out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there

is a greater risk of someone being thrown

from the vehicle in an accident.

Liftgate

WARNING

 The luggage compartment was not

designed for people to ride in it. Do not let

passengers ride in or let children play in

the luggage compartment. Riding or play-

ing in the luggage compartment could

result in a serious accident or injury.

 Before driving, be sure that the liftgate is

securely closed. It is dangerous to drive

with the liftgate open since carbon monox-

ide (CO) gas contained in engine exhaust

gases can enter the passenger compart-

ment.

CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can

cause unconsciousness and even death.

In addition, if the liftgate opens while

driving, luggage could fall onto the road

and cause an accident.

 When opening and closing the liftgate,

make sure that there are no people nearby

and be careful not to hit your head or

pinch your hands, neck, etc.

 If snow or ice has accumulated on the lift-

gate, remove it before opening the liftgate.

Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close

due to the weight of the snow or ice.

 When opening the liftgate, always fully

open it. A partially opened liftgate can

unexpectedly close due to its own weight.

 When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the

effort required to open or close the liftgate

may be greater or less than expected.

The liftgate may also open or close more

quickly.

CAUTION

 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when

loading and unloading luggage. Heat from

the exhaust could lead to burns.

 To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure

that area above and behind the liftgate is

clear before opening it.

WARNING

NOTE

 Locking and unlocking the doors by using

power door locks (driver and front passenger

side), keyless entry system, or F.A.S.T.-key

operation (vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift-

gate.

To open

To open from outside the vehicle

CAUTION

 Make sure there is no one standing nearby

when opening the liftgate.

BK0277700US.book 39 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Liftgate

5-40 Features and controls

The liftgate can also open from the inside of

vehicle. It is designed to provide a way to

open the liftgate if the battery is dead or dis-

connected.

1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate.

2. Move the lever (B) to open the liftgate.

3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.

1. Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as

illustrated and release it before the liftgate

closes completely. Gently slam the liftgate

from the outside so that it is completely

closed.

NOTE

 The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not

raised immediately after pressing the liftgate

open switch.

If this happens, press the liftgate open switch

again and raise the liftgate.

 The liftgate cannot be opened when the bat-

tery is discharged or disconnected.

The liftgate must then be opened using the

inside liftgate release.

 When the battery is reconnected, all doors

and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them

before trying to open the liftgate.

 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-

tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-

matically extend when the liftgate and all

doors are unlocked using the liftgate open

switch (A).

To open from inside the vehicle

WARNING

 Always keep the release lever lid on the

liftgate closed when driving so that your

luggage cannot accidentally bump the

lever and open the liftgate.

To close

CAUTION

 To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not

attempt to close the liftgate without releasing

the liftgate grip (A).

 Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-

firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate

opens while driving the vehicle, objects

stored in the luggage compartment could fall

out into the road.

BK0277700US.book 40 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Theft-alarm system

Features and controls 5-41

N00510201267

The theft-alarm system is designed to provide

protection from unauthorized entry into the

vehicle. This system is operated in three

stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-

ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-

armed” stage. If triggered, the system

provides both audible and visual alarm sig-

nals.

N00510301239

Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the

system as described below.

1. Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the

ignition switch.

For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key, put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.

3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using

the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-

key operation.

At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)

on the instrument panel flashes for confir-

mation.

4. The system has entered the armed stage

after approximately 20 seconds, when the

theft-alarm indicator (A) flashing

becomes slower.

The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to

flash while the system is in the armed

stage.

NOTE

 Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations

illustrated in order to support the liftgate.

Please observe the following in order to pre-

vent damage or faulty operation:

• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts

when closing the liftgate.

• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,

etc., to the gas struts.

• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.

• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.

Theft-alarm system

CAUTION

 Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm

system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm

to malfunction.

Armed stage

Arm the system and leave

NOTE

 If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm

indicator (A) illuminates and the system can-

not enter the armed stage.

The system enters the armed stage approxi-

mately 20 seconds after the engine hood is

closed.

BK0277700US.book 41 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Theft-alarm system

5-42 Features and controls

N00510401243

The alarm will be activated if any of the fol-

lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and

the system is armed.

 One of the doors and the liftgate is opened

without using the keyless entry system or

the F.A.S.T.-key operation.

 The engine hood is opened.

N00582500053

When the alarm is activated:

1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-

utes.

After 3 minutes the headlights automati-

cally shut off.

2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3

minutes.

N00582600041

The alarm can be deactivated in the following

ways.

 By using the keyless entry system or the

F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock

the doors and liftgate.

 Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key, by turning the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.

 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key, by putting the operation mode in ON.

N00510501215

The system will be disarmed if the following

operation is performed.

 The system will be disarmed if, while the

theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all

doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using

the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key

operation.

 The system will be disarmed if, while the

theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol-

lowing operation is performed.

• Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position.

• For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key, if the operation mode is put in ON.

 The system will not be armed if a door, the

liftgate or the engine hood is not completely

closed. If this happens, rearm the system as

described above.

 The theft-alarm system can be activated

when people are riding inside the vehicle or

when the windows are open. To prevent acci-

dental activation of the alarm, do not set the

system to the system armed mode while peo-

ple are riding in the vehicle.

Alarm stage

NOTE

Type of alarm

Horn sounds!

Headlights blink on and off!

NOTE

 The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-

utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will

automatically shut off to save battery power.

The system will then be rearmed until the

proper disarming step is taken.

 The alarm will resume if unauthorized

actions are taken again, even if the alarm has

stopped.

Alarm deactivation

Disarmed stage

BK0277700US.book 42 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Power window control

Features and controls 5-43

 Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key, if the operation mode is put in ON.

 All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by

using the keyless entry system or the

F.A.S.T.-key operation.

N00510601160

Use the following procedure to test the sys-

tem:

1. Lower the driver’s window.

2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed

stage”.

3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator

comes on and flashes for approximately

20 seconds.

4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the

driver’s side door by using the inside door

lock knob. Open the door.

5. Make sure that the horn sounds intermit-

tently and the headlights blink when a

door is opened.

6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors

and the liftgate by using the keyless entry

system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.

N00510801436

NOTE

 If the UNLOCK button on the key, or the

driver’s or front passenger’s door

lock/unlock switch is pressed when all doors

and the liftgate are closed and no door is

opened within approximately 30 seconds, re-

arming will automatically occur.

Disarm...by using the keyless entry system or

F.A.S.T.-key operation

 The amount of time after unlocking until the

vehicle relocks automatically can be

adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer for details.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, the functions can be

adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a

separate owner’s manual.

 Once the system has been disarmed, it can-

not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-

ing procedure.

Testing the theft-alarm system

NOTE

Power window control

1- Open (down)

2- Close (up)

NOTE

 Never try to operate the main switch and

sub-switch in different directions at the same

time. This will freeze the window in posi-

tion.

 Operating the power windows repeatedly

with the engine stopped will run down the

battery. Use the window switches only while

the engine is running.

BK0277700US.book 43 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Power window control

5-44 Features and controls

N00548701182

The main switch located on the driver’s door

can be used to operate all the windows.

A window can be opened or closed by operat-

ing the corresponding switch.

Press the switch down to open the window,

and pull up the switch to close it.

If the driver’s door window switch is fully

pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door

window automatically opens/closes com-

pletely.

If you want to stop the window movement,

operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-

tion.

N00548801138

Each sub-switch can be used for its own door

window, unless the driver’s window lock

switch is activated.

N00548901171

The power windows can be opened or closed

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode is in ON.

The door windows can be opened or closed

for a 30-second period after the engine is

WARNING

 Before operating the power windows,

make sure that nothing is capable of being

trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the

window.

 Never leave the vehicle without carrying

the key.

 Never leave children or unreliable adults

unattended inside the vehicle.

Main switch

1- Driver’s door window switch

2- Front passenger’s door window switch

3- Left rear door window switch

4- Right rear door window switch

5- Lock switch

Sub-switches

1- Open

2- Close

NOTE

 The rear door windows open only half-way.

Power window timer function

BK0277700US.book 44 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Power window control

Features and controls 5-45

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or

the front passenger’s door is opened, the

power windows cannot be operated.

N00549001182

When this switch is in the lock mode, the sub-

switches cannot be used to open or close the

door windows, and the main switch will open

or close only the driver’s door window. To

unlock the switch, press it again.

N00528801217

If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the

driver’s door window is automatically low-

ered a little.

After the door window is lowered, clear the

obstruction, then pull up the switch again to

close the driver’s door window.

Lock switch

1- Lock

2- Unlock

WARNING

 Before driving with a child in the vehicle,

be sure to lock the window switch to make

it inoperative. Children tampering with

the switch could easily trap their hands or

heads in the window.

Safety mechanism (Driver’s

door window only)

WARNING

 If the battery terminals are disconnected

or the fuse for power window is replaced,

the safety mechanism will be cancelled.

If a hand or head got trapped, a serious

injury could result.

CAUTION

 The safety mechanism is deactivated just

before the door window closes. This allows

the door window to close completely. There-

fore be especially careful that fingers are not

trapped in the door window opening.

 The safety mechanism is deactivated while

the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-

cially careful that fingers are not trapped in

the door window opening.

 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head

in order to activate the safety mechanism.

Your hand or head could be trapped and per-

sonal injury could result.

NOTE

 The safety mechanism can be activated if the

driving conditions or other circumstances

cause the driver’s door window to be sub-

jected to a physical shock similar to that

caused by trapped hand or head.

 If the following operation is performed, the

safety mechanism will be cancelled and the

driver’s door window will not automatically

open/close completely.

• When the battery terminals are discon-

nected.

• When the fuse for power window is

replaced.

• When the safety mechanism is activated

five or more times consecutively.

In such a case, the following procedure

should be implemented to rectify this situa-

tion.

If the window is open, repeatedly raise the

driver’s door window switch until that win-

dow has been fully closed. Following this,

release the switch, raise the switch once

again and hold it in this condition for at least

1 second, then release it. You should now be

able to operate the driver’s door window in

the normal fashion.

BK0277700US.book 45 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped)

5-46 Features and controls

N00551400043

Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a booming

or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit

wind buffeting when driving with one or both

rear door windows down or partially opened.

This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-

mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear

door windows open, open the front door win-

dows as well as the rear door windows to

minimize the condition.

N00594700036

The front sunroof & front shade can be

opened or closed with the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or the operation mode in

ON.

What to do if you hear wind

buffeting when driving

Power panoramic sunroof (if

so equipped)

WARNING

 Do not put head, hands or anything else

out of the front sunroof opening while

driving the vehicle.

 Never leave children or unreliable adults

unattended inside the vehicle.

 Never leave the vehicle without carrying

the key.

 Before operating the front sunroof, front

shade, or rear shade, make sure that noth-

ing is capable of being trapped (head,

hands, fingers, etc.) in the front sunroof,

front shade, or rear shade.

 Because the front sunroof opens to the

outside of the vehicle, do not open the sun-

roof when cleaning the top of the roof, etc.

Your hands or arms could be trapped.

NOTE

 When leaving the vehicle unattended, be

sure to close the front sunroof and carry the

key.

 Do not try to operate the front sunroof if it is

frozen closed (after snow fall or during

extreme cold).

 Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the

front sunroof or roof opening edge.

 Do not apply any force that may cause dam-

age to the sunroof.

 Release the switch when the front sunroof,

front shade, or rear shade starts to move.

 If the front sunroof, front shade, or rear

shade does not operate when the switch is

operated, release the switch and check

whether something is trapped by the sunroof

or shade. If nothing is trapped, we recom-

mend you to have the sunroof or shade

checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

 Be careful when tilting up the front sunroof

if a ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed.

Depending on the model of ski carrier or roof

carrier, the front sunroof may contact the car-

rier when the front sunroof is tilted up.

WARNING

 Be sure to close the front sunroof completely

when washing the vehicle or when leaving

the vehicle.

 After washing the vehicle or after rain be

sure to wipe off any water that is on the front

sunroof before operating it.

 Operating the front sunroof, front shade, or

rear shade repeatedly with the engine turned

off will run down the battery. Operate the

front sunroof, front shade, and rear shade

only while the engine is running.

Front sunroof & front shade

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 46 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-47

Press the switch in direction (1) to open the

front sunroof automatically.

To stop the sunroof before it is fully open,

operate the switches in any of the directions

(1) to (6).

Press the switch in direction (3) to fully close

the front sunroof automatically.

To stop the sunroof before it is fully closed,

operate the switches in any of the directions

(1) to (6).

Press the switch in direction (2) to raise the

rear edge of the front sunroof as it opens.

Press the switch in direction (3) or pull the

switch in direction (4) to fully close the front

sunroof automatically.

Press the switch in direction (5) to fully open

the front shade automatically.

To stop the shade before it is fully open, oper-

ate the switches in any of the directions (1) to

(6).

Press the switch in direction (6) to fully close

the front shade automatically.

1- Open (front sunroof)

2- Tilt up (front sunroof)

3- Close (front sunroof)

4- Tilt down (front sunroof)

5- Open (front shade)

6- Close (front shade)

Opening the front sunroof

NOTE

 The front sunroof automatically stops just

before reaching the fully open position to

reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open it.

 Depending on the position of the front shade,

the front shade will open together with the

front sunroof.

Closing the front sunroof

NOTE

 When you press the switch in direction (6),

the front sunroof will close slightly, and then

the sunroof and front shade will fully close

automatically.

Tilting up the front sunroof

NOTE

 Depending on the position of the front shade,

the front shade will open together with the

front sunroof.

Tilting down the front sunroof

NOTE

 When you press the switch in direction (6),

the front sunroof will close slightly, and then

the sunroof and front shade will fully close

automatically.

Opening the front shade

Closing the front shade

BK0277700US.book 47 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped)

5-48 Features and controls

To stop the shade before it is fully closed,

operate the switches in any of the directions

(1) to (6).

Within approximately 30 seconds after the

ignition switch is changed to “ACC” or

“OFF” or the operation mode is changed to

ACC or OFF, the front sunroof and front

shade can be opened and closed.

However, if the driver’s or front passenger’s

door is opened within 30 seconds after the

ignition switch is changed to “ACC” or

“OFF” or the operation mode is changed to

ACC or OFF, the front sunroof and front

shade cannot be opened or closed.

If a person’s hand, neck, etc., is trapped in the

front sunroof or front shade, the front sunroof

or front shade will automatically open a max-

imum of 8 inches (20 cm) as a safety func-

tion. After the front sunroof and front shade

open, you can use the switch to close them.

If the safety mechanism operates five times or

more consecutively, you will not be able to

close the front sunroof and front shade nor-

mally.

If this occurs, perform the following proce-

dure to reset the safety mechanism.

1. Press and hold the switch in direction (3)

or pull and hold the switch in direction

(4).

2. The front sunroof (if open) and front

shade will move to the fully closed posi-

tions in small increments.

3. When the front sunroof and front shade

have both stopped in the fully closed posi-

tions, release the switch. (The resetting

procedure is finished.)

If the front sunroof and front shade do not

move correctly to the fully closed positions

after you perform the resetting procedure,

contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

The rear shade can be opened or closed with

the ignition switch in the “ON” position or

the operation mode in ON.

NOTE

 If the front sunroof is open, it will close

together with the front shade.

Timer function

Safety mechanism

NOTE

 If the front sunroof and front shade are both

open, the front sunroof will move to the fully

closed position, and then the front shade will

move to the fully closed position.

CAUTION

 The safety mechanism is cancelled just

before the front sunroof and front shade are

fully closed. This allows the front sunroof

and front shade to close completely. There-

fore be especially careful that no fingers are

trapped in the front sunroof and front shade.

NOTE

 The safety mechanism can be activated if the

driving conditions or other circumstances

cause the front sunroof or the front shade to

be subjected to a physical shock similar to

that caused by a trapped hand or head.

 Do not release the switch until the resetting

procedure is finished. If you release the

switch, the resetting mode will be cancelled.

To perform the resetting procedure again,

repeat the procedure from step 1.

Rear shade

BK0277700US.book 48 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Parking brake

Features and controls 5-49

Press the switch in direction (7) to fully open

the rear shade automatically.

To stop the shade before it is fully open, press

the switch in direction (7) or (8).

Press the switch in direction (8) to fully close

the rear shade automatically.

To stop the shade before it is fully closed,

press the switch in direction (7) or (8).

If a person’s hand, neck, etc., is trapped in the

rear shade, the shade will automatically open

a maximum of 8 inches (20 cm) as a safety

function. After the rear shade opens, you can

use the switch to close it.

If the safety mechanism operates five times or

more consecutively, you will not be able to

close the rear shade normally.

If this occurs, perform the following proce-

dure to reset the safety mechanism.

1. Press and hold the switch in direction (8).

2. The rear shade will move to the fully

closed position in small increments.

3. When the rear shade has stopped in the

fully closed position, release the switch.

(The resetting procedure is finished.)

If the rear shade does not move correctly to

the fully closed positions after you perform

the resetting procedure, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

N00511401527

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,

and then move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position.

Make sure the brake warning light is illumi-

nated.

7- Open (rear shade)

8- Close (rear shade)

Opening the rear shade

Closing the rear shade

Safety mechanism

CAUTION

 The safety mechanism is cancelled just

before the rear shade is fully closed. This

allows the rear shade to close completely.

Therefore be especially careful that no fin-

gers are trapped in the rear shade.

NOTE

 The safety mechanism can be activated if the

driving conditions or other circumstances

cause the rear shade to be subjected to a

physical shock similar to that caused by a

trapped hand or head.

 Do not release the switch until the resetting

procedure is finished. If you release the

switch, the resetting mode will be cancelled.

To perform the resetting procedure again,

repeat the procedure from step 1.

Parking brake

BK0277700US.book 49 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Parking brake

5-50 Features and controls

N00593100059

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.

Before driving, be sure to release the parking

brake.

N00593200089

The Electric parking brake is the system that

applies the parking brake by the electric

motor.

Lever type parking brake (if so

equipped)

To apply

1- Pull the lever up without pressing the

button at the end of hand grip.

When the parking brake is set and the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

or the operation mode is in ON the

brake warning light in the instrument

cluster will come on.

To release

1- Pull the lever up slightly.

2- Press and hold the button at the end of

the hand grip.

3- Pressing the lever downward.

CAUTION

 Before driving, be sure that the parking

brake is fully released and brake warning

light is off.

If you drive without the parking brake fully

released, the warning display will appear on

the information screen in the multi-informa-

tion display.

If a vehicle is driven without releasing the

parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,

resulting in ineffective braking and possible

brake failure.

Warning light

Warning display

Electric parking brake (if so

equipped)

BK0277700US.book 50 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Parking brake

Features and controls 5-51

When the Electric parking brake is applied,

the brake warning light in the instrument

cluster and the indicator light (A) on the Elec-

tric parking brake switch will come on.

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.

NOTE

 You may hear an operation noise from the

vehicle body when operating the Electric

parking brake. This does not indicate a mal-

function and the Electric parking brake is

operating normally.

 When the battery is weak or dead, the Elec-

tric parking brake cannot be applied or

released. Refer to “Jump-starting the engine”

on page 8-2.

 You may feel the brake pedal moving when

operating the Electric parking brake.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

To apply

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Pull up the Electric parking brake switch

while depressing the brake pedal.

CAUTION

 While the vehicle is in motion, do not apply

the Electric parking brake. Doing so may

cause overheating and/or premature wear of

brake parts, reducing brake performance.

NOTE

 In the following conditions, the brake warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately

15 seconds and then go off.

• While the Electric parking brake is applied,

the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is put in

OFF.

• While the ignition switch is in the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is in OFF,

the Electric parking brake switch is pulled

up.

 If the Electric parking brake must be applied

in an emergency situation, pull and hold the

Electric parking brake switch to apply the

Electric parking brake. At that time, the fol-

lowing warning display will appear in the

multi-information display and a buzzer will

sound, however you should continue to pull

and hold the Electric parking brake switch.

 When parking on steep grades, pull up the

Electric parking brake switch twice (once

more after the operation is completed once).

The maximum effect of the parking brake

will be obtained.

 If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle

stationary after the foot brake is released,

contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

 When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is other than ON, if the parking brake

is applied, the Electric parking brake indica-

tor light comes on for a while.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 51 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Parking brake

5-52 Features and controls

When the accelerator pedal is depressed

slowly while all of the following conditions

are met, the Electric parking brake is auto-

matically released.

 The engine is running.

 The selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE)

or the “R” (REVERSE) position.

 The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

When the Electric parking brake is released,

the brake warning light and the indicator light

on the Electric parking brake switch go off.

Before driving, be sure that the parking brake

is released and brake warning light is off.

 If the Electric parking brake switch is repeat-

edly operated in a short time, the following

warning display will appear in the multi-

information display and the Electric parking

brake will temporarily stop working. In such

case, wait for approximately 1 minute until

the warning display disappears, and operate

the Electric parking brake switch again.

 The brake warning light and the indicator

light on the Electric parking brake switch

may blink. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion, the lights go off when/if the Electric

parking brake is released.

 Depending on the situation, the Electric

parking brake may be applied automatically.

Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

NOTE

To release

Manual operation

1. Make sure that the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position or the operation mode

is ON.

2. Press down the Electric parking brake

switch while depressing the brake pedal.

Automatic operation

CAUTION

 After the Electric parking brake switch has

been operated to apply or release the Electric

parking brake, if the brake warning light and

the indicator light on the Electric parking

brake switch remain blinking or the Electric

parking brake warning light remain illumi-

nated, the Electric parking brake system may

be malfunctioning and the parking brake

may not be applied or released. Immediately

park your vehicle in a safe place and contact

the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the

parking brake, the brake will overheat,

resulting in ineffective braking and possible

brake failure.

 If the brake warning light does not go off

after the parking brake has been released, the

brake system may be malfunctioning.

Contact the nearest authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

BK0277700US.book 52 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment

Features and controls 5-53

Warning light

Warning display

If there is a malfunction in the system, the

warning light will come on. In addition, the

warning display appears on the information

screen in the multi-information display.

Under normal conditions, the warning light

only comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position or the operation

mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds

later.

N00511501241

To adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position, move the lever upward or down-

 If the acceleration of the vehicle seems

abnormally slow after the vehicle has been

parked with the Electric parking brake

applied in cold weather, stop the vehicle in a

safe place, then apply and release the Elec-

tric parking brake. If the vehicle acceleration

is still slow, contact the nearest authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

NOTE

 When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is other than ON, the parking brake

cannot be released.

 If the Electric parking brake does not auto-

matically release, it may be released by man-

ual operation.

 When the selector lever is other than “P”

(PARK) position, if you try to release the

Electric parking brake without depressing

the brake pedal, the warning display will

appear.

CAUTION

 If you start driving without releasing the

Electric parking brake, the warning display

will appear.

 If the driver’s foot contacts the accelerator

pedal in the condition that the Electric park-

ing brake can release by an automatic opera-

tion, the Electric parking brake may be

released automatically.

Warning light/display

NOTE

CAUTION

 When the Electric parking brake warning

light does not illuminate or remains illumi-

nated when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position or the operation mode is

put in ON, or comes on while driving, the

Electric parking brake may not be applied or

released.

Immediately contact the nearest authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice. For details, refer to “Electric

parking brake warning light” on page 5-184.

When parking your vehicle while the Elec-

tric parking brake warning light is illumi-

nated, park the vehicle on level and stable

ground, move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position and place chocks, blocks,

stones behind and in front of the tires to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

Steering wheel height and

reach adjustment

BK0277700US.book 53 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Inside rearview mirror

5-54 Features and controls

ward while moving the steering wheel to the

desired position.

N00511601473

Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a

clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

It is possible to move the mirror up and down

to adjust its position.

It is possible to move the mirror up/down and

left/right to adjust its position.

1- Wheel lock

2- Release

WARNING

 After adjusting, make sure the lock lever

is secured in the locked (1) position.

 Do not attempt to adjust the steering

wheel while driving. This can be danger-

ous.

Inside rearview mirror

WARNING

 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-

view mirror while driving. This can be

dangerous.

Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-

ing.

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

To adjust the vertical mirror

position

Except for vehicles equipped with For-

ward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)

To adjust the mirror position

BK0277700US.book 54 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Inside rearview mirror

Features and controls 5-55

The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the

mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to

reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-

cles behind you during night driving.

When the headlights of the vehicles behind

you are very bright, the reflection factor of

the rearview mirror is automatically changed

to reduce the glare.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, the reflection factor of the mirror is auto-

matically changed.

To reduce the glare

Type 1

1- Daytime position

2- Night position

Type 2

NOTE

 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner

on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity

could result.

BK0277700US.book 55 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Outside rearview mirrors

5-56 Features and controls

When the headlights of the vehicles behind

you are very bright, the reflection factor of

the rearview mirror is automatically changed

to reduce the glare.

Normally, use the automatic mode. When the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position

or the operation mode is put in ON, the green

indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection

factor of the mirror is automatically changed.

N00512201232

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a

clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

Type 3

NOTE

 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner

on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity

could result.

 If you want to stop automatic mode, press

the switch (3) and the indicator will go off.

To return to automatic mode, press the

switch again or perform the following opera-

tion.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position

after turning to “OFF” or “ACC” position.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

Put the operation mode in ON after putting

the operation mode in OFF.

Outside rearview mirrors

WARNING

 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-

view mirrors while driving. This can be

dangerous.

Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-

ing.

NOTE

 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.

The objects you see in the mirror will look

smaller and farther away than they

appear in a regular flat mirror.

Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-

tance of vehicles following you when

changing lanes.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 56 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Outside rearview mirrors

Features and controls 5-57

N00549101196

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position or the operation mode is put

in ON or ACC.

Push the switch (A) to the same side as the

mirror you wish to adjust.

Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-

tion.

N00549201269

The outside mirror can be retracted towards

the side window to prevent damage when

parking in tight locations.

Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi-

cle with your hand to retract it in. When

extending the mirror, pull it out towards the

front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in

place.

With the ignition switch in the “ON” or

“ACC” position or the operation mode in ON

or ACC, push the mirror retractor switch to

retract the mirrors. Push it again to extend the

mirrors to their original positions.

After placing the ignition switch in the

“OFF” position or the operation mode in

OFF, it is possible to retract and extend the

mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for

approximately 30 seconds.

To adjust the mirror position

L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment

1- Up

2- Down

3- Right

Type 1

Type 2

4- Left

NOTE

 After completing the adjustment, return the

switch (A) to the center position.

To retract the mirror

Except for vehicles equipped with the

mirror retractor switch

For vehicles equipped with the mirror

retractor switch

Retracting and extending the mir-

rors using the mirror retractor

switch

BK0277700US.book 57 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Outside rearview mirrors

5-58 Features and controls

[For vehicles equipped with the keyless entry

system]

The mirrors automatically retract or extend

when the doors are locked or unlocked using

the key buttons of the keyless entry system.

Refer to “Keyless entry system: Operation of

the outside rearview mirrors” on page 5-6.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The mirrors automatically retract or extend

when the doors are locked or unlocked using

the key buttons or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.

Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 5-29

or “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key” on

page 5-16.

N00595900022

CAUTION

 It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors

by hand. After retracting a mirror using the

mirror retractor switch, however, you should

extend it by using the switch again, not by

hand. If you extended the mirror by hand

after retracting it using the switch, it would

not properly lock in position. As a result, the

mirror could move because of the wind or

vibration while you are driving, and this may

impair the driver’s rearward visibility.

NOTE

 Be careful not to get your hands trapped

while a mirror is moving.

 If you move a mirror by hand or it moves

after hitting a person or object, you may not

be able to return it to its original position

using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap-

pens, push the mirror retractor switch to

place the mirror in its retracted position and

then push the switch again to return the mir-

ror to its original position.

 When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail

to operate as intended, please refrain from

repeated pushing of the retractor switch as

this action can result in burn-out of the mir-

ror motor circuits.

Retracting and extending the mir-

rors without using the mirror

retractor switch (automatic exten-

sion function)

NOTE

 Functions can be modified as stated below.

Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to make the adjustment. Refer to the

separate owner’s manual for details.

• Automatically extend when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position or the

operation mode is put in ON with the

driver’s door closed, and automatically

retract when the ignition switch is turned to

the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the opera-

tion mode is put in OFF or ACC with the

driver’s door opened.

• Automatically extend when the vehicle

speed reaches approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h).

• Deactivate the automatic extension func-

tion.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors

(if so equipped)

WARNING

 Even if no vehicles are shown to the side of

your vehicle in the Integrated Blind Spot

Mirrors (A), be sure to confirm that traf-

fic is clear before changing lanes.

 Because the Integrated Blind Spot Mir-

rors (A) are wide-angle mirrors, objects

appear smaller than their actual size.

Also, be careful because vehicles and other

objects shown in the mirrors are closer to

your vehicle than they appear.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 58 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Outside rearview mirrors

Features and controls 5-59

The Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (A) is a

mirror for showing vehicles and other objects

in the driver's blind spot (C) that are not

shown in the main mirror (B).

When checking the area to the rear of your

vehicle, check the main mirror (B), and then

check the Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (A).

N00549301332

When the rear window defogger switch is

pressed with the engine running, the outside

rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.

Current will flow through the heater element

inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or

condensation.

The indicator light (A) will illuminate while

the defogger is on.

The heater will be turned off automatically in

approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending on

the outside temperature.

D- When a vehicle is traveling far behind

your vehicle, the main mirror (B) shows

an image of the vehicle and the Inte-

grated Blind Spot Mirror (A) shows a

small image of the vehicle.

E- When the vehicle moves closer to your

vehicle, the main mirror (B) shows a

larger image of the vehicle and the Inte-

grated Blind Spot Mirror (A) also shows

a larger image of the vehicle.

F- When the vehicle moves even closer to

your vehicle and is located in the driver's

blind spot (C), the main mirror (B) does

not show an image of the vehicle and

only the Integrated Blind Spot Mirror

(A) shows an image of the vehicle.

Heated outside rearview mirror

BK0277700US.book 59 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Ignition switch

5-60 Features and controls

N00512401755

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

For information on operations for vehicles

equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to

“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key): Engine switch” on page 5-19.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The engine is off. The key can be inserted and

removed only when the switch is in this posi-

tion.

Allows operation of electrical accessories

with the engine off.

All accessories can be used.

Engages the starter. Release the key when the

engine starts.It will automatically return to

the “ON” position.

N00539601130

After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed

with the ignition switch in the “ACC” posi-

tion, the function automatically cuts out the

power for the audio system and other electric

devices that can be operated with that posi-

tion.

When the ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position, the power is supplied again

to those devices.

NOTE

 The heated outside rearview mirror can be

turned on automatically.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

Ignition switch

OFF

ACC

START

NOTE

 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code

which the transponder inside the key sends

must match the one registered to the immobi-

lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-

bilizer” on page 5-4.)

ACC power auto-cutout func-

tion

NOTE

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

BK0277700US.book 60 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Starting the engine

Features and controls 5-61

N00550901253

When removing the key, first set the selector

lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then

turn the key to the “OFF” position and

remove it.

N00512601874

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

For information on operation for vehicles

equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to

“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting” on page 5-13.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

 Do not operate the starter motor continu-

ously for longer than 15 seconds as this

could run the battery down or damage the

starter motor. If the engine does not start,

turn the ignition switch back to the

“OFF”, wait a few seconds, and then try

again. Trying repeatedly with the engine

or starter motor still turning will damage

the starter mechanism.

 If the engine will not start because the bat-

tery is weak or discharged, refer to

“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)

for instructions.

 A longer warm up period will only con-

sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up

enough for driving when the bar graph of

engine coolant temperature display starts

to move or the low coolant temperature

indicator goes out. Refer to “Engine cool-

ant temperature display” on page 5-150.

• The time until the power cuts out can be

changed to approximately 60 minutes.

• The ACC power auto-cutout function can

be deactivated.

For details, we recommend you to consult an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

To remove the key

NOTE

 The key cannot be removed unless the selec-

tor lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position,

which allows the ignition switch to turn to

the “OFF” position.

CAUTION

 If the engine is stopped while driving, the

power brake booster will stop functioning

and greater effort for braking will be

required. Also, the power steering system

will not function and it will require greater

effort to manually steer the vehicle.

 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for

a long time when the engine is not running.

This will cause the battery to run down.

 Do not turn the key to the “START” position

when the engine is running. It will damage

the starter motor.

Starting the engine

Tips for starting

BK0277700US.book 61 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Starting the engine

5-62 Features and controls

This model is equipped with an electronically

controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-

tem that automatically controls fuel injection.

There is usually no need to depress the accel-

erator pedal when starting the engine.

The starter should not be run for more than

15 seconds at a time.

To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds

between attempts to restart the engine.

1. Make sure all occupants are properly

seated with seat belts fastened.

2. Insert the ignition key.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal down

firmly with your right foot.

4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”

(PARK) position.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion and make certain that all warning

lights are functioning properly before

starting the engine.

6. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without pressing the accelerator

pedal. Release the ignition switch when

the engine starts.

After several attempts, you may experience

that the engine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, such

as lights, air conditioning blower and rear

window defogger, are turned off.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, press

the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it

there, then crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal, immediately after the

engine starts.

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine

could be flooded with too much gasoline.

While depressing the brake pedal, push

the accelerator pedal all the way down

and hold it there, then crank the engine for

5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch

to the “OFF” and release the accelerator

pedal. Wait a few seconds, and then crank

the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while

depressing the brake pedal, but do not

push the accelerator pedal. Release the

ignition switch if the engine starts. If the

engine fails to start, repeat these proce-

dures. If the engine still will not start, con-

tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice for

assistance.

When the ambient temperature is -22 °F

(-30 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to

start from a standstill even with the selector

WARNING

 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly

ventilated area any longer than is needed

to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-

bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and

extremely poisonous, could build up and

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

 Do not push-start the vehicle.

 Do not run the engine at high revolutions or

drive at high speeds until the engine has had

a chance to warm up.

 Release the ignition switch as soon as the

engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor

will be damaged

Starting the engine

NOTE

 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-

up. These will disappear as the engine warms

up.

When the engine is hard to start

Startability of CVT vehicle with

ambient temperature of -22 °F

(-30 °C) or lower

BK0277700US.book 62 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Turbocharger operation

Features and controls 5-63

lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”

(REVERSE) position.

This occurs because the transaxle has not

warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a

problem. If this occurs, place the selector

lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the

engine idle for at least 10 minutes.

The transaxle will warm up, and you will be

able to start normally.

Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up

operation.

N00537301090

N00560201103

The CVT will automatically and continuously

change its gear ratio depending on road and

driving conditions. This helps achieve

smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.

Also you can manually shift the transmission

up and down. Refer to “Sports mode” on page

5-67.

The transmission prevents unnecessary

upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is

released and ensures smooth driving.

According to the conditions, the transmission

will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio

to achieve stronger engine braking. This may

help reduce your need to use the service

brake.

N00560301104

As an additional safety precaution, models

equipped with a CVT have a shift-lock device

that holds the selector lever in the “P”

(PARK) position. To move the selector lever

from the “P” (PARK) position to another

position, follow the steps below.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.

2. Press and hold the lock button.

3. Move the selector lever to the desired

position.

The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-

cally when the selector lever is in the “D”

(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of

the vehicle and the position of the accelerator

pedal.

The selector lever (A) has two gates; the main

gate (B) and sports mode gate (C).

Turbocharger operation

CAUTION

 Do not run the engine at high speeds (for

example, by revving it or by accelerating

rapidly) immediately after starting it.

 Do not stop the engine immediately after

high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the

engine to idle to give the turbocharger a

chance to cool down.

 Replace the engine oil at the specified inter-

vals. If the engine oil is not replaced, the tur-

bocharger could malfunction.

Continuously variable

transmission (CVT)

DRIVING UPHILL

DRIVING DOWNHILL

Selector lever operation

NOTE

 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”

(PARK) to other position if the ignition

switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-

tion, or if the key has been removed, or the

operation mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if

the brake pedal is not pressed and held down.

BK0277700US.book 63 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

5-64 Features and controls

In the main gate, selector lever has four posi-

tions, and is equipped with a lock button (D)

to avoid inadvertent selection of the wrong

gear.

N00547501024

When the selector lever cannot be shifted

from the “P” (PARK) position to another

position while the brake pedal is pressed and

held down with the ignition switch at the

“ON” position or the operation mode in ON,

the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-

anism may be malfunctioning.

Immediately have your vehicle checked by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

If you need to move the vehicle, shift the

selector lever as follows.

1. Make sure the parking brake is firmly

applied.

2. Stop the engine if it is running.

The lock button must be pushed

while the brake pedal is depressed

to move the selector lever.

The lock button must be pushed to

move the selector lever.

The lock button need not be

pushed to move the selector lever.

WARNING

 If the lock button is always pushed to

operate the selector lever, the lever may be

accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)

or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not

to push the lock button when performing

the operations indicated by in the

illustration.

 Always press the brake pedal when shift-

ing the selector lever into a selector posi-

tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.

When beginning to drive, do not shift the

selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)

position while pressing the accelerator

pedal. This will cause the vehicle to

“jump” forward or backward.

NOTE

 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,

make sure you stop briefly at each position.

After operating, check the position in the

multi-information display.

 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,

the shift-lock device activates to prevent the

selector lever from being moved from the

“P” (PARK) position.

 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

tion, depress the brake pedal before moving

the selector lever. If you attempt to move the

selector lever before depressing the brake

pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.

When the selector lever cannot

be shifted from the “P” (PARK)

position

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 64 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

Features and controls 5-65

3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its

tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry

gently as shown to remove the cover.

4. Depress the brake pedal with the right

foot.

5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock

release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to

the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while

pressing the screwdriver down.

N00560401105

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, the selector lever position is shown on

the multi-information display.

N00582900060

If the ambient temperature is low, the selector

lever position display on the multi-informa-

tion display may blink when the selector

lever is placed in the “D” (DRIVE), or “R”

(REVERSE) position immediately after the

engine has been started. This indicates that

the transmission requires warming up. While

the display is blinking, the vehicle will not

move, because the transmission keeps disen-

gaging until the warm up is completed even if

the selector lever is placed in the “D” or “R”

position.

When the selector lever position display is

blinking, perform the following procedure:

1. Depress the brake pedal with your right

foot and place the selector lever in the

“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several

seconds.

2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then

place the selector lever in the “D”

(DRIVE), or “R” (REVERSE) position. If

the selector lever position display stops

blinking, the warm up is completed and

the transmission will function normally.

3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps

1 and 2 above.

Selector lever position display

When the selector lever position

display blinks (if the ambient tem-

perature is low)

WARNING

 To avoid unintended vehicle movement,

keep brake pedal applied with your right

foot and do not depress the accelerator

pedal, while the selector lever position dis-

play is blinking.

NOTE

 While the selector lever position display is

blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently.

BK0277700US.book 65 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

5-66 Features and controls

N00560501148

When the warning display or the warn-

ing display appears on the information screen

in the multi-information display while you

are driving, there could be a malfunction in

the CVT.

N00560601110

This position locks the transmission to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can

be started in the “P” (PARK) position.

Move the lever to this position only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Warning display

NOTE

 The selector lever position display blinks at

the time of or warning display

appears.

 The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi-

tion display will blink only when there is a

problem with the CVT position switch.

It is not seen during normal driving.

CAUTION

 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while

driving, the warning display or the

warning display will appear on the informa-

tion screen in the multi-information display.

In this case, follow these procedures:

[When warning display is showing]

The CVT fluid is overheating. The engine

control may activate to lower the CVT fluid

temperature, causing the engine revolutions

and vehicle speed to decrease, In this case,

take one of the following procedures.

• Slow down your vehicle.

• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the

selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,

and open the engine hood with the engine

running to allow the engine to cool down.

NOTE

After a while, confirm that the warning

display is no longer showing. It is safe to

continue driving if the display is no longer

showing. If the warning display remains or

flashes frequently, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice immediately.

[When warning display is showing]

It may be that there is something unusual

happening in the CVT, causing a safety

device to activate. Have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice immediately.

Selector lever positions

“P” PARK

“R” REVERSE

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 66 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

Features and controls 5-67

At this position, the transmission is disen-

gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on

a manual transaxle and should be used when

the vehicle is not moving for an extended

length of time during driving, such as in a

traffic jam.

This position is used for most city and high-

way driving. The transmission will automati-

cally and continuously change its gear ratio

depending on road and driving conditions.

N00560701124

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, sports mode is selected by gently

pushing the selector lever from the “D”

(DRIVE) position into sports mode gate (A).

To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, gently

push the selector lever back into the main

gate (B).

In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rap-

idly simply by moving the selector lever

backward and forward or using the sportronic

steering wheel paddle shifter at the steering

wheel (for vehicles equipped with the spor-

tronic steering wheel paddle shifter). In con-

trast to a M/T, the sports mode allows gear

shifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

CAUTION

 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in

motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”

(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while

the vehicle is in motion, the transmission

may be damaged.

“N” NEUTRAL

WARNING

 Never move the selector lever to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position while driving since

you could accidentally slip it into the “P”

(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,

damaging the transmission.

 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when

stopped on a slope, the engine should be

started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in

“N” (NEUTRAL) position.

 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot

on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in

“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-

ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-

tion.

“D” DRIVE

CAUTION

 To prevent transmission damage, never shift

into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in

motion.

Sports mode

WARNING

NOTE

 You can shift into sports mode with the spor-

tronic steering wheel paddle shifter when the

selector lever is in the main gate (B) as well.

Also, you can return to the “D” (DRIVE)

operation in any of following ways.

When returning to “D” (DRIVE) operation,

the selector lever position display will

change to “D” (DRIVE) position.

• Pull the sportronic steering wheel paddle

shifter on the (SHIFT UP) side for lon-

ger than 2 seconds.

• Stop the vehicle.

• Push the selector lever from the “D”

(DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A)

and push the selector lever back into the

main gate (B).

BK0277700US.book 67 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

5-68 Features and controls

N00560901083

In sports mode, the currently selected shift

range is displayed on the information screen

in the multi-information display.

N00560801109

(SHIFT UP)

Transmission shifts up once by each

operation.

(SHIFT DOWN)

Transmission shifts down once by each

operation.

CAUTION

 In sports mode, the driver must execute

upward shifts in accordance with prevailing

road conditions, taking care to keep the

engine speed below the tachometer’s red

zone.

 Repeated continuous operation of the selec-

tor lever or the sportronic steering wheel

paddle shifter will continuously switch shift

position.

 Shift ranges may not change when the lateral

paddle shifters are operated at the same time.

NOTE

 Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-

ward direction from 1st to 8th. To reverse or

park the vehicle, move the selector lever to

the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) posi-

tion.

 To maintain good running performance, the

transmission may refuse to perform an

upshift when the selector lever or the spor-

tronic steering wheel paddle shifter on the

“ (SHIFT UP)” side is pulled at certain

vehicle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving

of the engine, the transmission may refuse to

perform a downshift when the selector lever

or the sportronic steering wheel paddle

shifter on the “ (SHIFT DOWN)” side is

pulled at certain vehicle speeds. When this

happens, a buzzer sounds to indicate that a

downshift is not going to take place.

 Downward shifts are made automatically

when the vehicle slows down. Before the

vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically

selected.

 The upward shift may be made automatically

in sports mode when the engine speed rises

and approaches the tachometer’s red zone.

Sports mode display

Operation of the CVT

CAUTION

 Before selecting a position with the engine

running and the vehicle stationary, firmly

depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-

cle from creeping.

The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the

CVT is engaged, especially when the engine

speed or idle speed is high, or with the air

conditioning operating.

Do not release the brake pedal until you are

ready to drive away.

 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at

all times.

Using the left foot could cause driver move-

ment delay in case of an emergency.

 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run

the engine at high revolutions when shifting

from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

BK0277700US.book 68 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

Features and controls 5-69

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)

position (when passing another vehicle) push

the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will

automatically downshift.

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic

lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever

position and held stationary with the service

brake.

For longer waiting periods with the engine

running, place the selector lever in the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking

brake, while holding the vehicle stationary

with the service brake.

Prior to moving off after having stopped the

vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in

“D” (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi-

tion.

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,

and then move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position.

If the CVT does not shift while driving, or

your vehicle does not pick up enough speed

when starting on an uphill slope, it may be

that there is something unusual happening in

the transmission, causing a safety device to

activate. Immediately have your vehicle

checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

 Operating the accelerator pedal while the

other foot is resting on the brake pedal will

affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-

mature wear of brake pads.

 Use the selector lever in the correct shift

position in accordance with driving condi-

tions.

Never coast downhill backward in the driv-

ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE) position or

sports mode} or coast forward in the “R”

(REVERSE) position.

Engine stopping and increased brake pedal

and steering effort could lead to an accident.

 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal

pressed when the vehicle is stationary.

This can damage the CVT.

Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal

while holding down the brake pedal with the

selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,

the engine revolutions may not rise as high

as when performing the same operation with

the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)

position.

Passing acceleration

CAUTION

NOTE

 In sports mode, downshifts do not take place

when the accelerator is depressed all the way

to the floor.

Waiting

CAUTION

 To avoid transmission overheating, never try

to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by

using the accelerator pedal. Always apply

the parking brake and/or service brake.

 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while

the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-

ation may occur if the selector lever is in a

position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”

(NEUTRAL).

Parking

When the CVT makes no speed

change

NOTE

 When the warning display and “SLOW

DOWN” or the warning display and

“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the

information screen in the multi-information

display, there could be a malfunction in the

CVT. Refer to “Continuously variable trans-

mission (CVT): Warning display” on page

5-66.

BK0277700US.book 69 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped)

5-70 Features and controls

N00541301118

S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics

control system that helps enhance driving

performance, cornering performance, and

vehicle stability over a wide range of driving

conditions through integrated management of

the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC,

the ABS and the ASC.

The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys-

tem that improves acceleration performance

and stability performance by controlling

front-rear distribution of driving torque with

operating the electronic control coupling

arranged in the rear differential assembly.

Refer to “Active Yaw Control (AYC)” on

page 5-81.

N00542401116

Select the drive mode from the following

three types to suit the driving conditions.

4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-

ing skills.

Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation”

section on page 5-72 and take care to drive

safety.

S-AWC (Super-All Wheel

Control)

(if so equipped)

CAUTION

 Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S-

AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of

physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys-

tem, like any other system, has limits and

cannot help you to maintain traction and con-

trol of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reck-

less driving can lead to accidents. It is the

driver’s responsibility to drive carefully.

This means taking into account the traffic,

road and environmental conditions.

Electronically Controlled 4WD

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with lever type park-

ing brake, if the parking brake lever is pulled

up while the vehicle is moving, the front-rear

distribution of driving torque control will be

temporarily suspended, which will allow the

rear wheel to lock easier.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

S-AWC drive mode

S-AWC

drive

mode

Function

AUTO

This mode can be used on both

dry and wet roads. The distri-

bution of driving/braking

torque to each wheel is auto-

matically controlled according

to the driving condition.

SNOW

This mode is for driving on

slippery road surfaces, such as

snow-covered roads.

GRAVEL

This mode is suitable mainly

for driving on unpaved or

rough roads.

This mode provides 4WD high

driving performance and stable

cornering performance.

S-AWC

drive

mode

Function

BK0277700US.book 70 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-71

N00583000068

The drive mode can be switched by press the

switch while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position or the operation mode in ON.

If you press the switch, you can change the

drive mode in the order of AUTO, SNOW,

GRAVEL, AUTO.

N00583100043

The currently selected drive mode is dis-

played on the multi-information display.

In addition, when the drive mode is changed,

the selected mode appears on the interrupt

display screen of the information screen in

the multi-information display.

The drive mode display will appear on the

information screen for a few seconds, and

then the original screen will return.

S-AWC drive mode-selector

CAUTION

 Do not operate the drive mode-selector with

the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or

in similar conditions. The vehicle could

lunge in an unexpected direction.

 Driving on dry, paved roads in “GRAVEL”

and “SNOW” mode causes increased fuel

consumption and noise and vibration.

NOTE

 The drive mode can be switched while driv-

ing or stopped.

S-AWC drive mode display

Example: “AUTO” mode is selected.

CAUTION

 If the selected drive mode indicator begins

blinking, the drive mode will automatically

switch to protect the drive-system compo-

nents. A warning will also be displayed in

the information screen in the multi-informa-

tion display.

Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops

blinking, you may resume normal driving.

 If the drive mode indicator is blinking, a

problem has occurred with the S-AWC. A

warning will also be displayed in the infor-

mation screen in the multi-information dis-

play.

Have your vehicle inspected immediately by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 Make sure that all four tires are the same

specified size, type, and brand, and have no

significant difference in the amount of wear

for all four wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC

system may not work properly may be dis-

played.

BK0277700US.book 71 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

4-wheel drive operation

5-72 Features and controls

N00542501087

The S-AWC operation status can be displayed

on the information screen in the multi-infor-

mation display.

To display the status, press the multi-informa-

tion meter switch to change the information

screen.

Refer to “Information screen (With the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode in ON)” on

page 5-148.

The S-AWC operation status is displayed.

N00530601212

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for

use on pavement.

But its unique 4-wheel drive system allows

you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads,

to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar

locations.

Not only does this ensure better handling on

dry, paved roads but also permits better trac-

tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow-

covered roads and when moving out of mud.

But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or

towing in rough conditions.

It is particularly important to note that 4-

wheel drive may not give sufficient hill

climbing ability and engine braking on steep

slopes. You should try to avoid driving on

steep slopes.

Also, you must exercise caution when driving

on sand and mud and when driving through

water because sufficient traction may not be

available in certain circumstances.

Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas

where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or

mud.

S-AWC operation display

Display example

Yaw control function display

The amount of the yaw moment is displayed

as a bar graph.

A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the

vehicle’s center of gravity

B, C- Counterclockwise yaw moment

about the vehicle’s center of gravity

Traction control level display

The strength of the traction control opera-

tion (between the front and rear wheels) is

displayed in section E of the meter as a bar

graph.

WARNING

 Always concentrate on your driving first.

Keep your eyes and mind on the road. Dis-

tractions while driving can lead to an acci-

dent.

4-wheel drive operation

WARNING

 Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi-

cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim-

its to the system and ability to maintain

control and traction. Reckless driving may

lead to accidents. Always drive carefully,

taking account of the road conditions.

 Improperly operating this vehicle on or

off-pavement can cause an accident or

rollover in which you and your passengers

could be seriously injured or killed.

• Follow all instructions and guidelines in

the owner’s manual.

• Keep your speed low and do not drive

faster than conditions.

BK0277700US.book 72 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

4-wheel drive operation

Features and controls 5-73

When turning a sharp corner in “GRAVEL”

position at low speed, a slight difference in

steering may be experienced similar to feel-

ing as if the brakes were applied. This is

called tight corner braking and results from

each of the four tires being at a different dis-

tance from the corner. The phenomenon is

typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this

occurs, either straighten out the steering

wheel or change to another mode.

Set the drive mode-selector to “SNOW” in

accordance with the road conditions, and then

gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a

smooth start.

Set the drive mode-selector to “GRAVEL”

and then gradually depress the accelerator

pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on

the accelerator pedal as constant as possible,

and drive at low speed.

NOTE

 Driving on rough roads can be hard on a

vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be

sure all scheduled maintenance and service

has been done, and that you have inspected

your vehicle. Pay special attention to the

condition of the tires, and check the tire pres-

sures.

 Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the

operator for any damage or injury caused or

liability incurred by improper and negligent

operation of a vehicle. All techniques of

vehicle operation depend on the skill and

experience of the operator and other partici-

pating parties. Any deviation from the rec-

ommended operating instructions above is at

their own risk.

 Note that the stopping distance required of

the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little

from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.

When driving on a snow-covered road or a

slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you

keep a sufficient distance between your vehi-

cle and the one ahead of you.

 The driving posture should be more upright;

adjust the seat to a good position for easy

steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear

the seat belt.

 After driving on rough roads, check each

part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly

with water. Refer to the “Inspection and

maintenance following rough road opera-

tion” section and “Vehicle care and Mainte-

nance” sections.

CAUTION

 Setting the drive mode-selector to

“GRAVEL” and “SNOW” position to drive

on dry paved road will increase fuel con-

sumption, with possible noise and vibration

generation.

Turning sharp corners

On snowy or icy roads

NOTE

 The use of snow tires is recommended.

 Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,

avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-

ing (downshifting).

CAUTION

 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration

and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con-

trol of the vehicle could be lost.

Driving on sandy or muddy

roads

CAUTION

 Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly

on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor-

mal road surfaces, the engine and other

drive-system components are put under

excessive strain when driving on such a sur-

face. This could lead to accidents.

 If any of the following conditions occur

while the vehicle is being driven, immedi-

ately park your vehicle in a safe place and

follow these procedures:

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 73 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

5-74 Features and controls

Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill

climbing ability and engine braking on steep

slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even

though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi-

cle.

N00537800085

If the electrical circuits become wet, further

operation of the vehicle will be impossible;

therefore, avoid driving through water unless

absolutely necessary. If driving through water

is unavoidable, use the following procedure:

Check the depth of the water and the terrain

before attempting to drive through it. Drive

slowly to avoid creating excessive water

splashing.

N00530700085

After operating the vehicle in rough road con-

ditions, be sure to perform the following

inspection and maintenance procedures:

 Check that the vehicle has not been dam-

aged by rocks, gravel, etc.

• If the engine coolant temperature display

flashes on the information screen in the

multi-information display or the engine

power drops suddenly.

Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.

• If the “ ” warning display and “SLOW

DOWN” or the “ ” warning display and

“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the

information screen in the multi-information

display.

Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-66.

WARNING

 When attempting to rock your vehicle out

of a stuck position, be sure that the area

around the vehicle is clear of people and

physical objects. The rocking motion may

cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-

ward/backward, causing injury or dam-

age to nearby people or objects.

NOTE

 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration

and sharp turning; such operations could

result in the vehicle becoming stuck.

CAUTION

 If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or

muddy roads, it can often be moved with a

rocking motion. Move the selector lever

alternately between the “D” (DRIVE) and

“R” (REVERSE) positions while pressing

lightly on the accelerator pedal.

 Driving on rough road can cause rust on the

vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon

as possible after such use.

Climbing/descending sharp

grades

Driving through water

NOTE

CAUTION

 Never drive through water that is deep

enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust

pipe. Do not change the selector lever posi-

tion while driving through water.

Frequent driving through water can

adversely affect the life span of the vehicle;

consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice and

take the necessary measures to prepare,

inspect, and repair the vehicle.

 After driving through water, apply the brakes

to be sure they are functioning properly. If

the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-

erly, dry them out by driving slowly while

lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect

each part of the vehicle carefully.

Inspection and maintenance

following rough road opera-

tion

BK0277700US.book 74 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles

Features and controls 5-75

 Carefully wash the vehicle with water.

Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly

depressing the brake pedal in order to dry

out the brakes. If the brakes still do not

function properly, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice as soon as possible to

have the brakes checked.

 Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog-

ging the radiator core.

 After driving through water, check the

engine, transaxle and differential oil. If

the oil or grease is milky or cloudy

because of water contamination, it must

be replaced with new oil.

 Check the inside of the vehicle. If water

entry is found, dry the carpet etc.

 Inspect the headlights. If water is in the

headlight housing, have it drained at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

N00530801230

Since the driving torque can be applied to the

four wheels, the driving performance of the

vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is

greatly affected by the condition of the tires.

Pay close attention to the tires.

 Install only the specified tires on all

wheels. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on

page 11-7.

 Be sure all four tires and wheels are the

same size and type.

When it is necessary to replace any of the

tires or wheels, replace all four.

 All tires should be rotated before the wear

difference between the front and rear tires

is recognizable.

Good vehicle performance cannot be

expected if there is a difference in wear

between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on

page 9-17.

 Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

Cautions on the handling of

4-wheel drive vehicles

Tires and wheels

CAUTION

 Always use tires of the same size, type, and

brand that have no wear differences. Using

tires of different size, type, brands or degree

of wear, will increase the differential oil tem-

perature and result in possible damage to the

driving system. Further, the drive train will

be subject to excessive loading, possibly

leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or

other serious failures.

Towing

CAUTION

 Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the

front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A

or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in

damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing.

If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type

C or Type D equipment.

 Even in “AUTO” drive mode, the vehicle

cannot be towed with the front or the rear

wheels on the ground.

BK0277700US.book 75 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Service brake

5-76 Features and controls

N00517500275

Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,

resulting in poor brake response and prema-

ture wear of the brake pads.

When driving down a long or steep hill, use

engine braking by downshifting.

N00517600364

Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes

for more braking force with less brake pedal

effort.

Your brakes are designed to operate at full

capacity, even if the power assist is not being

used.

If the power assist is not being used, the effort

needed to press the brake pedal is greater.

If you should lose the power assist for some

reason, the brakes will still work.

If the power brake unit or either of the two

brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-

erly, the rest of the brake system will still

work, but the vehicle will not slow down as

quickly.

You will know this has happened if you find

you need to press the brake down farther, or

harder when slowing down or stopping, or if

the brake warning light and the warning dis-

play in the multi-information display come

on.

N00550700124

The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a

metallic squeal when the brake pads have

worn down enough to need service.

If you hear this sound, have the brake pads

replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Jacking up a 4-wheel drive

vehicle

WARNING

 Do not crank the engine while jacking up

the vehicle.

The tire on the ground may turn and the

vehicle may roll off the jack.

Service brake

Brake pedal

WARNING

 Do not leave any objects near the brake

pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;

doing so could prevent the full pedal

stroke that would be necessary in an

emergency. Make sure that the pedal can

be operated freely at all times. Make sure

the floor mat is securely held in place.

CAUTION

 It is important not to drive the vehicle with

your foot resting on the brake pedal when

braking is not required. This practice can

result in very high brake temperatures, pre-

mature lining wear, and possible damage to

the brakes.

Power brakes

WARNING

 Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.

Keep the engine running whenever your

vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the

engine while driving, the power brake

booster will stop working and your brakes

will not work as well.

 If the power assist is lost or if either brake

hydraulic system stops working properly,

take your vehicle to an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice immediately.

Brake pad wear alarm

WARNING

 Driving with worn brake pads will make it

harder to stop, and can cause an accident.

BK0277700US.book 76 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Brake auto hold (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-77

N00592000093

When the vehicle is stopped at traffic lights

etc., the vehicle can be held stationary with

the brake auto hold system even if you

release your foot from the brake pedal.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the

brakes are released.

If the brake auto hold switch is pressed while

all of the following conditions are met, the

system will change to the standby state and

the indicator light (A) on the switch comes

on.

 The ignition switch or operation mode in

ON.

 The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

 The driver’s door is closed.

Brake auto hold (if so equipped)

WARNING

 Do not overly rely on the brake auto hold

system. On steep slope, depress the brake

pedal firmly because the system may not

hold the vehicle stationary.

 Never leave the vehicle while it is being

stopped by the brake auto hold system.

When leaving the vehicle, apply the park-

ing brake and move the selector lever to

the “P” (PARK) position.

 Do not use brake auto hold system when

driving on slippery roads. The system may

not hold the vehicle stationary and could

result in an accident.

NOTE

 While operating the brake auto hold system,

you may hear an operation noise to increase

braking force when the system detected the

movement of the vehicle. This does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

How to use brake auto hold

To turn on brake auto hold

NOTE

 When the brake auto hold system cannot be

used, a buzzer will sound and the following

warning will appear on the information

screen in the multi-information display.

• If this warning appears, confirm that all of

the conditions for system operation are met

and that there is no malfunction in the sys-

tem.

• If this warning appears, fasten the driver’s

seat belt.

 If any of the following occur while the sys-

tem is standby state, the brake auto hold sys-

tem will be turned off automatically and the

indicator light on the switch goes off.

A buzzer will sound and the message will

appear on the information screen in the

multi-information display.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• When the driver’s door is opened.

• When there is a malfunction in the system

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 77 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Brake auto hold (if so equipped)

5-78 Features and controls

When the vehicle is stopped by depressing

the brake pedal with the selector lever in any

position other than “P” (PARK) or “R”

(REVERSE), the brake auto hold activates

and the vehicle will be held stationary.

The brake auto hold indicator light in the

instrument cluster will come on while the

system activates.

 If keeping pressing the brake auto hold

switch after setting the brake auto hold to

ON (stand by), the brake auto hold will

return to OFF as a protection function is

operated.

After returning to OFF, the brake auto hold

will not be switched to ON (Stand by) even if

the brake auto hold switch is pressed. To set

the brake auto hold to ON, restart the engine

and press the brake auto hold switch again.

To activate brake auto hold

NOTE

CAUTION

 Release the brake pedal only after the brake

auto hold indicator light has illuminated.

NOTE

 In the following situations, the brake auto

hold system may not operate temporarily.

• The vehicle is stopped on a slippery road.

• The vehicle was stopped while the steering

wheel was turned all the way to the left or

right.

• The vehicle is being turned on a parking lot

turntable.

If this occurs, the brake auto hold system

will return to the normal operation if you

depress the accelerator pedal and the vehi-

cle starts moving again.

 If the following operation is performed, the

brake auto hold will be deactivated and the

brake auto hold indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster goes off.

• When shifting the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position with

depressing the brake pedal.

• When the Electric parking brake is applied

by using the Electric parking brake switch.

 While the vehicle is held stationary with the

brake auto hold system, the Electric parking

brake will be automatically applied under the

following conditions, and a buzzer will

sound and the message will appear on the

information screen in the multi-information

display.

• After approximately 10 minutes has elapsed

with applying the brake auto hold system.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• When the driver’s door is opened.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position or the operation mode is

put in OFF.

• When the system detects the vehicle mov-

ing down a slope.

If the Electric parking brake cannot be

applied automatically due to the system mal-

function, the message will appear on the

information screen in the multi-information

display. Depress the brake pedal.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 78 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Hill start assist

Features and controls 5-79

Depress the acceleration pedal with the selec-

tor lever in any position other than “P”

(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

The brakes are released, and the brake auto

hold indicator light in the instrument cluster

will go off.

Press the brake auto hold switch to turn off

the brake auto hold. The indicator light on the

switch goes off.

If you want to turn off the system while the

brake auto hold indicator light is illuminated,

press the switch with depressing the brake

pedal.

N00562601130

The hill start assist makes it easy to start off

on a steep uphill slope by preventing the

vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the

braking force for approximately 2 seconds

when you move your foot from the brake

pedal to the accelerator pedal.

N00562701144

1. Stop the vehicle completely using the

brake pedal.

2. Release the brake pedal and the hill start

assist will maintain the braking force

applied while stopped for approximately 2

seconds.

 If the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is put in OFF

with the selector lever in any position other

than “P” (PARK) position, the message may

appear on the information screen in the

multi-information display.

If the message appears, shift the selector

lever to the “P” (PARK) position while

depressing the brake pedal.

To start the vehicle

NOTE

To turn off brake auto hold

NOTE

 If the brake auto hold system is turned off

without the brake pedal being depressed, a

buzzer will sound and the message will

appear on the information screen in the

multi-information display.

Hill start assist

CAUTION

 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to

prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.

Under certain circumstances, even when hill

start assist is activated, the vehicle may

move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-

ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily

loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-

pery.

 The hill start assist is not designed to keep

the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes

for more than 2 seconds.

 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the

hill start assist to maintain a stopped position

as an alternative to depressing the brake

pedal.

Doing so could cause an accident.

 Do not turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

or “ACC” position while the hill start assist

is operating. The hill start assist could stop

operating, which could result in an accident.

To operate

BK0277700US.book 79 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Brake assist system

5-80 Features and controls

3. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill

start assist will gradually decrease the

braking force as the vehicle starts moving.

N00562801129

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

tem, the following warning light/display will

turn on.

Warning light

- ASC indicator

Warning display

N00567301145

The brake assist system is a device assisting

drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal

firmly such as in emergency stop situations

and provides greater braking force.

If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the

brakes will be applied with more force than

usual.

NOTE

 The hill start assist is activated when all of

the following conditions are met.

• The engine is running.

(The hill start assist will not be activated

while the engine is starting or immediately

after the engine is started.)

• The selector lever is in any position other

than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

• The vehicle is completely stationary, with

the brake pedal depressed.

• The parking brake is released.

 The hill start assist will not operate if the

accelerator pedal is depressed before the

brake pedal is released.

 The hill start assist also operates when

reversing on an uphill slope.

Warning light/display

CAUTION

 If the warning is displayed, the hill start

assist will not operate. Start off carefully.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the

engine.

Restart the engine and check whether the

light/display goes out, in which case the hill

start assist is again working normally.

If they remain displayed or reappear fre-

quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle

immediately, but the vehicle should be

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice as soon as possible.

Brake assist system

CAUTION

 The brake assist system is not a device

designed to exercise braking force greater

than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a

sufficient distance between your vehicle and

a vehicle in front of you without relying too

much on the brake assist system.

NOTE

 Once the brake assist system is operational,

it maintains great braking force even if the

brake pedal is lightly released.

To stop its operation, completely remove

your foot from the brake pedal.

 The brake assist system may become opera-

tional when the brake pedal is fully

depressed even if it has not been depressed

suddenly.

 When the brake assist system is in use while

driving, you may feel as if the depressed

brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small

motions in conjunction with the operation

noise, or the vehicle body and the steering

wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake

assist system is operating normally and does

not indicate faulty operation. Continue to

depress the brake pedal.

 You may hear an operation noise when the

brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed

while stationary. This does not indicate a

malfunction and the brake assist system is

operating normally.

BK0277700US.book 80 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

Features and controls 5-81

N00596700027

The Active Yaw Control (AYC) is a system

with a yaw control function, that controls the

left-right driving/braking force using the

brakes.

The yaw control function is a function that

enhances vehicle cornering performance and

vehicle stability with management of vehicle

turning power (yaw moment) by controlling

the drive power difference of the left and

right wheels and the braking force when the

vehicle does not turn in response to steering

input, such as when the steering wheel is

turned quickly or when driving on slippery

road.

The AYC operation status can be displayed

on the information screen in the multi-infor-

mation display.

To display the status, press the multi-informa-

tion display switch to change the information

screen.

Refer to “Information screen (With the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode in ON)” on

page 5-148.

Refer to “S-AWC operation display” on page

5-72.

The AYC operation status is displayed.

The amount of the yaw moment is displayed

as a bar graph.

N00517901351

The anti-lock braking system helps prevent

the wheels from locking up when braking.

 When the anti-lock brake system warning

light or only active stability control warning

light illuminate, the brake assist system in

not functioning.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

Yaw control function

NOTE

CAUTION

 Control of the braking force does not

enhance the stopping performance of the

vehicle, therefore, pay careful attention to

the safety of your surroundings when driv-

ing.

AYC operation display

Yaw control function display

Vehicles with S-AWC

Vehicles with 2WD

A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the

vehicle’s center of gravity

B, C- Counterclockwise yaw moment about

the vehicle’s center of gravity

WARNING

 Always concentrate on your driving first.

Keep your eyes and mind on the road.

Distractions while driving can lead to an

accident.

Anti-lock braking system

BK0277700US.book 81 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Anti-lock braking system

5-82 Features and controls

This helps maintain vehicle drivability and

steering wheel handling.

 When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden

braking), steering is slightly different

from normal driving conditions. Use the

steering wheel carefully.

 Always keep a safe distance from the

vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-

cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking

system, leave a greater braking distance

when:

• Driving on gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• Driving on uneven road surfaces.

 Operation of anti-lock braking system is

not restricted situations where brakes are

applied suddenly. This system may also

prevent the wheels from locking when

you drive over manholes, steel roadwork

plates, road markings, or any uneven road

surface.

 When the anti-lock braking system is in

use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-

ing and hear a unique sound. It may also

feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.

In this situation, simply hold the brake

pedal down firmly. Do not pump the

brake, which will result in reduced

braking performance.

N00531601701

Warning light

Warning display

If there is a malfunction in the system, the

anti-lock braking system warning light will

come on and the warning display will appear

on the information screen in the multi-infor-

mation display.

Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak-

ing system warning light only comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the operation mode is put in ON

and goes off a few seconds later.

Driving hints

CAUTION

 The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent

accidents. It is your responsibility to take

safety precautions and to drive carefully.

 To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking

system, be sure all four wheels and tires are

the same size and the same type.

NOTE

 A whining sound is emitted from the engine

compartment when driving immediately

after starting the engine. These are the nor-

mal sounds the anti-lock braking system

makes when performing a self-check. It does

not indicate a malfunction.

 The anti-lock braking system can be used

after the vehicle has reached a speed over

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops

working when the vehicle slows below

3 mph (5 km/h).

Anti-lock braking system warn-

ing light / display

CAUTION

 Any of the following indicates that the anti-

lock braking system is not functioning and

only the standard brake system is working.

(The standard brake system is functioning

normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle

to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice.

• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position or the operation mode is put in ON,

the warning light does not come on or it

remains on and does not go off

• The warning light comes on while driving

• The warning display appears while driving

BK0277700US.book 82 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Anti-lock braking system

Features and controls 5-83

N00531701715

 Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-

ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Test the system by restarting the engine

and driving at a speed of approximately

12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

If the warning light/display then remains

off during driving, there is no abnormal

condition.

However, if the warning light/display do

not disappear, or if they come on again

when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-

cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or repair facility of your

choice as soon as possible.

Warning light

Warning display

The anti-lock braking system and brake force

distribution function may not work, so hard

braking could make the vehicle unstable.

Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair

facility of your choice.

N00529201104

After driving on snow or icy roads, remove

any snow and ice which may have be left

around the wheels. When doing this, be care-

ful not to damage the wheel speed sensors

(A) and the cables located at each wheel.

If the warning light/display illu-

minate while driving

If only the anti-lock braking sys-

tem warning light/display illumi-

nate

If the anti-lock braking system

warning light/display and brake

warning light/display illuminate at

the same time

NOTE

 The anti-lock braking system warning light

and brake warning light illuminate at the

same time and the warning displays appear

alternately on the information screen in the

multi-information display.

After driving on icy roads

Front Rear

BK0277700US.book 83 ページ２０１９年３月１２日　火曜日　午前９時３４分

Electric power steering system (EPS)

5-84 Features and controls

N00568401172

The power steering system operates while the

engine is running. It helps reduce the effort

needed to turn the steering wheel.

The power steering system has mechanical

steering capability in case the power assist is

lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-

son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-

cle, but you will notice it takes much more

effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-

cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

Warning light

Warning display

If there is a malfunction in the system, the

warning light will come on and the warning

display will appear on the information screen

in the multi-information display.

Under normal conditions, the warning light

comes on when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position or the operation mode is

put in ON, and goes off after the engine has

started.

N00559101199

The Active stability control (ASC) takes

overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-

tem, traction control function and skid control

function to help maintain the vehicle’s control

and traction. Please read this section in con-

junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-

ing system, traction control function and skid

control function.

Anti-lock braking system  P.5-81

Electric power steering sys-

tem (EPS)

WARNING

 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is

moving. Stopping the engine would make

the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,

possibly resulting in an accident.

NOTE

 During repeated full-lock turning of the

steering wheel (for example, while you are

manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking

space), a protection function may be acti-

vated to prevent overheating of the power

steering system. This function will make the

steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In

this event, limit your turning of the steering

wheel for a while. When the system has

cooled down, the steering effort will return

to normal.

 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-

cle is stationary with the headlights on, the

headlights may become dim. This behavior

is not abnormal. The headlights will return to

their original brightness after a short while.

Electric power steering system

warning light/display

CAUTION

 If the warning display appears while the

engine is running, have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice as soon as

possible. It may become harder to turn the

steering wheel.

Active stability control

(ASC)

BK0277700US.book 84 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Active stability control (ASC)

Features and controls 5-85

Traction control function  P.5-85

Skid control function  P.5-85

N00559200021

On slippery surfaces, the traction control

function prevents the drive wheels from spin-

ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to

start moving from a stopped condition. It also

provides sufficient driving force and steering

performance as the vehicle turns while press-

ing the acceleration pedal.

N00559301074

The skid control function is designed to help

the driver maintain control of the vehicle on

slippery roads or during rapid steering

maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine

output and the brake on each wheel.

N00559401336

The ASC is automatically activated when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position

or the operation mode is put in ON. You can

deactivate the system by pressing down the

ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds or longer.

When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-

tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,

momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the

indicator is turned off.

CAUTION

 Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC

cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle. This system, like

any other system, has limits and cannot help

you to maintain traction and control of the

vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-

ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s

responsibillty to drive carefully, This means

taking into account the traffic, road and envi-

ronmental conditions.

 Be sure to use the same specified type and

size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the

ASC may not work properly.

 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip

differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC

may stop functioning properly.

NOTE

 An operation noise may be emitted from the

engine compartment in the following situa-

tions. The sound is associated with checking

the operations of the ASC. At this time, you

may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you

depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

• When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”

position or the operation mode is put in ON.

• When the vehicle is driven for a while after

the engine is turned on.

 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a

vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-

ing sound from the engine compartment.

This indicates that the system is operating

normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.

 When the anti-lock braking system warning

light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.

Traction control function

CAUTION

 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy

road, be sure to install snow tires and drive

the vehicle at moderate speeds.

Skid control function

NOTE

 The skid control function operates at speeds

of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.

ASC OFF switch

BK0277700US.book 85 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Active stability control (ASC)

5-86 Features and controls

N00559501252

N00546601158

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

tem, the following warning light/display will

turn on.

Warning light

CAUTION

 For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch

should be operated when your vehicle is

stopped.

 Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in

normal circumstances.

NOTE

 Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both the

stability control function and the traction

control function.

 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh

snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not

allow the engine speed to increase. In such

situations, temporarily turning off ASC with

the ASC OFF switch will make it easier to

move out your vehicle.

 If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch

after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken

operation protection function” will activate

and the ASC will turn back on.

ASC operation display or ASC

OFF indicator

ASC operation display/ASC indicator

The display/indicator will blink when

the ASC is operating.

ASC OFF indicator

This indicator will turn on when the

ASC is turned off with the ASC OFF

switch.

CAUTION

 When display/indicator blinks, ASC is

operating, which means that the road is slip-

pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-

ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower.

 If the temperature in the braking system con-

tinues to increase due to continuous brake

control on a slippery road surface, the

indicator will blink.

To prevent the brake system from overheat-

ing, the brake control of the traction control

function will be temporarily suspended.

The engine control of the traction control

function and normal brake operation will not

be affected.

Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the

temperature in the braking system has come

down, the indicator will be turned off and

the traction control function will start operat-

ing again.

NOTE

 The indicator may come on when you

start the engine. This means that the battery

voltage momentarily dropped when the

engine was started. It does not indicate a

malfunction, provided that the display goes

out immediately.

 When a spare tire has been put on your vehi-

cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be

lower, making it more likely that the dis-

play/indicator will blink.

ASC warning light/display

ASC indicator

ASC OFF indicator

BK0277700US.book 86 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cruise control

Features and controls 5-87

Warning display

N00546301096

N00518301668

Cruise control is an automatic speed control

system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-

vated at speeds from approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h). Cruise control does not work at

speeds below approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h).

CAUTION

 The system may be malfunctioning.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the

engine. Restart the engine and check whether

the light/display goes out. If they go out,

there is no abnormal condition. If they do not

go out or if they turn on frequently, it is not

necessary to stop the vehicle immediately,

but you should have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice as soon as

possible.

Towing

CAUTION

 When towing the vehicle with only the front

wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the

ground, do not place the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or do not put the operation

mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or putting the operation

mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,

resulting in an accident.

Note that the correct towing method depends

on the transmission type and the vehicle’s

drive configuration.

For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-11.

Cruise control

CAUTION

 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,

turn off the cruise control for safety.

 Do not use cruise control when driving con-

ditions will not allow you to stay at the same

speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,

slippery, on a steep downhill slope.

NOTE

 Cruise control may not be able to keep your

speed on uphills or downhills.

 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.

You may use the accelerator pedal if you

want to stay at your set speed.

 Your speed may increase to more than the set

speed on a steep downhill. You have to use

the brake to control your speed. As a result,

the set speed driving is deactivated.

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 87 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cruise control

5-88 Features and controls

N00518401496

1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode in ON, press

the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

to turn on the cruise control. The indicator

display appear on the information screen

of the multi-information display will

come on.

2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired

speed, then push down and release the

“SET -” switch when the indicator display

appear on the information screen of the

multi-information display. The vehicle

will then maintain the desired speed.

The “SET” indicator appears on the infor-

mation screen of the multi-information

display.

N00518501439

There are two ways to increase the set speed.

Push up and hold the “RES +” switch while

driving at the set speed, and your speed will

then gradually increase.

Cruise control switches

A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

Used to turn on and off the cruise con-

trol.

B- “SET -” switch

Used to reduce the set speed and to set

the desired speed.

C- “RES +” switch

Used to increase the set speed and to

return to the original set speed.

D- “CANCEL” switch

Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

NOTE

 When operating the cruise control switches,

press the cruise control switches correctly.

The set speed driving may be deactivated

automatically if two or more switches of the

cruise control are pressed at the same time.

To activate

NOTE

 When you release the “SET -” switch, the

vehicle speed will be set.

To increase the set speed

RES + switch

BK0277700US.book 88 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cruise control

Features and controls 5-89

When you reach your desired speed, release

the switch. Your new cruising speed is now

set.

To increase your speed in small amounts,

push up the “RES +” switch for less than

approximately 1 second and release it.

Each time you push up the “RES +” switch,

your vehicle will go approximately 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) faster.

While driving at the set speed, use the accel-

erator pedal to reach your desired speed and

then push down the “SET -” switch and

release the switch momentarily to set a new

desired cruising speed.

N00518601368

There are two ways to decrease the set speed.

Push down and hold the “SET -” switch while

driving at the set speed, and your speed will

slow down gradually.

When you reach your desired speed, release

the switch. Your new cruising speed is now

set.

To slow down your speed in small amounts,

push down the “SET -” switch for less than

approximately 1 second and release it.

Each time you push down the “SET -” switch,

your vehicle will slow down by approxi-

mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

While driving at the set speed, use the brake

pedal, which disengages the cruise control,

then push down the “SET -” switch and

release the switch momentarily to set a new

desired cruising speed.

Accelerator pedal

To decrease the set speed

SET - switch

Brake pedal

BK0277700US.book 89 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cruise control

5-90 Features and controls

N00541701138

Depress the accelerator pedal as you would

normally. When you release the pedal, you

will return to your set speed.

Depress the brake pedal to decrease the

speed. To return to the previously set speed,

push up the “RES +” switch.

Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page

5-91.

N00518801676

The set speed driving can be deactivated as

follows:

 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch (Cruise control will be turned off.)

 Press the “CANCEL” switch.

 Depress the brake pedal.

To temporarily increase or

decrease the speed

To temporarily increase the speed

NOTE

 In some driving conditions, the set speed

driving may be deactivated. If this happens,

refer to “To activate” on page 5-88 and

repeat the speed setting procedure.

To temporarily decrease the speed

To deactivate

BK0277700US.book 90 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cruise control

Features and controls 5-91

The set speed driving is deactivated automati-

cally in any of the following ways.

 When your speed slows to approximately

10 mph (15 km/h) or more below the set

speed because of a hill, etc.

 When your speed slows to approximately

20 mph (30 km/h) or less.

 When the active stability control (ASC)

starts operating.

Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”

on page 5-84.

Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated as follow:

 When the engine speed rises and

approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the

red-colored part of the tachometer dial).

N00518901420

If the set speed driving is deactivated by the

condition described in “To deactivate” on

page 5-90, you can resume the previously set

speed by push up the “RES +” switch while

driving at a speed of approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h) or higher.

The “SET” indicator appears on the informa-

tion screen of the multi-information display.

Under either of the following conditions,

however, using the switch does not allow you

to resume the previously set speed. In these

situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:

 The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch is pressed.

 The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is put in

OFF.

 Indicator go off.

WARNING

 Although the set speed driving will be

deactivated when shifting to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position, never move the

selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)

position while driving.

You would have no engine braking and

could cause a serious accident.

CAUTION

 When the set speed driving is deactivated

automatically in any situation other than

those listed above, there may be a system

malfunction.

Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch to turn off the cruise control and have

your vehicle inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

To resume the set speed

BK0277700US.book 91 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

5-92 Features and controls

N00576800064

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)

maintains a set speed with no need for you to

use the accelerator pedal. Using a sensor (A),

the system also measures the relative speed

and distance between your vehicle and a vehi-

cle in front, and maintains a set following dis-

tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in

front by automatically decelerating your vehi-

cle if it becomes too close to the vehicle in

front.

The cruising set speed can be set from 20 to

110 mph (30 to 180 km/h). The distance can

be selected from four levels.

If the vehicle in front decelerates, the ACC

will automatically apply limited braking to

maintain the distance, and if the front vehicle

then accelerates, the ACC will automatically

accelerate your vehicle up to the set speed. If

your vehicle is approaching too close to the

front vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a warn-

ing is shown in the multi-information display.

When the ACC detects no vehicle ahead, the

set speed will be maintained.

Conventional cruise control mode without the

distance control can also be selected.

Stop lights are illuminated during automatic

braking.

N00577000047

Adaptive Cruise Control

System (ACC)

(if so equipped)

WARNING

 Before using the ACC, read this entire sec-

tion to understand the limitations of this

system. Failure to follow instructions

could result in an accident.

 Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is

not a collision avoidance system or an

automatic driving system. It is designed to

use only limited braking and is never a

substitute for your safe and careful driv-

ing. Always be ready to apply the brakes

manually.

Cruise control switch

1- ACC ON/OFF switch

Used to turn on and off the ACC sys-

tem.

2- “SET -” switch

Used to set a desired speed or to reduce

the set speed.

3- “RES +” switch

Used to resume the control function

after cancelling the ACC or the conven-

tional cruise control.

Also used to increase the set speed.

4- “CANCEL” switch

Used to cancel the control function of

the ACC or the cruise control.

5- ACC distance switch

Used to set or change the following dis-

tance between your vehicle and a vehi-

cle in front.

BK0277700US.book 92 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-93

N00577100048

While the ACC is turned on, indicators for

the ACC are shown in the multi-information

display.

NOTE

 Operate the individual switches correctly and

one after another.

The ACC may be turned off or its control

function may be cancelled if two or more

switches are pressed concurrently

ACC indicators

1- ACC indicator:

Indicating that the ACC is turned on.

2- Control state indicator:

Indicating that ACC is activated.

Two types of indication; “SET” and

“HOLD” (stationary vehicle hold state)

3- Set speed indicator:

Indicating the set speed.

If the set speed is not set, “---” is

shown.

4- Front vehicle indicator:

Indicating when the ACC detects a

vehicle ahead.

When a front vehicle is detected while

the ACC is activated, the Active front

vehicle indicator shown in the illustra-

tion below will illuminate.

When a front vehicle is detected while

the ACC is not activated or the ACC is

canceled, the Stand by front vehicle

indicator will illuminate.

Display

State

Stand by Active

Vehicle in

front detected

5-Following distance indicator:

Indicating the following distance.

Two states: “Stand by” and “Active”

When a front vehicle is detected while

the ACC is activated, the Active follow-

ing distance indicator shown in the illus-

tration below will illuminate.

When a front vehicle is detected while

the ACC is not activated or the ACC is

canceled, the Stand by following dis-

tance indicator will illuminate.

State

Stand by Active

BK0277700US.book 93 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

5-94 Features and controls

N00577200081

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode in ON, press the

ACC ON/OFF switch.

The ACC indicators will appear in the multi-

information display.

Press the ACC ON/OFF switch to turn off the

ACC.

With the ACC turned on, push down the

“SET -” switch while driving, and when your

vehicle reaches your desired speed, release

the “SET -” switch. The ACC will activate

and initiate the speed control to maintain the

set speed.

The set indicator comes on, the set speed is

indicated and the following distance indicator

changes to the active display.

How to use ACC

To turn on ACC

State

Stand by Active

NOTE

 Every time the ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position or the operation mode in

OFF, the ACC is turned off.

To turn off ACC

NOTE

 The ACC can be turned off even while the

ACC is active.

 Every time the operation mode is turned off,

the ACC is turned off and the set speed is

erased.

To activate ACC control

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 94 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-95

While the ACC system is turned on (in the

standby state), if you push down the “SET -”

switch when a vehicle in front is detected

while your vehicle is stopped and you are

depressing the brake pedal, “HOLD” will

appear and the vehicle speed will be set to

20 mph (30 km/h).

You can set the speed anywhere from approx-

imately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h).

While a vehicle in front is being detected and

your vehicle speed is between approximately

0 to 20 mph (0 to 30 km/h), you can activate

the ACC. In this case, the set speed will be set

at 20 mph (30 km/h).

The ACC cannot otherwise be activated while

your vehicle is traveling less than 20 mph

(30 km/h) or greater than 110 mph

(180 km/h).

N00581300038

The speed of your vehicle will be maintained

at the speed you have set. The speed can be

set between approximately 20 to 110 mph (30

to 180 km/h).

N00581400042

The ACC will maintain the distance to the

front vehicle and will apply the brakes auto-

matically when the system judges braking is

necessary. The distance can be selected from

four levels.

When the front vehicle stops, the ACC will

automatically apply the brakes to stop your

vehicle.

After the vehicle stops, the ACC system auto-

matically enters the stationary vehicle hold

state. “HOLD” appears.

While the ACC system is in the stationary

vehicle hold state, if it is possible to resume

following the vehicle in front because it has

started moving, “ACC READY TO

RESUME” will appear on the information

screen of the multi-information display. To

start moving again, press the “RES+” switch

or depress the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

 When any of the following conditions are

present, the ACC will not activate.

• When your vehicle speed is more than

110 mph (180 km/h).

• When your vehicle is driven at speeds

between approximately 0 to 20 mph (0 to

30 km/h) and the ACC is not detecting a

vehicle in front.

• When ASC is in the OFF position.

• While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.

• When the selector lever is in positions other

than “D” (DRIVE).

• While the brake pedal is depressed (only

while the vehicle is moving).

• While the parking brake is applied.

• When the ACC system has judged that the

performance for detecting a front vehicle is

degraded.

• When an abnormality in the ACC system

has been detected.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• When the driver’s door is opened.

• When the vehicle is stopped on a steep

slope.

When ACC detects no vehicle

in front within the set distance

NOTE

 If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed on

a down slope, the system will automatically

apply the brake to maintain the vehicle set

speed.

NOTE

When ACC detects a vehicle in

front within the set distance

BK0277700US.book 95 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

5-96 Features and controls

When the ACC no longer detects a vehicle in

front, the buzzer will sound, the vehicle sym-

bol in the display will disappear and your

vehicle will slowly accelerate to the set

speed.

N00576900052

While the ACC is activated, if your vehicle is

approaching too closely to the vehicle in

front, the ACC gives a warning by sounding a

buzzer and displaying a message. Apply the

brakes to maintain the appropriate distance to

the vehicle in front.

WARNING

 Never leave your vehicle while the ACC

system is in the stationary vehicle hold

state. When leaving the vehicle, apply the

parking brake and move the selector lever

to the “P” (PARK) position.

NOTE

 When the ACC system is in the stationary

vehicle hold state, the stop lights will illumi-

nate.

 While the ACC system is in the stationary

vehicle hold state, the vehicle will not start

moving again unless you press the “RES+”

switch or depress the accelerator pedal.

 When depressing the brake pedal while the

automatic brake is applied, the brake pedal

will feel firm. This is normal. Depress the

brake pedal harder to apply greater braking

force.

 During the automatic braking, operation

sounds may be heard. This is normal.

 If the turn-signal lever is operated while the

ACC is active, the system may accelerate the

vehicle to assist you in passing a vehicle in

front.

 If the vehicle in front starts moving within

2 seconds after stopping, your vehicle will

start moving.

WARNING

 Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set

speed in the following situations. Apply

the brake, if necessary, to slow down.

• When your vehicle no longer follows the

vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway exit or

when your vehicle or the vehicle in front

changes its lane.

NOTE

• When driving on a curve.

 When the vehicle in front has changed its

course or lane, if a stationary vehicle

appears in front your vehicle, the ACC

will not decelerate your vehicle.

Approach alarm

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 96 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-97

WARNING

 When the ACC is not being used, turn off

the system to avoid unexpected ACC acti-

vation.

 Never operate the ACC from outside the

vehicle.

 The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle

and/or give the approach alarm in the fol-

lowing cases.

• When an object other than a vehicle,

such as a pedestrian, is in front.

• When a malfunction is detected in the

system.

 The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle

in the following cases, but will give the

approach alarm.

• When the front vehicle is stationary or

moving at an extremely slow speed.

• When your brake system has a problem,

such as overheating.

 The ACC may not be able to maintain the

set speed or the distance to a vehicle in

front and may not alert the driver, if the

system cannot detect the front vehicle

properly. Typical situations include:

• When a vehicle cuts into your path at a

close distance.

• When a vehicle in front is not completely

in your path.

• When a vehicle in front is towing a

trailer.

• When a motorcycle or a bicycle is in

front.

• When a vehicle in front is a truck loaded

with freight that protrudes rearward

from the cargo bed.

• When the height of a vehicle in front is

extremely low or the road clearance of

the vehicle is extremely high.

• When driving on a road with alternating

up and down surfaces.

• When driving on a curve.

• When driving on a bumpy or rough road.

• When driving in a tunnel.

• When driving in construction zones.

• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed

down with the weight of passengers and

luggage

• For up to 2 minutes after starting driv-

ing.

• When driving in curved sections of road

including their entrance/outlet or run-

ning beside a closed lane in a traffic work

or similar zone.

• When the surface of the sensor is covered

with dirt, snow, ice, etc.

• When a front vehicle or an oncoming

vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.

WARNING

• When driving on a winding road.

 Never use the ACC in the following situa-

tions:

• In heavy traffic.

• On winding roads.

• On slippery roads, such as icy, snow-cov-

ered or dirt roads.

• In adverse weather conditions, such as

rain, snow or sand storms, etc.

• On steep downslopes.

• When the inclination of a road fre-

quently changes.

• When the approach alarm frequently

sounds.

• When your vehicle is towed or is towing

another vehicle.

• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-

mometer or free rollers.

• When tire inflation pressures are not

adequate.

• When the temporary spare tire is being

used.

• When the radar sensor and/or its sur-

rounding area are damaged or deformed.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 97 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

5-98 Features and controls

N00581500069

There are two ways to increase the set speed.

The set speed will increase by 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) every time you push up the

“RES +” switch while the ACC is activated.

If you hold the switch pushed up, the set

speed increases in 5 mph (8 km/h) incre-

ments.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed

while driving with the ACC control working,

you can accelerate the vehicle beyond the

presently set speed.

When the vehicle speed reaches your desired

speed, push down and release the “SET -”

switch and release the accelerator pedal; the

new speed is then set in the system.

CAUTION

 To maintain proper performance of the ACC:

• Always clean the surface of the radar sen-

sor.

• Avoid impacting the radar sensor or its sur-

rounding area.

• Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor or

its surrounding area.

• Do not paint the radar sensor.

• Do not install a grill guard.

• Do not modify the radar sensor or its sur-

rounding area.

• Always use tires of the same size, same

type, and same brand, and which have no

significant wear differences.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

To increase the set speed

By using the “RES +” switch:

NOTE

 There is some time lag until the vehicle

begins accelerating to the new set speed after

the set speed has been changed.

 The set speed can be changed even while

your vehicle is following a vehicle in front

using the ACC. In this case, however,

although the set speed itself is increased,

your vehicle will not accelerate.

 While the ACC system is in the stationary

vehicle hold state, the vehicle speed cannot

be set.

By using the accelerator pedal:

WARNING

 The ACC braking control and approach

alarm functions will not work while the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

NOTE

 The set speed indicator in the multi-informa-

tion display will show “---” while the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

 If the “SET -” button is not pushed down

while depressing the accelerator pedal, your

vehicle speed will return to the set speed,

after the accelerator pedal is released. When

the accelerator pedal is released, the ACC

braking control and approach alarm func-

tions may not immediately work.

BK0277700US.book 98 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-99

N00581600057

There are two ways to decrease the set speed.

The set speed will decrease by 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) every time you push down the

“SET -” switch while the ACC is activated. If

you hold the switch pushed down, the set

speed decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h) incre-

ments.

By depressing the brake pedal while the ACC

is activated, the ACC control is canceled and

your vehicle speed will decrease.

At the point where the vehicle speed reaches

your desired speed, push down and release

the “SET -” switch; the new speed is then set

in the system.

N00582800030

Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem-

porarily accelerate the vehicle. Releasing the

pedal to restart the ACC control.

To decrease the set speed

By using the “SET -” switch:

NOTE

 There is some time lag until the vehicle

begins decelerating after the set speed has

been changed.

 The set speed can be changed even while

your vehicle is following a vehicle in front

using the ACC. In this case, however,

although the set speed itself is decreased,

your vehicle will not decelerate.

 While the ACC system is in the stationary

vehicle hold state, the vehicle speed cannot

be set.

By using the brake pedal:

NOTE

 The ACC control will not resume after

releasing the brake pedal.

To temporarily accelerate the

vehicle

WARNING

 The ACC braking control and approach

alarm functions will not work while the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

BK0277700US.book 99 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

5-100 Features and controls

N00581700074

There are two ways to cancel the ACC con-

trol.

 By pressing the “CANCEL” switch.

 By depressing the brake pedal.

When the ACC is canceled, the “SET” indi-

cator goes off and the following distance indi-

cator turns to the standby display. The front

vehicle indicator also turns to the standby dis-

play when a front vehicle is detected.

In any of the situations listed below, the ACC

control is automatically canceled, a buzzer

sounds and a message is shown in informa-

tion screen of the multi-information display.

If the ACC system is in the stationary vehicle

hold state, it will also be automatically can-

celed and the Electric parking brake will

operate.

 When the ASC is turned off.

 While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.

 When the selector lever is in a position

other than “D” (DRIVE).

 When the parking brake is applied.

 When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

 When the driver’s door is opened.

 When the ACC no longer detects any

vehicle in front while it is in the stationary

vehicle hold state.

 When the vehicle is in the stationary vehi-

cle hold state for 10 minutes or more.

NOTE

 The set speed indication on the display turns

to “---” when the accelerator pedal is

depressed. This indication remains as long as

the pedal is in a depressed position.

 In certain conditions, the braking control and

alarming functions of ACC may not work for

a short while after releasing the accelerator

pedal.

To cancel ACC control

NOTE

 You can also cancel the ACC control by

pressing the ACC ON/OFF switch. If this

switch is pressed while the ACC is ON, the

ACC will be turned off.

 If you press the “CANCEL” switch or ACC

ON/OFF switch to cancel the stationary

vehicle hold state, the vehicle will start

creeping.

BK0277700US.book 100 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-101

 When the system detects the vehicle mov-

ing down a slope while the vehicle is in

the stationary vehicle hold state.

If the ACC system judges that the stationary

vehicle hold state can no longer be main-

tained on a steep slope after your vehicle

stops when the vehicle in front stops, the sta-

tionary vehicle hold state is cancelled and a

warning appears on the information screen of

the multi-information display.

Depress the brake pedal.

If the detection performance of the ACC sys-

tem has degraded, such as in the following

situations, or if the ACC system judges that it

can temporarily not operate, the ACC system

operation will be cancelled automatically, and

then a buzzer will sound and a message will

appear to inform the driver.

This can occur when

 The brake system is overheating due to

continuous brake control on long down-

hill slope.

This can occur when

 In adverse weather conditions, such as

rain, snow or sand storms, etc.

 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,

adhere to the surface of the sensor.

 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is

splashing water, snow or dirt.

 Driving on a nonbusy road with a few

vehicles and obstacles in front.

If the display keeps showing the message,

there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal-

function. Contact your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

When the ACC system detects an abnormal-

ity in the system, the ACC system will be

turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message

will be displayed in the multi-information

display.

If the message remains after the operation

mode is put in OFF, and then turned back to

ON, contact your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

N00581800075

After the ACC control has been canceled with

the ACC turned on, the ACC control can be

resumed by pushing up and releasing the

“RES +” switch.

While the ACC system is in the stationary

vehicle hold state, if it is possible to resume

following the vehicle in front because it has

started moving, “ACC READY TO

To resume the control

BK0277700US.book 101 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

5-102 Features and controls

RESUME” will appear on the meter. To start

moving again, push up the “RES +” switch or

depress the accelerator pedal.

N00581900047

Every time you press the ACC following dis-

tance setting switch, the set following dis-

tance changes in order. Even after turning off

the ACC system or putting the operation

mode in OFF, the system retains your last

selected following distance setting in mem-

ory.

The following distance indicator shows the

level of the following distance:

N00582000045

Press and hold the ACC ON/OFF switch

while the operation mode is in the ON posi-

tion. A buzzer will sound and the multi-infor-

mation display will show the following

indicator.

The conventional cruise control is turned off

when the ignition switch or the operation

mode is turned off.

NOTE

 When any of the following conditions are

present, the ACC control cannot be resumed.

• When your vehicle speed is more than

110 mph (180 km/h).

• When your vehicle is driven at speeds

between approximately 0 to 20 mph (0 to

30 km/h) and the ACC is not detecting a

vehicle in front.

• When ASC is in the OFF position.

• While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.

• When the selector lever is in positions other

than “D” (DRIVE).

• While the brake pedal is depressed.

• While the parking brake is applied.

• When the ACC system has judged that the

performance for detecting a front vehicle is

degraded.

• When an abnormality in the ACC system

has been detected.

• While the brake pedal is depressed, the

vehicle will not start moving again even if

the driver operates the switches.

To change the following dis-

tance

NOTE

 Actual distance will vary depending on your

vehicle speed and the front vehicle speed.

The distance will become longer when the

vehicle speeds are higher.

To activate conventional cruise

control

Long

Short

BK0277700US.book 102 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-103

For operation of the cruise control, refer to

“Cruise control” on page 5-87.

N00582100088

NOTE

 The conventional cruise control does not

sound or display the approach alarm, will not

adjust your vehicle speed, and does not con-

trol the distance between your vehicle and a

vehicle in front.

General information

BK0277700US.book 103 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

5-104 Features and controls

N00577300125

The Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM) is designed to help reduce the risk of a

collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian

straight ahead of your vehicle. The FCM uses

a sensor (A) to determine the distance and

relative speed to a vehicle and a pedestrian in

front. The FCM is not designed as an auto-

matic driving system or as a collision avoid-

ance system.

When your vehicle is approaching a vehicle

or a pedestrian straight-ahead in your path

and the FCM judges that there is the risk of a

collision, the system will give audible and

visual warnings.

When the FCM judges that a collision with

the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is

imminent, the system will automatically

apply moderate braking to warn you to apply

the brakes immediately.

When the FCM judges that a collision with

the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is

highly unavoidable, the system will apply

emergency braking to reduce the severity of

the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-

lision.

Stop lights are illuminated during automatic

braking.

Forward Collision Mitiga-

tion system (FCM)

(if so

equipped)

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)

WARNING

 Before using the FCM, read this entire

section to fully understand the limitations

of this system. Failure to follow instruc-

tions could result in an accident.

Forward Collision Mitigation system with

High-Speed Braking Capability (FCM-HSBC)

BK0277700US.book 104 ページ２０１９年３月１２日　火曜日　午前９時３４分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-105

N00577400083

If the system judges that there is a risk of

your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or the

pedestrian in front, this function warns you of

the potential hazard with visual and audible

alarms.

When this function is triggered, a buzzer

sounds and, at the same time, a “BRAKE”

message appears on the information screen of

the multi-information display.

The FCM will also prepare to provide quick

brake response and greater brake force when

you apply the brakes.

The forward collision warning function oper-

ates at the following vehicle speeds:

 Against a vehicle: Approximately 10 to

87 mph (15 to 140 km/h).

 Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5 to

40 mph (7 to 65 km/h).

 Against a vehicle: Approximately 10 to

112 mph (15 to 180 km/h).

 Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5 to

40 mph (7 to 65 km/h).

 The FCM is designed to help avoid certain

frontal collisions or reduce the crash

speed in such collisions. It is not a substi-

tute for your safe and careful driving.

Under certain circumstances, the system

may not operate or may not detect cor-

rectly a vehicle or a pedestrian in front.

When your vehicle is approaching a vehi-

cle or a pedestrian too closely, take all nec-

essary actions to avoid a collision, such as

braking and steering, regardless of

whether the FCM is activated or not.

Never rely on the FCM to prevent a colli-

sion.

 Never attempt to test the operation of the

FCM. Doing so could cause an accident,

resulting in serious injury or death.

WARNING

Forward collision warning

function

Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM)

Forward Collision Mitigation system

with High-Speed Braking Capability

(FCM-HSBC)

BK0277700US.book 105 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

5-106 Features and controls

N00577700145

When the FCM judges that a collision with

the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is

imminent, the FCM will automatically apply

moderate braking to warn the driver to apply

the brakes immediately.

If the FCM judges that the collision is highly

unavoidable, it will automatically apply

emergency braking to reduce the severity of

the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-

lision.

While the FCM applies emergency braking, a

buzzer sounds and “BRAKE!” message is

displayed in the information screen of the

multi-information display.

Once the FCM braking has activated, the fol-

lowing message will appear on the informa-

tion screen of the multi-information display.

The FCM braking function operates at the

following vehicle speeds:

 Against a vehicle: Approximately 3 to

50 mph (5 to 80 km/h).

 Against a pedestrian: Approximately 3 to

40 mph (5 to 65 km/h).

 Against a vehicle: Approximately 3 to

112 mph (5 to 180 km/h).

 Against a pedestrian: Approximately 3 to

40 mph (5 to 65 km/h).

FCM braking function

Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM)

Forward Collision Mitigation system

with High-Speed Braking Capability

(FCM-HSBC)

WARNING

 If the ASC is turned off, the FCM braking

function will not operate. Refer to “Active

stability control” on page 5-84.

 If the brake pedal is not depressed within

2 seconds after your vehicle has been

stopped by the FCM, a warning buzzer

will sound and the brakes activated by the

FCM will automatically be released.

Apply the brakes as necessary to keep

your vehicle stationary.

 The FCM will not activate and will not

provide either warning or braking in cer-

tain situations. Some of these include:

• When the selector lever is in the “P”

(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.

• When an object other than a vehicle or a

pedestrian is in front.

• When the FCM has detected a problem

in the system.

• When a vehicle or a pedestrian suddenly

cuts in front of your vehicle.

 The FCM may or may not detect a motor-

cycle, bicycle or wall depending on the sit-

uation. The FCM is not designed to detect

these objects.

 The forward collision warning function

and/or the FCM braking function may not

activate in certain situations. Some of

these include:

• When a vehicle suddenly appears just in

front of your vehicle.

• When a vehicle cuts into your path at a

close distance.

• When a vehicle ahead is not completely

in your path.

• When your vehicle changed lanes, and

your vehicle approached immediately

behind the vehicle ahead.

• When a vehicle ahead is towing a trailer.

• When a vehicle ahead is a truck loaded

with freight that protrudes rearward

from the cargo bed.

• When the height of a vehicle ahead is

extremely low or its road clearance is

extremely high.

• When a vehicle ahead is extremely dirty.

• When a vehicle ahead is covered with

snow.

• When a vehicle ahead has a large glass

surface.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 106 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-107

• When a vehicle ahead does not have

reflectors (light reflector) or the position

of the reflector is low.

• When a vehicle ahead is a car carrier or

a similar shaped vehicle.

• When accelerating and decelerating

quickly.

• When driving on a slippery road covered

by rain water, snow, ice, etc.

• When driving on a road with alternating

up and down steep slopes.

• When driving on a curve.

• When driving on a bumpy or rough road.

• When driving in dark areas, such as in a

tunnel or at night.

• When the system recognizes driver’s

steering, accelerating, braking or gear

shifting actions as evasive actions to

avoid collision.

• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed

down with the weight of passengers and

luggage.

• Up to several seconds after starting driv-

ing.

• In adverse weather conditions, such as

rain, snow, fog or sand-storm.

• When the windshield of the sensor por-

tion is covered with dirt, water droplets,

snow and ice, etc.

• When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming

vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.

• When using a windshield washer.

WARNING

• If windshield wipers are not Mitsubishi

Motors Genuine parts or equivalent.

• When the sensor becomes extremely hot

or cold.

• If the battery becomes weak or runs

down.

• When the sensor is affected by strong

light, such as direct sunlight or the head-

lights of an oncoming vehicle.

 The FCM may not detect a pedestrian in

certain situations. Some of these include:

• If the pedestrian is shorter than approxi-

mately 3.2 feet (1 m) or taller than

approximately 6.5 feet (2 m).

• If the pedestrian is wearing loose-fitting

clothes.

• If part of a pedestrian’s body is hidden,

such as when holding an umbrella, large

bag, etc.

• If a pedestrian bends forward, sits or lies

on the road.

• When a pedestrian is pushing/pulling

something, such as a stroller, bicycle or

wheelchair.

• When pedestrians gather in a group.

• When a pedestrian clothing appears to

be nearly the same color or brightness as

its surroundings.

• When a pedestrian is very close to an

object, such as a vehicle.

• When a pedestrian is in a dark area, such

as at night or in a tunnel.

WARNING

• When a pedestrian is walking fast or

running.

• When a pedestrian suddenly rushes in

front of the vehicle.

• When the position of a pedestrian is close

to the edge of the vehicle.

 When the system recognizes driver’s

steering or accelerating actions as evasive

actions to avoid a collision, FCM control

and alarm functions may be canceled.

 In certain situations, though there is little

or no risk of a collision, the FCM may

activate. Examples include:

• When overtaking a vehicle.

• When driving on a curve.

• When there is a road side object (B) that

reflects the radar sensor signal, such as a

road sign.

• When approaching a gate, a railroad

crossing, an underpass, a narrow bridge,

manhole lid or a speed bump.

• When driving under an overpass or

pedestrian bridge.

• When driving in a narrow tunnel.

• When driving in a parking structure.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 107 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

5-108 Features and controls

N00577800074

This switch is used to turn on or off the FCM,

and also to select the distance which will trig-

ger the forward collision warning function.

• When approaching a slope where the

incline changes significantly.

• When trying to stop your vehicle very

close to a vehicle or an object in front.

• When passing a vehicle, a pedestrian or

an object closely.

• When a vehicle in the next lane becomes

positioned directly in front of your vehi-

cle due to winding road conditions.

• When passing through an area where

objects may contact the vehicle, such as

thick grass, tree branches, or a banner.

• When there are patterns on the road that

may be mistaken for a vehicle or a pedes-

trian.

• When a vehicle cuts into your path in the

detecting range of the sensor.

WARNING

• When an oncoming vehicle is positioned

straight ahead of your vehicle on a

curved road.

• When the FCM detects a long object car-

ried on your vehicle, such as skis or a

roof carrier.

• When driving through fog, steam, smoke

or dust.

 The FCM should be tuned off if any of the

following situations occur:

• When using an automatic car wash.

• When the tires are not properly inflated.

• When the emergency spare tire is used.

• When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-

cle tows another vehicle.

• When your vehicle is carried on a truck.

• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-

mometer or free rollers.

• If the windshield on or surrounding the

sensor is cracked or scratched.

NOTE

 When depressing the brake pedal while auto-

matic braking is applied, the brake pedal will

feel firm. This is normal. Depress the brake

pedal harder to apply greater braking force.

 During the automatic braking, operating

sounds may be heard. This is normal.

WARNING

FCM ON/OFF switch

BK0277700US.book 108 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-109

Every time the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, the FCM will automatically be turned

on.

To turn off the FCM, press and hold the FCM

ON/OFF switch. The following message will

appear on the information screen of the multi-

information display and the indicator will

come on in the instrument cluster.

To turn on the FCM again, press the FCM

ON/OFF switch. The indicator on the

instrument cluster will go off, and a current

distance mode for the forward collision warn-

ing will be shown in the information screen

of the multi-information display.

The distance to the vehicle ahead which trig-

gers the forward collision warnings can be

selected from three levels (FAR, MIDDLE or

NEAR).

To change the distance mode, push the FCM

ON/OFF switch. Every time the switch is

pushed, the distance mode will be switched.

The selected distance mode is shown on the

information screen of the multi-information

display.

Distance mode: FAR

Distance mode: MIDDLE

Distance mode: NEAR

N00594800024

If there is a malfunction in the system, a

warning will appear on the information

screen of the multi-information display

depending on the situation.

N00594900054

When the FCM system determines that it can-

not detect objects properly, the FCM will

become inoperative.

This can occur when:

To turn on/off the FCM To change forward collision warn-

ing distance

NOTE

 Actual distance which triggers the forward

collision warnings will vary depending on

your vehicle speed and the front vehicle

speed. The distance will become longer

when the vehicle speeds are higher.

 The distance which will trigger the FCM

braking function cannot be adjusted.

System problem warning

When the camera and radar can-

not detect accurately

BK0277700US.book 109 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

5-110 Features and controls

 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow, ice,

mist or dew condensation adhere to the

windshield of the sensor portion or the

surface of the sensor.

 In adverse weather conditions, such as

rain, snow, sand storms, etc.

 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is

splashing water, snow or dirt.

 Driving on a nonbusy road with a few

vehicles and obstacles in front. {Forward

Collision Mitigation system with High-

Speed Braking Capability (FCM-HSBC)

only}

The following message will appear on the

information screen of the multi-information

display and the indicator will come on in

the instrument cluster.

When the sensor performance returns, the

FCM functions will resume operation.

If the message continues showing, there is a

possibility that the sensor has a malfunction.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for inspection of the sensor.

N00595100053

If the system becomes temporarily unavail-

able for some reason, the following message

will appear on the information screen of the

multi-information display, the indicator

will come on in the instrument cluster, and

the FCM will automatically be turned off.

If the message continues showing, there is a

possibility that the FCM has a malfunction.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for inspection of the system.

{Forward Collision

Mitigation system

with High-Speed

Braking Capability

(FCM-HSBC) only}

NOTE

 The “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA

BLOCKED” message may temporarily

appear on the information screen when the

sensor cannot detect a vehicle, a pedestrian

or an object within range. This is not a mal-

function. When a vehicle or an object comes

within range, the FCM function will resume

and the message will go off.

When the system cannot operate

temporarily

BK0277700US.book 110 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-111

N00595200025

If the system becomes temporarily unavail-

able due to the high or low temperature of the

sensor, the following message will appear on

the information screen of the multi-informa-

tion display, the indicator will come on in

the instrument cluster, and the FCM will

automatically be turned off.

After the temperature of the sensor has been

in range, the system will automatically return

to operation.

If the message continues showing, there is a

possibility that the FCM has a malfunction.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for inspection of the sensor.

N00595300055

If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys-

tem, either of the following messages will

appear on the information screen of the multi-

information display, the indicator will

come on in the instrument cluster, and the

FCM will automatically be turned off.

If the message remains even after the ignition

switch is turned to the “OFF” position and

then turned back to “ON” position or the

operation mode is put in OFF, and then turned

back to “ON”, please contact your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

If the display keeps showing the message,

there is a possibility that the FCM has a mal-

function.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

N00593400137

The sensor (A) is located inside the wind-

shield and front bumper {Forward Collision

Mitigation system with High-Speed Braking

Capability (FCM-HSBC) only} as shown in

the illustration.

The sensor is shared in the following sys-

tems:

 Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM)*

 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*

 Automatic High Beam (AHB)*

 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*

*: if so equipped

Sensor is too hot or cold FCM deactivation due to fault

NOTE

 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes

extremely hot (after prolonged exposure to

direct sunlight, for example), the “FCM

SERVICE REQUIRED” message may

appear.

After the temperature of the sensor or its sur-

rounding area has been in range, if the mes-

sage remains even after restarting the engine,

please contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

Handling of the sensor

BK0277700US.book 111 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

5-112 Features and controls

CAUTION

 To maintain proper performance of the FCM,

LDW, AHB and ACC;

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)

Forward Collision Mitigation system with

High-Speed Braking Capability (FCM-HSBC)

• Always keep clean the windshield and front

bumper.

If the inside of the windshield where the

sensor is installed becomes dirty or fogged,

contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

• Do not apply an impact or load on the sen-

sor or its surrounding area.

• Do not put anything including a sticker or

film to the outer side of windshield in front

of or surrounding the area of the sensor.

Also, do not put anything including a

sticker of film to inner side of the wind-

shield under the sensor.

• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the

sensor and sensor mounting screw.

• The sensor front cover should not be modi-

fied or painted.

• Do not cover the sensor mounted area with

a license plate or anything such as a grill

guard, etc. {Forward Collision Mitigation

system with High-Speed Braking Capabil-

ity (FCM-HSBC) only}

CAUTION

• If the windshield is misted, remove the mist

from the windshield by using the defogger

switch.

• Maintain the wiper blades in good condi-

tion. Refer to “Wiper blades” on page 9-39.

When replacing the wiper blades, use only

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts or equiva-

lent.

• Do not dirty or damage the sensor.

• Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor.

Also, do not spill liquid, such as a bever-

age, on the sensor.

• Do not install an electronic device, such as

an antenna, or a device that emits strong

electric waves, near the sensor.

• Always use tires of the same size, same

type and same brand, and which have no

significant wear differences.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspensions.

 If the windshield in front of the sensor or in

the surrounding area of the sensor is cracked

or scratched, the sensor may not detect an

object properly. This could cause a serious

accident. Turn off the FCM and have your

vehicle inspected as soon as possible at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

If you need to replace the windshield, con-

tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 The sensor emits infrared rays when the

operation mode is in ON. Do not look into

the sensor by using optical goods such as a

magnifying glass. The infrared ray might

injure your eyes.

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 112 ページ２０１９年３月１２日　火曜日　午前９時３５分

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-113

N00592200082

The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is a driving

aid system that alerts the driver when another

vehicle which may not be visible through the

outside rearview mirror is traveling in the

next lane behind your vehicle.

When a vehicle in the next lane is traveling at

same speed or faster in the detection areas,

the BSW light in the corresponding outside

rearview mirror will illuminate. If the turn

signal lever is operated to the side where the

BSW light is illuminated, the BSW light will

blink and the system will beep three times to

alert the driver.

Depending on the relative speed between

your vehicle and a vehicle in the next lane,

the BSW will detect up to approximately

230 feet (70 m) from your vehicle (Lane

Change Assist).

N00592300100

The BSW uses two sensors (A) located inside

the rear bumper.

The detection areas are shown as illustrated.

Laser radar specifications

Laser classification

Max average power 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Wavelength 905 nm

Divergent angle

(horizon x vertical)

28° x 12°

Laser classification label

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

(with Lane Change Assist)

(if

so equipped)

WARNING

 Before using the BSW, read this entire sec-

tion to fully understand the limitations of

this system. Failure to follow instructions

could result in an accident.

 Never rely solely on the BSW system when

changing lanes. BSW is an aid only. It is

not a substitute for your safe and careful

driving. Always check visually behind and

all around your vehicle for other vehicles.

The performance of the BSW may vary

depending on driving, traffic and/or road

conditions.

Detection areas

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 113 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)

5-114 Features and controls

N00593500112

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

WARNING

 In certain situations, the BSW may not

detect a vehicle in the detection areas or

the detection may be delayed. Some of

these include;

• When a small motorcycle or a bicycle is

behind your vehicle.

• When a vehicle is traveling alongside of

your vehicle at nearly the same speed for

prolonged periods of time.

• When the heights of the next lane and

your lane are different.

• Immediately after the BSW has been

turned on.

• Immediately after the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position or the oper-

ation mode is put in ON.

• Under adverse weather conditions, such

as rain, snow, strong winds, snow or sand

storm.

• When your vehicle becomes too close to

another vehicle.

• While multiple vehicle are overtaking

your vehicle.

• When driving near a pot hole and tram-

line.

• When a surrounding vehicle or an

oncoming vehicle is splashing water,

snow or dirt.

• When driving on a curve including the

beginning and the end of the curve.

• When driving on a road with alternating

up and down steep slopes.

• When driving on a bumpy or rough road.

• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed

down or your vehicle is leaning to the

right or left due to the weight of passen-

gers and luggage or the improper adjust-

ment of tire pressure.

• When the bumper surface around the

radar sensor is covered with dirt, snow

and ice, etc.

WARNING

• When a bicycle carrier or accessory is

installed to the rear of the vehicle.

• When the sensor is extremely hot or cold

(while the vehicle is parked for a long

period of time under a blazing sun or in

cold weather).

CAUTION

 To maintain proper performance of the BSW,

follow the instructions below.

• Always keep the bumper surface around the

sensor clean.

• Avoid impacting the sensor or its surround-

ing area.

• Do not put a sticker on the sensor or its sur-

rounding bumper surface.

• Do not paint the sensor or its surrounding

bumper surface.

• Do not modify the sensor or its surrounding

area.

 If the bumper has experienced an impact, the

sensor may have been damaged and the BSW

may not function properly. Have the vehicle

inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

To operate

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 114 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-115

ON and “ON” is selected in the “BSW” set-

ting screen, the BSW indicator light in the

instrument cluster comes on and the BSW

enters the standby state.

When “OFF” is selected in the “BSW” set-

ting screen, the BSW indicator light in the

instrument cluster goes off and the BSW

turns off.

To turn the BSW ON/OFF, follow the proce-

dure below.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Multi-information display

switches” on page 5-145.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “BSW” screen.

Then, press the switch to the setting

selection screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

Indicator light

If you turn the BSW ON/OFF, the Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) also turns ON/OFF at

the same time.

When the BSW indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster is on, if a vehicle is approaching

your vehicle in the detection area, the BSW

light in the outside rearview mirror illumi-

nates.

If the turn signal lever is operated to the side

where the BSW light is illuminated, the BSW

light will blink and the system will beep three

times to alert the driver.

NOTE

 When the operation mode is set to OFF, the

selected condition (BSW ON/OFF) just

before setting to OFF is retained.

 The BSW operates when all of the following

conditions are met.

• The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the operation mode is put in ON.

• The selector lever is in positions other than

“P” (PARK) and “R” (REVERSE).

• The speed of your vehicle is approximately

6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

When the sensor detects an

approaching vehicle

NOTE

 The BSW light in the outside rearview mir-

ror may come on or blink in the following

conditions.

• When driving very near the guardrail or the

concrete wall.

BK0277700US.book 115 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)

5-116 Features and controls

N00592400042

If a problem occurs with the system, a visual

warning specific to the type of the problem is

given together with an audible alarm.

The warnings are combined with the Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system.

N00592700061

When the warning display appears, the BSW

does not operate normally because there is a

malfunction in the system. Have the vehicle

inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer as soon as possible.

N00592800046

When the warning display appears, the sensor

is temporarily not available for some reason

such as the environmental condition or

increase of the sensor temperature. When the

warning display does not disappear after

waiting for a while, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

• When driving near the entrance and outlet

of the tunnel or very near the wall or near

the evacuation area inside the tunnel.

• When turning at an intersection in a town

area.

• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,

snow, sand storm etc.).

• When driving while your vehicle is kicking

up water, snow, sand, etc., on the road.

• When driving near a curb, pot hole and

tramline.

 Set the BSW to OFF when towing.

 The BSW light in the outside rearview mir-

ror may not be visible due to strong direct

sunlight or the glare from the headlights of

vehicles behind you during night driving.

System problem warning

NOTE

When there is a malfunction in the

system

NOTE

 When the warning display appears, the BSW

will be deactivated.

When the sensor is temporarily

not available

BK0277700US.book 116 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-117

N00592900092

When the warning display appears, the radar

sensor cannot detect a vehicle traveling side

by side or an approaching vehicle, because

foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,

adhere to the bumper surface around the sen-

sor.

Remove a dirt, freezing or foreign material on

the bumper surface around the sensor.

When the warning display does not disappear

after having cleaned the bumper surface

around the sensor, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

When there is a foreign object on

the sensor

BK0277700US.book 117 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)

5-118 Features and controls

N00593900099

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

General information

BK0277700US.book 118 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-119

For vehicles sold in Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

N00593000104

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is an

aid system for backing up. When the RCTA

system detects vehicles approaching from the

sides while your vehicle is reversing, the

BSW lights in the outside rearview mirrors

on both sides will blink and a buzzer will

sound to alert the driver. A warning message

will also appear on the information screen of

the multi-information display.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)

(if so equipped)

WARNING

 Before using the RCTA, read this entire

section to fully understand the limitations

of this system. Failure to follow instruc-

tions could result in an accident.

 Never rely solely on the RCTA when back-

ing up. The RCTA is an aid system. It is

not a substitute for your safe and careful

driving. Always check visually behind and

all around your vehicle for other vehicles,

persons, animals or obstructions.

The performance of the RCTA may vary

depending on driving, traffic and/or sur-

rounding conditions.

NOTE

 The BSW lights in the outside rearview mir-

rors on both sides will blink, even when only

one vehicle is approaching from one side.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 119 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)

5-120 Features and controls

The detection area is shown as illustrated.

1. Select “ON” in the “BSW” setting screen

of the multi-information display.

(Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): To

operate” on page 5-114.)

2. When the selector lever is moved to the

“R” (REVERSE) position, the RCTA will

operate.

If the system detects a problem, a warning is

displayed on the information screen in the

multi-information display.

Detection areas

CAUTION

 In certain situations, the RCTA may not

detect a vehicle in the detection areas. Some

of these situations include;

• When the reversing speed of your vehicle is

approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or higher.

• When the speed of an approaching vehicle

is approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) or less.

• If the sensor detection area is blocked by a

nearby object, such as wall or parked vehi-

cle.

• When a vehicle is approaching from

straight behind your vehicle.

• When your vehicle is exiting from an

angled parking spot.

• Immediately after the RCTA has been

turned on.

• Immediately after the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position or the opera-

tion mode is put in ON.

• When the bumper surface around the sensor

is covered with dirt, snow and ice, etc.

• When the sensor becomes extremely hot or

cold, such as after the vehicle has been

parked for a prolonged time under the blaz-

ing sun or in cold weather.

CAUTION

 If the bumper has experienced an impact, the

sensor may have been damaged and the

RCTA may not function properly. Have the

vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

To operate

NOTE

 Set the RCTA to OFF when towing.

 The BSW light in the outside rearview mir-

ror may not be visible due to strong direct

sunlight or the glare from the headlights of

vehicles behind you during night driving.

When a problem is detected in

the system

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 120 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-121

Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): Sys-

tem problem warning” on page 5-116.

BK0277700US.book 121 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)

5-122 Features and controls

N00594000097

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

General information

BK0277700US.book 122 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-123

For vehicles sold in Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

N00577900062

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) is a

driving aid system to help prevent uninten-

tional lane departure. The LDW is designed

to read lane markers by using a sensor (A)

under certain conditions. The LDW will give

you both visual and audible warnings when

your vehicle is leaving or has left the lane.

N00578000086

Lane Departure Warning

(LDW)

(if so equipped)

WARNING

 Never rely solely on the LDW. The LDW is

not a collision avoidance system and is not

a substitute for your safe and careful driv-

ing.

 Before using the LDW, read this entire

section to understand the limitations of

this system. Failure to follow instructions

could result in an accident.

To turn on/off the LDW

NOTE

 The LDW is turned on when the vehicle is

shipped from the factory.

 The currently selected LDW setting (on or

off) is stored even when the ignition switch

is turned to the “OFF” position or the opera-

tion mode is put in OFF.

BK0277700US.book 123 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)

5-124 Features and controls

To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch.

The LDW indicator in the instrument cluster

will then go out.

To turn the LDW back on, press the LDW

switch again. The LDW indicator in the

instrument cluster will then come on.

N00581100094

The LDW, when turned ON, is capable of

recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is

travelling and issuing an audible warning

when your vehicle begins to leave that travel

lane. When operating, the LDW indicator in

the instrument cluster will come on. How-

ever, the LDW will not operate in the follow-

ing situations even if the LDW indicator

comes on:

 The vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 38 mph (60 km/h).

 The turn signal lever is being operated or

has been operated in the past 7 seconds.

 The hazard warning light is being oper-

ated or has been operated in the past

7 seconds.

N00581200082

While the LDW indicator in the instrument

cluster is on, if your vehicle is leaving or has

left the lane, a buzzer will sound intermit-

tently, “LANE DEPARTURE” will appear on

the information screen of the multi-informa-

tion display.

Operation of the LDW Lane departure warning

NOTE

 The warnings will not continue for more than

3 seconds, even if your vehicle continues

leaving the lane.

 If the lane markers are only on one side of

the road, the LDW will operate only for the

appropriate side where the lane marker is

drawn.

WARNING

 The LDW will not function when no lane

marker exists, such as at an intersection

or near a toll booth.

 The LDW may not operate correctly in the

following situations and the LDW may not

give warnings or may give false warnings:

BK0277700US.book 124 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-125

N00578100058

If a problem occurs with the system, a visual

warning specific to the type of the problem is

given together with an audible alarm.

The alarm shown below is displayed if the

system becomes temporarily unavailable due

to the high or low temperature of the sensor.

After temperature of the sensor has been in

range, the system will automatically return to

operation.

If the alarm continues showing, there is a pos-

sibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con-

tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for inspection of the system.

• When lane markers are not clearly visi-

ble due to rain, snow, fog, dark area, etc.

• When the road surface is shiny.

• When old lane markers remain on the

road surface.

• When the lane markers are double lines

or the shape of the lane markers are

complicated.

• When driving in an extremely narrow

lane.

• When the distance between your vehicle

and a vehicle in front is short.

• When driving into the sun light.

• When driving on curves.

• When driving on bumpy roads.

• When driving in construction zones.

• When passing through a place where the

brightness suddenly changes, such as at

the entrance to or exit of a tunnel.

• When the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle are very bright.

• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed

down with the weight of passengers and

luggage.

• When the headlights of your vehicle are

not clean or are not properly aimed.

• When the front windshield is not clean.

• When the front windshield wipers do not

clean the windshield properly.

WARNING

CAUTION

 To maintain proper function of the LDW:

• Always keep the windshield and the head-

lights clean.

• Do not put anything, such as a sticker, on

the front windshield in front of the sensor.

• Avoid applying a shock or load to the sen-

sor.

• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the

sensor.

• Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts

when replacing the windshield wipers.

NOTE

 When driving conditions are not suitable to

use the LDW, turn off the LDW.

System problem warning

Sensor is too hot or cold

BK0277700US.book 125 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

5-126 Features and controls

The alarm shown below is displayed if the

system becomes temporarily unavailable due

to the dirty windshield of the sensor portion.

After having cleaned the windshield, the sys-

tem will automatically return to operation.

If the alarm continues showing, there is a pos-

sibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con-

tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for inspection of the sensor.

If the LDW is deactivated due to a malfunc-

tion in the system, the either alarm shown

below is displayed. Contact your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer for inspection of the

system.

N00530201641

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

uses tire inflation pressure sensors (A) on the

wheels to monitor the tire inflation pressures.

The system only indicates when a tire is sig-

nificantly under-inflated.

Windshield is dirty LDW deactivation due to fault

NOTE

 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes

extremely hot (after prolonged exposure to

direct sunlight, for example), the “LDW

SERVICE REQUIRED” message may

appear.

If the message remains even after the tem-

perature of the sensor or its surrounding area

has been in range, please contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)

WARNING

 The compact spare wheel does not have a

tire inflation pressure sensor.

When the spare tire is used, the TPMS will

not work properly.

See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer as soon as possible to replace or

repair the original tire.

BK0277700US.book 126 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

Features and controls 5-127

N00532701389

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, the tire pressure monitoring system

warning light normally illuminates and goes

off a few seconds later.

If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for

the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated,

the warning light will remain illuminated

while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode is put in ON.

Refer to “If the warning light / display illumi-

nates while driving” on page 5-129 and take

the necessary measures.

NOTE

 The TPMS is not a substitute for regularly

checking tire inflation pressures.

Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures

as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.

 The tire inflation pressure sensor (B) is

installed in the illustrated location.

• On vehicles equipped with Type 1 sensor

which has the metallic air valve (C), replace

grommet and washer (D) with the new ones

when the tire is replaced.

• On vehicles equipped with Type 2 sensor

which has the rubber air valve (E), replace

rubber air valve (E) with new one when the

tire is replaced.

For details, please contact your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem warning light / display

NOTE

Type 1

Type 2

NOTE

 In addition, the warning display is displayed

on the information screen in the multi-infor-

mation display.

BK0277700US.book 127 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

5-128 Features and controls

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure

for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-

tale illuminates, you should stop and check

your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-

nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-

cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please

note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not reached

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined

with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute

and then remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illumi-

nated, the system may not be able to detect or

signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-

ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-

function telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tires and wheels

CAUTION

 If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light does not illuminate when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or

the operation mode is put in ON, it means

that the tire pressure monitoring system is

not working properly. Have the system

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

In such situations, a malfunctioning of the

system may be preventing the monitoring of

the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,

sharp turning and high-speed driving.

 If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-

sure monitoring system, the tire pressure

monitoring system warning light will blink

for approximately 1 minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. The warning light

will issue further warnings each time the

engine is restarted as long as the malfunction

exists.

Check to see whether the warning light goes

off after few minutes driving.

If it then goes off during driving, there is no

problem.

However, if the warning light does not go

off, or if it blinks again when the engine is

restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

In such situations, a malfunctioning of the

system may be preventing the monitoring of

the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when

the warning light appears while driving,

avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and

high-speed driving.

NOTE

 In addition, the warning display is displayed

on the information screen in the multi-infor-

mation display.

BK0277700US.book 128 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

Features and controls 5-129

allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-

erly.

N00532801579

1. If the tire pressure monitoring system

warning light illuminates, avoiding hard

braking, sharp steering maneuvers and

high speeds. You should stop and adjust

the tires to the proper inflation pressure as

soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at

the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page

9-12.

2. If the tire pressure monitoring system

warning light remains illuminated after

you have been driving for approximately

20 minutes after you adjust the tire infla-

tion pressure, one or more of the tires may

have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it

has a puncture, have it repaired by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as

soon as possible.

The tire pressure monitoring system may not

work normally in the following circum-

stances:

 A wireless facility or device using the

same frequency is near the vehicle.

 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders

and/or on the wheels.

 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery

is dead.

 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine

wheels are being used.

 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-

tion pressure sensors are being used.

 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-

rized by the vehicle are used.

 Compact spare tire is fitted as a road

wheel.

If the warning light / display

illuminates while driving

NOTE

 In addition, the warning display is displayed

on the information screen in the multi-infor-

mation display.

 When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure, do not apply excessive force to the

valve stem to avoid breakage.

 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the

valve stem.

Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could

get into the valve, resulting in damage to the

tire inflation pressure sensor.

 Do not use metal valve caps, which may

cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion

and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-

sors.

 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-

ing light will go off after a few minutes of

driving.

WARNING

 If the warning light / display illuminates

while you are driving, avoid hard braking,

sharp steering maneuvers and high

speeds.

Driving with an under-inflated tire

adversely affects vehicle performance and

can result in an accident.

CAUTION

 If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with

the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire

could lead to an accident.

 The warning light / display may not illumi-

nate immediately in the event of a tire blow-

out or rapid leak.

NOTE

 To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-

tion pressure sensors, have any punctured

tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is

not covered by your warranty.

 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray

on any tire.

Such a spray could damage the tire inflation

pressure sensors.

Have any puncture repaired by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0277700US.book 129 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

5-130 Features and controls

 A window tint that affects the radio wave

signals is installed.

N00532900081

If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure

sensors are installed, their ID codes must be

programmed into the tire pressure monitoring

system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-

formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire

inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel

replacement is not done by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by

your warranty.

N00584300042

In case that 2 sets of tire inflation pressure

sensor ID are registered in the receiver, the

valid tire ID set can be changed by following

procedure.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Multi-information display

switches” on page 5-145.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “TPMS ID” screen.

Then, press the switch to the setting

selection screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the “ID 1” or “ID 2”, and then press

and hold the switch for approximately

3 seconds or more to confirm the setting.

4. The valid tire ID set is changed, and the

number of the tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) SET indicator is changed.

N00533001233

Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-

ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) Rules

(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry

Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).

This device complies with part 15 of FCC

NOTE

 Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-

ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to

large variations in ambient temperature, the

tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated

(causing the warning light / display come on)

when the ambient temperature is relatively

low. If the warning light / display comes on,

adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Whenever the tires and wheels

are replaced with new ones

CAUTION

 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent

the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure

sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of

the sensors.

Tire ID set change

NOTE

 The tire ID set is NOT changed, in case that

only 1 set of ID is registered.

General information

BK0277700US.book 130 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear-view camera

Features and controls 5-131

Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt

RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

N00546201330

When the selector lever is in the “R”

(REVERSE) position with the ignition switch

in the “ON” position, or the operation mode

is put in ON, the rear-view image will be dis-

played on the screen of the Smartphone Link

Display Audio.

When the selector lever is shifted out of the

“R” (REVERSE) position, the rear-view

image will go off.

The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at

the left side of the liftgate handle.

CAUTION

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

Rear-view camera

WARNING

 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera

to clear the area behind your vehicle.

Always check visually behind and all

around your vehicle for persons, animals,

obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to

do so can result in vehicle damage, serious

injury or death.

 The rear-view camera is an aid system for

backing up, but it is not a substitute for

your visual confirmation.

 The view on the screen is limited, and

objects outside the view, such as under the

bumper or around either corner of the

bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.

Location of rear-view camera

CAUTION

 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image

cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the

lens with clean water and gently wipe with a

clean, soft cloth.

 To avoid damaging the camera;

• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish

it by using an abrasive compound.

• Do not disassemble the camera.

• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.

• Do not spray the camera and its surround-

ings with high-pressure water.

• Make sure that the liftgate is securely

closed when backing up.

BK0277700US.book 131 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Rear-view camera

5-132 Features and controls

Reference lines and upper surface of the rear

bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.

 Red line (B) indicates approximately

20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.

 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-

mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the

vehicle body.

 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-

tance from the rear bumper.

Reference lines on the screen

1- Approximately at the rear edge of the

rear bumper (if so equipped)

2- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)

3- Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)

CAUTION

 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle

lens. As a result, images and distances shown

on the screen are not exact.

 Actual distance may be different from dis-

tance indicated by the lines on the screen,

depending on the loading condition of the

vehicle and road surface condition.

The reference lines for distance and vehicle

width are based on a level, flat road surface.

In the following cases, objects shown on the

screen will appear to be farther off than they

actually are.

• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed

down with the weight of passengers and

luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)

• When there is an upward slope at the back.

(Case 2)

Case 1

A- Actual objects

B- Objects shown on the screen

CAUTION

 The reference lines for distance and vehicle

width are intended to indicate the distance to

a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.

They may not indicate correct distance

depending on the shape of an obstacle.

For example, when there is an object behind

the vehicle that has upper sections projecting

in the direction of the vehicle, the reference

lines on the screen will indicate that point A

is the farthest point and point B is the closest

point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B

are actually the same distance from the vehi-

cle, and point C is farther off than point A

and B.

Case 2

A- Actual objects

B- Objects shown on the screen

BK0277700US.book 132 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-133

N00587200068

The Multi Around Monitor system uses four

cameras, “Front-view camera”, “Side-view

cameras (right and left)” and “Rear-view

camera”, and displays composite views from

those cameras on the Smartphone Link Dis-

play Audio.

The Multi Around Monitor system will assist

the driver to park the vehicle in a narrow or

parallel parking space.

NOTE

 Mirror image is displayed on the screen.

 On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link

Display Audio, it is possible to change the

display language of the screen.

For details, please refer to the separated

owner’s manual.

 Under certain circumstances, it may become

difficult to see an image on the screen, even

when the system is functioning correctly.

• In a dark area, such as at night.

• When water drops or condensation are on

the lens.

• When sun light or headlights shine directly

into the lens.

Multi Around Monitor (if so

equipped)

WARNING

 Before using the Multi Around Monitor

system, read this entire section to fully

understand the limitations of this system.

Failure to follow instructions could result

in an accident.

 The Multi Around Monitor system is an

aid system to help observe around the

vehicle. It is not a substitute for your

visual confirmation.

 Never rely solely on the Multi Around

Monitor system. The view on the screen is

limited, and objects outside the view can-

not be seen on the screen.

CAUTION

 Before using the Multi Around Monitor,

make sure that all doors and the liftgate are

closed and the outside mirrors are unfolded.

If an outside mirror is folded and/or if a front

door and/or the liftgate is open, the areas dis-

played on the Multi Around Monitor will not

be appropriate.

Location of each camera

A- Rear-view camera

B- Front-view camera

C- Side-view camera

CAUTION

 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image

cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the

lens with clean water and gently wipe with a

clean, soft cloth.

BK0277700US.book 133 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

5-134 Features and controls

 To avoid damaging the camera;

• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish

it by using an abrasive compound.

• Do not disassemble the camera.

• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.

• Do not spray the camera and its surround-

ings with high-pressure water.

• Make sure that the liftgate is securely

closed when backing up.

 Do not attach anything on the camera and/or

surrounding areas. Doing so will disturb the

camera.

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 134 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-135

N00587300043

The range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras is limited to the area shown in the illustrations. It cannot show around the both sides and

the lower part of the front and rear bumpers, etc. While driving, be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle.

Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor

Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras

A: Front-view camera

B: Side-view camera (Right)

C: Side-view camera (Left)

D: Rear-view camera

BK0277700US.book 135 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

5-136 Features and controls

N00587400060

Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and

behind the vehicle are displayed.

Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle

and behind the vehicle are displayed.

Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and

the front of the vehicle are displayed.

Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle

and the front of the vehicle are displayed.

Types of views of the Multi

Around Monitor

Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode

Side-view/Rear-view mode

Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode

Side-view/Front-view mode

CAUTION

 The camera uses a special lens. As a result,

images and distances shown on the screen

are not exact.

NOTE

 Because the cameras have a special lens, the

lines on the ground between parking spaces

may not look parallel on the screen.

 Under certain circumstances, it may become

difficult to see an image on the screen, even

when the system is functioning correctly.

• In a dark area, such as at night.

• When water drops or condensation are on

the lens.

BK0277700US.book 136 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-137

N00587500074

The Multi Around Monitor can only be used

when the operation mode is put in ON.

When you move the selector lever to the “R”

(REVERSE) position, the bird’s eye-

view/rear-view is displayed on the Smart-

phone Link Display Audio. When you move

the selector lever to any other position, the

display disappears.

When the camera switch (A) is pressed, the

bird’s eye-view/front-view is displayed.

If the camera switch is pressed, the mode of

Multi Around Monitor is switched as follows.

Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode  Side-

view/Rear-view mode

If the camera switch is pressed, the mode of

Multi Around Monitor is switched, Bird’s

eye-view/Front-view mode  Side-

view/Front-view mode  OFF

• When sun light or headlights shine directly

into the lens.

• When a fluorescent light shines directly

into the lens.

 If the atmospheric temperature is extremely

hot or extremely cold, the camera images

may not be clear.

There is no abnormality.

 If a wireless device is installed near the cam-

era, the camera images may cause electrical

system interference and the system may stop

functioning properly.

How to use the Multi Around

Monitor

Operation with the selector lever

NOTE

 The passenger’s side screen can be switched

to the side-view by pressing the camera

switch on the steering wheel.

Operation with the switch

NOTE

 If there is no operation for 3 minutes after

the Multi Around Monitor is displayed by

pressing the switch with the selector lever in

other than “R” (REVERSE), the display dis-

appears.

Switching of the screen (Selector

lever is “R” (REVERSE))

Switching of the screen (Selector

lever is other than “R”

(REVERSE))

NOTE

 When you move the selector lever to the “R”

(REVERSE) position with the front-view

mode displayed on the driver’s side screen,

the driver’s side screen switches to the rear-

view mode. When you shift the selector lever

to any other position, the driver’s side screen

switches to the front-view mode.

 When the camera switch is pressed at the

vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h) or higher, only the side-view can

be displayed on the passenger’s side screen.

BK0277700US.book 137 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

5-138 Features and controls

N00587600059

In any mode other than the Bird’s eye-view

mode, the lines in the screen give the follow-

ing information. Use them only as a guide.

Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-

cle width and upper surface of the front bum-

per (A) are displayed on the screen.

 The Red line (B) indicates approximately

20 inches (50 cm) from the front edge of

the front bumper.

 The Two Green lines (C) indicate the

approximate vehicle width.

 The Orange lines (D) indicates an

expected course when the vehicle moves

forward with the steering wheel turned. It

disappears when the steering wheel is in

the neutral position.

 The approximate distance from the vehi-

cle body is as follows:

N00587700034

Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-

cle width and upper surface of the rear bum-

per (A) are displayed on the screen.

 The Red line (B) indicates approximately

20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear edge of

the rear bumper.

 The Two Green lines (C) indicate the

approximately vehicle width.

 The Orange line (D) indicates an expected

course when the vehicle is reserved with

the steering wheel turned. It disappears

when the steering wheel is in the neutral

position.

 The approximate distance from the vehi-

cle body is as follows:

 The front-view will not be displayed when

the vehicle speed exceeds approximately

6 mph (10 km/h).

 The display of the view may be delayed dur-

ing switching of the screen.

How to read the screen

CAUTION

 If the camera and/or its surrounding area

have experienced an impact, the Multi

Around Monitor system may not function

correctly. Have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Front-view mode

NOTE

1- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) from

the front edge of the front bumper

NOTE

 When the expected course lines are dis-

played in the front-view, the expected course

lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye-

view (Front: solid line, Rear: broken line).

Rear-view mode

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 138 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-139

1- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)

from the rear edge of the rear bumper

2- Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)

from the rear edge of the rear bumper

CAUTION

 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle

lens. As a result, images and distances shown

on the screen are not exact.

 Never rely solely on the reference lines. The

reference lines indicating distance and vehi-

cle width are based on a level, flat road sur-

face.

Actual distance may be different from dis-

tance indicated by the lines on the screen,

depending on the loading condition of the

vehicle and road surface condition.

Also, your vehicle width indicated by the

reference lines may be different from the

actual vehicle width.

For example;

In the following cases, objects shown on the

screen will appear to be farther off than they

actually are.

• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed

down with the weight of passengers and

luggage in the vehicle.

A: Actual objects

B: Objects shown on the screen

• When there is an upward slope behind the

vehicle.

A: Actual objects

B: Objects shown on the screen

CAUTION

• When there is a downward slope behind the

vehicle, objects shown on the screen will

appear to be closer than they actually are.

A: Actual objects

B: Objects shown on the screen

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 139 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

5-140 Features and controls

• When the vehicle is approaching a truck,

the reference lines indicate that your vehi-

cle will clear the truck. In reality, the truck

is in your path.

CAUTION

• When there is an object behind the vehicle

that has upper sections projecting in the

direction of the vehicle, the reference lines

on the screen will indicate that point A is

the farthest point and point B is the closest

point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and

B are actually the same distance from the

vehicle, and point C is farther off than point

A and B.

CAUTION

NOTE

 When the expected course lines are dis-

played in the rear-view, the expected course

lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye-

view (Front: broken line, Rear: solid line).

BK0277700US.book 140 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-141

N00587900036

Reference lines for the vehicle width and the

front end of the vehicle are displayed on the

screen.

N00588000034

An overhead view in which the vehicle is

looked down is displayed so that you can eas-

ily identify the location of your vehicle and

the course to enter the parking space.

Side-view mode

1- Approximate vehicle width including

the door mirror.

2- Approximate location of the axle center

of the front wheel.

3- Approximate 20 inches (50 cm) from the

front edge of the front bumper.

Bird’s eye-view mode

CAUTION

 The bird’s eye-view is a composite image

from images captured by the “Front-view

camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and

left)” and “Rear-view camera”. As a result,

objects may appear to be farther away than

they actually are. Also, an object may appear

to be in a direction and/or location different

from actual. In addition, blind spots exist in

proximity of the vehicle.

Even if the screen indicates that there is a

space between your vehicle and an object,

there may actually be less or no space.

Always check visually behind and all around

your vehicle.

 The view at a section near each corner on the

Bird's eye-view is combined from the edge

of the view captured by each camera. As

result, an object indicated in the section may

be unclear, and it may disappear/reappear on

the screen.

NOTE

 In the Bird’s eye-view mode, since the views

captured by the four cameras, “Front-view

camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and

left)” and “Rear-view camera” are processed

based on a level flat road surface, an image

may be displayed as follows:

• An object appears to have fallen down and

looks longer or larger.

BK0277700US.book 141 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Instrument cluster

5-142 Features and controls

N00594200028

It is possible to change the vehicle icon color

in the bird’s eye-view.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Press the switch (A) to display the bird’s

eye-view/front-view.

3. Press and hold down the switch (A) until

the vehicle icon blinks to enter the selec-

tion mode of the vehicle icon color in the

bird’s eye-view.

4. Press the switch until the desired color

appears on the display.

Each time you press the switch, the vehi-

cle icon color in the bird’s eye-view will

change to the next one.

5. When it is changed to your desired color,

press and hold the switch (A) for a few

seconds. This completes the setting.

N00519001444

• An object having a height from the road

surface may seem to appear from the joint

of the view composition processing

regions.

 The brightness of the views from each cam-

era may vary depending on the illuminance

conditions.

 An object above the camera is not displayed.

 The object displayed in the Front-view mode

or the Rear-view mode may not be displayed

in the Bird’s eye-view mode.

 The view in the Bird’s eye-view mode may

be displaced from its true position when the

mounting location and angle of each camera

are changed.

 The lines on the road may appear to be dis-

placed or bent at the joint of the views.

To change the vehicle icon color

in the bird’s eye-view

CAUTION

 For reasons of safety, do not operate the

switch while driving.

NOTE

 When the selection mode is in the following

situations, the vehicle icon color does not

change.

• When you place the gearshift lever or the

selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) posi-

tion.

• When you do not operate anything for 30

seconds.

• The operation mode is put in OFF.

Instrument cluster

1- Tachometer  P.5-143

2- Multi-information display

 P.5-144

Information screen display list 

P.5-164

3- Speedometer P.5-143

4- Rheostat illumination button 

P.5-143

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 142 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Instrument cluster

Features and controls 5-143

N00519101272

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in

miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour

(km/h).

N00519201303

The tachometer shows engine revolutions per

minute. This allows the driver to determine

the most efficient selector position and engine

speed combinations.

This gauge also assists in evaluating engine

performance.

N00554901293

Each time you press this button, there is a

sound and the brightness of the instruments

changes.

Speedometer

Type A

Type B

Tachometer

CAUTION

 The red zone indicates an engine speed

beyond the range of safe operation.

Select the correct selector position to control

the engine speed so that the tachometer indi-

cator does not enter the red zone.

Meter illumination control

1- Brightness level

2- Rheostat illumination button

NOTE

 You can adjust to 8 different levels for when

the front side-marker lights are illuminated

and when they are not.

 If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic

light control, the light switch is in a position

other than the “OFF” position and it is suffi-

ciently dark outside the vehicle, the meter

illumination switches automatically to the

adjusted brightness.

BK0277700US.book 143 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-144 Features and controls

N00555001480

The multi-information display displays warn-

ings, the odometer, trip odometer, service

reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel

remaining, outside temperature, selector lever

position, average and instant fuel consump-

tion, driving range, average speed, etc.

It is also possible to change elements such as

the language and units used on the multi-

information display.

[With ignition switch or operation mode in

OFF]

 The brightness level of the instruments is

stored when the ignition switch is turned to

the “OFF” position or the operation mode is

put in OFF.

 If you press and hold the button for longer

than approximately 2 second when the front

side-marker lights are illuminated, the

brightness level changes to the maximum

level. Pressing and holding the button for

longer than approximately 2 second again

returns the brightness level to the previous

level.

On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link

Display Audio, the map screen color may not

be switched to nighttime setting when the

meter illumination brightness level is at the

maximum.

Multi-information display

NOTE

Warning display screen  P.5-149

2- Information screen  P.5-146

Interrupt display screen  P.5-149

3- Door ajar warning display screen

 P.5-150

4- Odometer  P.5-151

“ ” mark indicator  P.5-149

BK0277700US.book 144 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-145

[With ignition switch or operation mode in ON]

N00555101234

Each time the multi-information display

switches are operated, the buzzer sounds and

the multi-information display changes

between information such as warnings, trip

odometer, average and instant fuel consump-

tion, distance range.

It is also possible to change elements such as

the language and units used on the multi-

information display by operating the multi-

information display switches.

1- S-AWC drive mode display screen (if

so equipped)  P.5-71

Warning display screen  P.5-149

3- ECO mode indicator display screen

 P.5-201

4- Information screen  P.5-146

5- Selector lever position display

 P.5-65

6- Engine coolant temperature display

 P.5-150

7- Odometer  P.5-151

8- Cruise control display screen  P.5-87

9- Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)

display screen (if so equipped)

 P.5-92

10- ECO indicator  P.5-154

11-

“ ” mark indicator  P.5-149

12- Fuel remaining display screen

 P.5-150

13- Outside temperature display screen

 P.5-151

NOTE

 The fuel units, outside temperature units,

display language, and other settings can be

changed.

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

Multi-information display

switches

BK0277700US.book 145 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-146 Features and controls

N00555301207

Press the switch to display the information screen. Then, press the switch or switch to switch the display screen in the following order.

Information screen (With the ignition switch in “OFF” position or the operation mode in OFF)

*: When there is a warning display

Trip odometer  P.5-151

BK0277700US.book 146 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-147

N00555801260

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the display screen switches in the following order.

Trip odometer  P.5-151

3- ECO score display  P.5-155

4- Service reminder  P.5-151

5- Redisplay of a warning display screen  P.5-149

Information screen (With the ignition switch is turned from the “OFF” position to the “ON” position

or the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON)

*: When the inspection time has arrived

1- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF

2- System check screen  P.5-153

3- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON

4- Service reminder  P.5-151

BK0277700US.book 147 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-148 Features and controls

N00556201317

Press the switch or switch to switch the display screen in the following order.

Information screen (With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON)

*: When there is a warning display

Trip odometer  P.5-151

3- Driving range display  P.5-153

ECO drive assist display  P.5-154

4- Average fuel consumption display

 P.5-153

ECO drive assist display  P.5-154

5- Average speed display  P.5-154

Instant fuel consumption display 

P.5-154

6- ECO score display  P.5-155

7- AYC (Active Yaw Control) operation

display (if so equipped)  P.5-81

8- S-AWC operation display (if so

equipped)  P.5-72

9- Service reminder  P.5-151

10- Function setting screen  P.5-155

11- Redisplay of a warning display screen

 P.5-149

NOTE

 While driving, the service reminder are not

displayed even if you operate the multi-

information display switches. Always stop

the vehicle in a safe place before operating.

BK0277700US.book 148 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-149

N00556301246

When there is information to be announced,

such as a system fault, the tone sounds and

the information screen is switched to the

warning display screen.

Refer to the warning list and take the neces-

sary measures.

Refer to “Warning display list” on page

5-165.

When the cause of the warning display is

eliminated, the warning display goes out

automatically.

Even if the cause of the warning display is

not eliminated, you can return to the screen

that was displayed before the warning dis-

play.

If you press the switch, the display screen

switches to the screen display from before the

warning and the warning (A) is also dis-

played.

Warning display screens with the “ ” mark

displayed in the upper right of the screen can

be switched. If you want to switch the dis-

play, press the switch for approximately

2 seconds or more.

N00579600034

When the warning is displayed, if you

press the switch or switch a few

times, the warning display screen you

switched from is redisplayed.

N00579700022

The operation status of each system is dis-

played on the information screen.

For further details, refer to the appropriate

page in the warning display list.

Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page

5-180.

N00555201248

This is displayed when you press the

switch and return from the warning display

screen to the previous screen.

This mark is also displayed if there is another

warning other than the one displayed.

When the cause of the warning display is

eliminated, the warning goes out automat-

ically.

 While driving, the function setting screen is

not displayed even if you operate the multi-

information display switches.

Always park the vehicle in a safe place,

firmly apply the parking brake and put the

selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position

before operating the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

 When there is information to be announced,

such as a system fault, the tone sounds and

the screen display is switched.

Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page

5-149.

Interrupt display screen

Warning display

NOTE

Returning to the display screen from

before the warning display

If you want to switch the display

Redisplay of a warning display

screen

Other interrupt displays

warning display screen

BK0277700US.book 149 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-150 Features and controls

N00529700043

If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-

pletely closed, this displays the open door or

liftgate.

If the speed increases to approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone

will sound four times to inform you that a

door is ajar.

N00578200020

Shows the engine coolant temperature.

If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink.

Pay careful attention to the engine coolant

temperature display while you are driving.

N00556601210

Shows the amount of fuel remaining.

NOTE

 When the warning is displayed, the warn-

ing display screen can be redisplayed on the

information screen.

Refer to “Information screen (with the igni-

tion switch in “OFF” position or the opera-

tion mode in OFF)” on page 5-146.

Refer to “Information screen (with the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode in ON)” on

page 5-148.

Door ajar warning display

screen

CAUTION

 Always make sure that the warning display

goes out before beginning to drive.

Engine coolant temperature

display

CAUTION

 If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.

In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.

Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place

and take the required measures. Refer to

“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.

Fuel remaining display screen

F- Full

E- Empty

CAUTION

 Running out of gas could damage the cata-

lytic converter. If the warning display

appears, refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

 It may take several seconds to stabilize the

display after refilling the tank.

 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or

the operation mode in ON, the remaining

fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel

level.

 The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank

filler door is located on the left side of the

vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on

page 3-3.)

BK0277700US.book 150 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-151

N00578300063

When the fuel level runs low, the information

screen switches to the interrupt display of the

fuel remaining warning display and the mark

(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If

the warning display appears, refuel as soon as

possible.

N00556501118

Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.

N00574901026

Shows the total distance traveled.

N00575001053

Shows the distance traveled between two

points.

Usage examples for trip odometer , trip

odometer

It is possible to measure two currently trav-

eled distances, from home using trip odome-

ter and from a particular point on the way

using trip odometer .

To return the display to “0”, hold down the

switch for approximately 2 seconds or

more. Only the currently displayed value will

be reset.

Example

If trip odometer is displayed, only trip

odometer will be reset.

 Both trip odometers and can

count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.

When a trip odometer goes past

9999.9 miles/kilometers, it returns to

0.0 miles/kilometers.

 When disconnecting the battery terminal,

the memories of trip odometer displays

and are cleared, and their displays

return to “0.0 miles/kilometers”.

N00556701338

Displays the approximate time until the next

recommended periodic inspection. “---” is

displayed when the inspection time has

arrived.

Fuel remaining warning display

NOTE

 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-

rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

Outside temperature display

screen

NOTE

 The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units (°F or °C).

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

 Depending on factors such as the driving

conditions, the displayed temperature may

vary from the actual outside temperature.

Odometer

Trip odometer

To reset the trip odometer

Service reminder

BK0277700US.book 151 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-152 Features and controls

1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection.

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-

tion is due. Contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice to have the system

checked.

At that time, when the ignition switch is

switched from the “OFF” position to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is

changed from OFF to ON, the warning

display is displayed for a few seconds on

the information screen.

3. After your vehicle is inspected at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it

displays the time until the next periodic

inspection.

The “---” display can be reset while the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.

When the display is reset, the time until the

next periodic inspection is displayed and the

warning display is no longer displayed when

the ignition switch is switched from the

“OFF” position to the “ON” position or the

operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.

1. When you press the switch or

switch, the information screen switches to

the service reminder display screen.

2. Press and hold the switch (for approxi-

mately 2 seconds or more) to display “ ”

and make it flash. (If there is no operation

for approximately 10 seconds with this

indicator flashing, the display returns to

the previous screen.)

3. With this indicator flashing, if you press

the switch, the screen switches from “-

--” to “CLEAR”. After that, the time until

the next periodic inspection is shown.

NOTE

 The service reminder time can be modified

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,

to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to

“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi-

cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For

further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles

(100 km) and the time in units of 1 month.

To reset

BK0277700US.book 152 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-153

N00578400048

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, the system check screen is displayed for

approximately 4 seconds. If there is no fault,

the information screen is displayed.

If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-

ing display.

Refer to “Warning display list” on page

5-165.

N00575201026

Shows the approximate driving range (how

many more miles or kilometers you can

drive). When this driving range falls below

30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed.

Refuel as soon as possible.

N00575301027

This displays the average fuel consumption

from the last reset to the present.

There are 2 types of mode settings of manual

reset and automatic reset.

Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-

age fuel consumption and average speed” on

page 5-157.

For information on how to change the aver-

age fuel consumption display setting, refer to

“Changing the function settings” on page

5-155.

CAUTION

 The customer is responsible for making sure

that regular inspections and maintenance and

periodic inspections and maintenance are

performed.

Inspections and maintenance must be per-

formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-

tions.

NOTE

 The “---” display cannot be reset while the

ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON.

 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-

tance and a certain period of time, the dis-

play is reset and the time until the next

periodic inspection is displayed.

 If you accidentally reset the display, consult

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for

assistance.

System check screen

Driving range display

NOTE

 The driving range is determined based on the

fuel consumption data. This may vary

depending on the driving conditions and hab-

its. Treat the distance displayed as just a

rough guideline.

 When you refuel, the driving range display is

updated.

However, if you only add a small amount of

fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.

Fill to a full tank whenever possible.

 When your vehicle is stopped on an

extremely steep hill, the driving range value

may, change. This is due to the movement of

fuel in the tank and does not indicate any

breakdown.

 The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units (miles or km).

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

Average fuel consumption dis-

play

NOTE

 The average fuel consumption display can be

reset separately in both auto reset mode and

manual reset mode.

 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-

sumption cannot be measured.

 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset

mode”.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 153 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-154 Features and controls

N00578500023

This displays the average speed from the last

reset to the present.

There are 2 types of mode setting of manual

reset and automatic reset.

Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-

age fuel consumption and average speed” on

page 5-157.

For the method for changing the average

speed display setting, refer to “Changing the

function settings” on page 5-155.

N00578600037

While driving, the instant fuel consumption is

shown with a bar graph.

The “ ” mark in the instant fuel gauge

shows the average fuel consumption.

When the instant fuel consumption surpasses

the average fuel consumption, the instant fuel

consumption is displayed with a green bar

graph.

Be conscious of maintaining the instant fuel

consumption above the average fuel con-

sumption, it can help you drive with the better

fuel consumption.

N00568701032

This indicator will be displayed when fuel-

efficient driving is achieved.

N00578700038

This function displays how fuel-efficiently

you are driving under different driving condi-

tions.

The ECO drive assist display will change as

follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using

the accelerator in a way well matched with

the vehicle speed.

 Average fuel consumption may vary depend-

ing on the driving conditions (road condi-

tions, how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel

consumption may differ from the fuel con-

sumption displayed, so treat the fuel con-

sumption displayed as just a rough guideline.

 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase

from memory the manual reset mode or auto

reset mode setting for the average fuel con-

sumption display.

 The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),

L/100km or km/L}.

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

Average speed display

NOTE

 The average speed display can be reset sepa-

rately in both auto reset mode and manual

reset mode.

 “---” is displayed when the average speed

cannot be measured.

 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset

mode”.

 The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units (mph or km/h).

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase

from memory the manual reset mode or auto

reset mode setting for the average speed dis-

play.

Instant fuel consumption dis-

play

NOTE

 When the instant fuel consumption cannot be

measured, a bar graph is not shown.

 The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),

L/100km or km/L}.

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-155.

ECO indicator

ECO Drive Assist

BK0277700US.book 154 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-155

N00578800055

ECO score indicates the points you have

scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-

ber of leaves as follows:

[When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is ON]

The display shows the score you achieved in

the last several minutes.

[When the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position or the operation mode is put

in OFF]

The display shows the overall ECO score the

function has counted from the time when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position

to the time when it is turned to the “OFF” or

“ACC” position, or from the time when the

operation mode is set to ON to the time when

it is set to OFF.

N00556801283

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Firmly apply the parking brake and move

the selector lever into the “P” (PARK)

position.

2. When you press the switch or

switch, the information screen switches to

the function setting screen.

Refer to “Information screen” on page

5-148.

3. Press the switch to switch to the top

screen (A) for the menu screens. Then,

press the switch or switch to

switch to the menu screens (B).

NOTE

 The ECO drive assist is displayed only when

vehicle is driven with the selector lever in

the “D” (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is

driven in the sport mode (for vehicles

equipped with sportronic steering wheel pad-

dle shifter).

ECO Score

ECO drive level

Low High

Changing the function settings

ECO drive level

Low High

CAUTION

 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.

While driving, even if you operate the multi-

information display switches ( , , ),

the function setting screen is not displayed.

BK0277700US.book 155 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-156 Features and controls

: switch

: switch or switch

1- Changing the reset mode for average

fuel consumption and average speed 

P.5-157

2- Changing the fuel consumption display

unit  P.5-158

3- Changing the temperature unit 

P.5-158

4- Changing the display language 

P.5-159

5- Changing the language on other system

to match the multi-information display

(if so equipped)  P.5-159

6- Operation sound setting  P.5-160

7- Changing the time until “REST

REMINDER” is displayed  P.5-161

8- Changing the turn signal sound 

P.5-161

9- Changing the instant fuel consumption

display  P.5-161

10- Blind Spot Warning (BSW): To operate

(if so equipped)  P.5-114

11- Tire ID set change  P.5-130

12- Returning to the factory settings 

P.5-162

NOTE

 If no operations are made within approxi-

mately 30 seconds of the menu screen being

displayed, the display returns to the function

setting screen.

BK0277700US.book 156 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-157

4. After switching to the menu screen (B) for

the setting you want to change, press the

switch to switch to the setting selec-

tion screen. For further details on the

operation methods, refer to the each sec-

tions.

N00557001266

You can change the mode condition for the

average fuel consumption and average speed

display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset.”

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “AVERAGE FUEL

CONSUMPTION RESET MODE”

screen. Then, press the switch to

switch to the setting selection screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the reset mode, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

The setting is changed to the selected

reset condition.

 If you press and hold the switch when

the average fuel consumption and average

speed are displayed, these calculations

will be reset to zero.

 When the following operation is per-

formed, the mode setting changes auto-

matically from manual to auto.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

Change the operation mode to ON from

ACC or OFF.

 When the average fuel consumption and

average speed are being displayed, if you

press and hold the switch, these calcu-

lations will be reset to zero.

 When the engine switch or the operation

mode is in the following conditions, the

average fuel consumption display and the

average speed display will automatically

reset.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch has been set to the

“ACC” or “OFF” position for approxi-

mately 4 hours or more.

NOTE

 If the battery is disconnected, these function

settings are reset from memory to the factory

settings automatically (except “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW): To operate”, “Reset of low

tire pressure warning threshold” and “Tire

ID set change”).

 You cannot select an item that is displayed

dimly on the menu.

Changing the reset mode for aver-

age fuel consumption and average

speed

Manual reset mode

Auto reset mode

BK0277700US.book 157 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-158 Features and controls

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

The operation mode has been in ACC or

OFF for approximately 4 hours or more.

N00557101195

The fuel consumption display unit can be

changed. The distance, speed, and amount

units are also changed to match the selected

fuel consumption unit.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “FUEL CON-

SUMPTION UNIT” screen. Then, press

the switch to switch to the setting

selection screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the units, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

The setting is changed to the selected unit.

The distance and speed units are also changed

in the following combinations to match the

selected fuel consumption unit.

N00557201242

The temperature display unit can be switched.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “TEMPERATURE

UNIT” screen. Then, press the switch

to switch to the setting selection screen.

NOTE

 The average fuel consumption display and

average speed display can be reset separately

in both auto reset mode and manual reset

mode.

 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase

from memory the manual reset mode or auto

reset mode setting for the average speed dis-

play and average fuel consumption display.

 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset

mode”.

Changing the fuel consumption

display unit

NOTE

 The display units for the driving range, the

average fuel consumption, the average speed

and the instant fuel consumption are

changed, but the units for the indicating nee-

dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip

odometer will remain unchanged.

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of

the unit setting is erased and is automatically

set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.

Fuel

economy

Distance

(driving

range)

Speed

(average

speed)

km /L km km /h

L /100 km km km /h

mpg (US) mile (s) mph

mpg (UK) mile (s) mph

Changing the temperature unit

BK0277700US.book 158 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-159

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the units, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

The setting is changed to the selected tem-

perature unit.

N00557301201

The language of the multi-information dis-

play can be changed.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “LANGUAGE”

screen.

Then, press the switch to switch to the

setting selection screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the desired language, and then press

the switch to confirm the setting.

The setting is changed to the selected lan-

guage.

N00529801360

The language used in Multi Around Monitor

(if so equipped) or Head Up Display (HUD)

(if so equipped) can be changed automatically

to the same language as that shown in the

multi-information display.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

NOTE

 The temperature value on air conditioning

panel is switched in conjunction with outside

temperature display unit of the multi-infor-

mation display.

However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-

perature display of an air conditioning.

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of

the unit setting is erased and is automatically

set to °F (°C).

Changing the display language

NOTE

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of

the language setting is erased and is automat-

ically set to ENGLISH.

 If “---” is selected in the language setting, a

warning message is not displayed when there

is a warning display or interrupt display.

Changing the language on other

system to match the multi-infor-

mation display

(if so equipped)

BK0277700US.book 159 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-160 Features and controls

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “LANGUAGE

SYNC” screen. Then, press the switch

to switch to the setting selection screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the setting, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

N00557401172

You can change the operation sounds of the

multi-information display switches and rheo-

stat illumination button.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “OPERATION

SOUND” screen. Then, press the

switch to switch to the setting selection

screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the sound, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

The setting is changed to the selected con-

dition.

NOTE

 If the battery is disconnected, the language

cooperative control is automatically set to

“ON” (language cooperation: enabled).

 The language cooperation setting can be

switched in the following manner.

• When “ON” (language cooperation:

enabled) has been selected, the language for

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) or

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped) is

automatically changed to the language

selected for the multi-information display.

However, this changing function may not

work depending on the language selected

for the multi-information display.

• When “OFF” (language cooperation: dis-

abled) has been selected, the language for

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) or

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped) is

not automatically changed to match the lan-

guage selected for the multi-information

display.

 The language on the audio system’s display

does not automatically change when you

select “ON” (language cooperation: enabled)

in the language cooperation control.

Operation sound setting

NOTE

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of

the operation sound setting is erased and is

automatically set to ON (operation sound

on).

BK0277700US.book 160 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-161

N00557501186

The time until the display appears can be

changed.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “REST

REMINDER” screen. Then, press the

switch to switch to the setting selection

screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the time, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

The setting is changed to the selected

time.

N00563501107

It is possible to change the turn signal sound.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “TURN SIGNAL

SOUND” screen. Then, press the

switch to switch to the setting selection

screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the sound, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

The setting changes to the selected turn

signal sound.

N00563601052

It is possible to change the bar graph setting

of the instant fuel consumption display.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

 The operation sound setting only deactivates

the operation sound of the multi-information

display switches and rheostat illumination

button. The warning display and other

sounds cannot be deactivated.

Changing the time until “REST

REMINDER” is displayed

NOTE

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of

the unit setting is erased and is automatically

set to the “OFF”.

 The drive time is reset when the ignition

switch is in the “OFF” position or the opera-

tion mode is in OFF.

Changing the turn signal sound

Changing the instant fuel con-

sumption display

BK0277700US.book 161 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Multi-information display

5-162 Features and controls

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “INSTANT FUEL

CONSUMPTION DISPLAY” screen.

Then, press the switch to switch to the

setting selection screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select the setting, and then press the

switch to confirm the setting.

The setting changes to the selected bar

graph setting.

N00557601233

Many of the function settings can be returned

to their factory settings.

1. Switch to the function setting screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings”

on page 5-155.

2. Press the switch or switch several

times to switch to the “FACTORY

RESET” screen. Then, press the

switch to switch to the setting selection

screen.

3. Press the switch or switch to

select “RESET”, and then press and hold

the switch for approximately 5 sec-

onds or more to confirm the setting.

The buzzer sounds and all of the function

settings are returned to the factory set-

tings.

Returning to the factory settings

NOTE

 The factory settings are as follows.

• “AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

RESET MODE”: AUTO

• “FUEL CONSUMPTION UNIT”: mpg

(US) or (L/100 km)

• “TEMPERATURE UNIT”: °F (Fahrenheit)

or °C (Celsius)

• “LANGUAGE”: ENGLISH

• “LANGUAGE SYNC”: ON

• “OPERATION SOUND”: ON

• “REST REMINDER”: OFF

• “TURN SIGNAL SOUND”: SOUND 1

• “INSTANT FUEL CONSUMPTION DIS-

PLAY”: ON

 “BSW” and “TPMS ID” cannot be returned

to their factory settings.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 162 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-163

N00557701090

N00557801411

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Indicator and warning light list

1- Position indicator  P.5-183

2- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning

lights  P.5-183

3- Front fog light indicator  P.5-183

4- High beam indicator  P.5-183

5- Automatic High Beam (AHB) indicator

(if so equipped)  P.5-194

6- LED headlight warning light (if so

equipped)  P.5-193

7- Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM) OFF indicator (if so equipped)

 P.5-108

8- Charging system warning light

 P.5-186

9- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indi-

cator (if so equipped)  P.5-123

10- Electric power steering system (EPS)

warning light  P.5-84

11- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator

light (if so equipped)  P.5-113

12- Information screen display

 P.5-164

13- Electric parking brake warning light (if

so equipped)  P.5-184

14- Active stability control (ASC) indicator

 P.5-86

15- Active stability control (ASC) OFF

indicator  P.5-86

16- Anti-lock braking system warning light

 P.5-82

BK0277700US.book 163 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-164 Features and controls

N00557901122

When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below.

Refer to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.

When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.

Refer to Warning display list on page 5-165.

Refer to Other interrupt displays on page 5-180.

17- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

warning light  P. 4-36

18- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-

VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check

engine light”)  P.5-185

19- Seat belt reminder/warning light

 P.4-18

20- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light  P.5-127

21- Brake auto hold indicator (if so

equipped)  P.5-77

22- Brake warning light  P.5-184

Information screen display

NOTE

 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.

This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.

• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.

• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicle’s electronics (including after-market parts).

If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and

have the system checked.

BK0277700US.book 164 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-165

N00558001393

Warning display list

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key from the igni-

tion switch.

 Remove the key.

Refer to “Key reminder system” on page 5-36.

 You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (headlights and

other lights)” on page 5-193.

 The washer fluid is running low.  Replenish the container with washer fluid.

Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-9.

Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-7.

 There is a malfunction in the LED headlights.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system.

Refer to “LED headlight warning light” on page

5-193.

 The system has received the customer key program-

ming request correctly and is currently processing

the registration request.

Refer to “Customer key programming (Except for vehi-

cles sold in Canada)” on page 5-5.

Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except

for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-28.

BK0277700US.book 165 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-166 Features and controls

 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-13.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 166 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-167

Engine switch is pressed

one time

Engine switch is pressed

two times or more

 Although the engine switch was pressed, the

F.A.S.T.-key could not be detected.

 Touch the F.A.S.T.-key to the engine switch.

Refer to “If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operating prop-

erly” on page 5-26.

 The engine switch is pressed to stop the engine while

the selector lever is in a position other than the “P”

(PARK) position.

 Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position

to put the operation mode in OFF.

 There is a fault in the EPS.  Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice as soon as possible.

Refer to “Electric power steering system (EPS)” on

page 5-84.

 There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking system.  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving, park

the vehicle in a safe place, and take corrective mea-

sures.

Refer to “Anti-lock braking system warning

lights/display” on page 5-82.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 167 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-168 Features and controls

 The tire pressure in one of the tires (except spare

tire) is low.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page

5-127.

 There is a fault in the tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page

5-127.

 One of the doors or the liftgate is not completely

closed.

The open door is displayed.

 Close the door or liftgate.

Refer to “Door ajar warning display screen” on page

5-150.

 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.

Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.

 There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system).

 Put the operation mode in OFF, and then start the

engine again.

If the warning is not cancelled, please contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 168 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-169

 The driver’s door is open when the operation mode

is in any mode other than OFF.

 Put the operation mode in OFF.

Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder system” on

page 5-37.

 An attempt was made to lock all the doors and the

liftgate when the operation mode is in any mode

other than OFF.

 Put the operation mode in OFF.

Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system” on

page 5-21.

 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible

and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective

measures.

Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.

 The automatic transaxle or CVT fluid temperature is

increased.

 Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective

measures.

Refer to “Continuously variable transmission

(CVT)” on page 5-63.

 The seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch

or operation mode is in ON.

 Wear your seat belt properly.

Refer to “Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light

and display” on page 4-18.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 169 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-170 Features and controls

 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

 The vehicle is being driven with the parking brake

still applied.

 Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake warning

display” on page 5-186.

 The brake fluid level is low.

 There is a fault in the brake system.

 Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect it.

 If the light still illuminates after the inspection, con-

tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Refer to “Brake warning display” on page 5-186.

 There is a fault in the Electric parking brake.  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-50.

 The parking brake cannot be applied temporarily due

to repeated operation of the Electric parking brake

switch within a short time.

Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-50.

 You try to release the Electric parking brake switch

without depressing the brake pedal.

Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-50.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 170 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-171

 The Electric parking brake has been automatically

applied.

Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

 The brake auto hold is automatically cancelled. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

 There is a fault in the Electric parking brake system

or the brake auto hold system. The brake auto hold

cannot be used.

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to

have the system checked.

Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

 The Electric parking brake is not automatically

applied because there is a fault in the Electric park-

ing brake system.

 When the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is put in OFF, place

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position and

depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual with

the right foot.

Then, operate the ignition switch or the engine

switch.

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 171 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-172 Features and controls

 The brake auto hold system does not turn on because

the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

 Press the brake auto hold switch after fastening the

driver’s seat belt.

Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

 The brake auto hold system does not turn off because

the brake pedal is not pressed.

 Depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual with

the right foot. Then, press the brake auto hold switch.

Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible

and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on page

5-187.

 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible

and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Refer to “Charging system warning display” on page

5-187.

 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the pre-tensioner

system.

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked, immediately.

Refer to “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-36.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 172 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-173

 There is a fault in the active stability control (ASC).  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page

5-84.

 There is a fault in the hill start assist.  Have the vehicle checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 5-79.

 There is a fault in the S-AWC system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)” on

page 5-70.

 There is a fault in the CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “Continuously variable transmission

(CVT)” on page 5-63.

 The S-AWC system is hot. Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)” on page

5-70.

 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible.

Refer to “Fuel remaining display screen” on page

5-150.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 173 ページ２０１９年３月１２日　火曜日　午前９時３８分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-174 Features and controls

 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or less.  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

 The ground may be frozen even when this warning is

not displayed, so drive carefully.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) has

detected the approach of the vehicles in front.

 Increase the following distance by depressing the

brake pedal or marking other decelerating control.

Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC):

Approach alarm” on page 5-96.

 The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) has

detected the danger of collision.

 Take appropriate action such as depressing the brake

to avoid collision.

Refer to “Forward collision warning function” on

page 5-105.

 The Electric parking brake cannot be applied auto-

matically.

 Depress the brake pedal as soon as possible.

Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-77.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 174 ページ２０１９年３月１２日　火曜日　午前９時３８分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-175

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) control

is active.

Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 5-94.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) control

is automatically canceled and the system is placed in

the standby state.

 Conditions for the start of control are not met, the

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot start

the control.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot

start the control because the speed is out of speed

range.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot

start the control because not detected the approach of

the vehicles in front.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) is tem-

porarily unavailable due to conditions such as the

adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.

This is not a malfunction.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 175 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-176 Features and controls

 There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise Control Sys-

tem (ACC).

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “When ACC detects a vehicle in front

within the set distance” on page 5-95.

 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to

the bumper surface around the sensor.

 Remove a foreign object on the bumper surface

around the sensor.

When the warning display does not disappear after

having cleaned the bumper surface around the sen-

sor, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice.

Refer to “To cancel ACC control” on page 5-100.

 There is a fault in the Forward Collision Mitigation

system (FCM).

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “System problem warning” on page 5-109.

 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to

the bumper surface around the sensor.

 Remove a foreign object on the bumper surface

around the sensor.

When the warning display does not disappear after

having cleaned the bumper surface around the sen-

sor, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice.

Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM): System problem warning” on page 5-109.

 FCM braking function of the Forward Collision Mit-

igation system (FCM) has been activated.

Refer to “FCM braking function” on page 5-106.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 176 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-177

 The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) is

temporarily unavailable for some reason.

This is not a malfunction.

Refer to “System problem warning” on page 5-109.

 The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) has detected

that your vehicle is about to leave or has left the lane.

Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” on page

5-123.

 There is a fault in the Lane Departure Warning

(LDW).

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” on page

5-123.

 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is temporar-

ily not available for some reason such as the environ-

mental condition or increase of the sensor

temperature.

 When the warning display does not disappear after

waiting for a while, contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When the sen-

sor is temporarily not available” on page 5-116.

 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not operate

normally because there are some malfunctions in the

system.

 Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is

a malfunction in the system” on page 5-116.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 177 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-178 Features and controls

 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to

the bumper surface around the sensor.

 Remove a foreign object on the bumper surface

around the sensor.

When the warning display does not disappear after

having cleaned the bumper surface around the sen-

sor, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is

a foreign object on the sensor” on page 5-117.

 The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is detected the

vehicle approaching your vehicle.

 Pay special attention to the rear of your vehicle.

Refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” on page

5-119.

 There is a fault in the sensor.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM): System problem warning” on page 5-109.

Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System

problem warning” on page 5-125.

Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System

problem warning” on page 5-197.

 The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM),

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Automatic

High Beam (AHB) are temporarily unavailable due

to the high or low temperature of the sensor.

 After the temperature of the sensor has been in

range, the system will automatically return to opera-

tion.

Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM): System problem warning” on page 5-109.

Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System

problem warning” on page 5-125.

Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System

problem warning” on page 5-197.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 178 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-179

 The sensor is temporarily unavailable due to condi-

tions such as the adhesion of contaminants to the

sensor or windshield.

This is not a malfunction.

Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM):

System problem warning” on page 5-109.

Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System

problem warning” on page 5-125.

Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System prob-

lem warning” on page 5-197.

 There is a fault in the system of automatic high

beam.

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System

problem warning” on page 5-197.

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

BK0277700US.book 179 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-180 Features and controls

N00558201425

The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.

Other interrupt displays

Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

 When starting the engine, the selector

lever is in a position other than the “P”

(PARK) or the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-

tion, or you pressed the engine switch

without depressing the brake pedal.

 Place the selector lever in the “P”

(PARK) position, depress and hold the

brake pedal with the right foot, and then

press the engine switch to start the

engine.

Refer to “Starting and stopping the

engine” on page 5-24.

 When communication was successful

after the F.A.S.T.-key was touched to the

engine switch.

Refer to “If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operating

properly” on page 5-26.

NOTE

 When operating each system, confirm that the operation status of the system has changed on the information screen. However, the operation status of the

system may not be displayed immediately after the warning display appears even if the system is operated.

BK0277700US.book 180 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

Features and controls 5-181

Screen System operation status Reference

 When “AUTO” mode of S-AWC is

selected.

Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-

trol)” on page 5-70.

 When “SNOW” mode of S-AWC is

selected.

 When “GRAVEL” mode of S-AWC is

selected.

 When the ECO mode is activated. Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-201.

 When the Forward Collision Mitigation

system (FCM) is activated or the timing

of an alarm is changed.

Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page

5-108.

BK0277700US.book 181 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

5-182 Features and controls

This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.

 When the Forward Collision Mitigation

system (FCM) is deactivated.

Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page

5-108.

Screen Do this

Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,

refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-151.

Screen System operation status Reference

BK0277700US.book 182 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Indicators

Features and controls 5-183

The rest time can be set.

N00519900127

N00520000216

The arrows will flash in time with the corre-

sponding exterior turn signals when the turn

signal lever is used.

Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-

ing flasher switch is pressed.

N00520100086

A blue light comes on when the headlights

are on high beam.

N00520201273

This indicator comes on while the front fog

lights are on.

N00551301094

This indicator light illuminates while the

parking lights are on.

Screen Do this

Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.

Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.

The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-155.

The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive

without having a rest, the buzzer sounds approximately every 5 minutes to encourage you to

take a rest.

 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous

display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer

encourage you to take a rest.

• The buzzer sounds three times.

• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in

OFF.

• The multi-information display switches are held (for approximately 2 seconds or

more).

Indicators

Turn signal indicators/Hazard

warning lights

NOTE

 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if

the indicator stays on without flashing, check

for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or

turn signal connection.

High beam indicator

Front fog light indicator

Position indicator

BK0277700US.book 183 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Warning lights

5-184 Features and controls

N00520300147

N00520401594

This light comes on when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or

the operation mode is put in ON.

When the engine is started, the light should

go off a few seconds later. A warning is also

displayed in the multi-information display.

The warning light also illuminates after start-

ing the engine under the following condi-

tions.

 When the parking brake is still applied.

 When the brake fluid level is low.

 When the brake system circuit is not

working properly.

When the vehicle is moving at more than

5 mph (8 km/h) and parking brake applied, a

buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the

parking brake is not properly release.

Before driving, be sure that the parking brake

is fully released and brake warning light is

off.

N00591200069

This warning light will illuminate when there

is a fault in the Electric parking brake system.

Normally, this warning light illuminates

when the operation mode is put in ON, and

goes off in a few seconds.

Warning lights

Brake warning light and buzzer

CAUTION

 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock

braking system warning light are illuminated

at the same time, the braking force distribu-

tion function will not operate, so the vehicle

may be destabilized during sudden braking

under the following conditions.

• When the brake warning light does not go

out even when the parking brake is

released.

• When the brake warning light stays on

while driving.

• If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking

and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in

a safe place, and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice as soon as possible.

 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the

following manner when brake performance

is deteriorated.

• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when

you press down on the brake pedal harder

than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal

may go all the way to the floor.

• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking

to reduce your speed and observe the fol-

lowings.

[Vehicles with the parking brake of the

lever type]

Carefully pull the parking brake lever.

[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]

Keep pulling the Electric parking brake

switch.

Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page

5-50.

Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the

stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.

Electric parking brake warning

light (if so equipped)

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 184 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Warning lights

Features and controls 5-185

N00520501856

This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-

nostic (OBD) system which monitors the

emissions, engine control system or continu-

ously variable transmission (CVT) control

system. If a problem is detected in one of

these systems, this indicator illuminates or

flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position or the operation mode is

put in ON, this indicator normally comes on

and goes off after the engine has started.

This indicator will come on if the fuel tank

filler cap is not properly tightened. If this

indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-

ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is

properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise

until you hear clicking sounds.)

If this indicator does not go off after several

seconds or lights up while driving, have the

system checked as soon as possible at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

CAUTION

 When the warning light remains on or does

not come on, there is the possibility that the

parking brake cannot be operated or

released. Immediately contact the nearest

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. When

the warning light comes on during driving,

immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer. If you inevitably have to park, park

the vehicle on level and stable ground, shift

the selector lever in “P” (PARK) position

and place chocks or blocks.

Engine malfunction indicator

(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”

or “Check engine light”)

CAUTION

 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-

function indicator on may cause more dam-

age to the emission control system. This

could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-

ity.

 If this indicator does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have

the system checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on

while the engine is running, avoid driving at

high speeds.

During vehicle operation with the indicator

on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you

depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-

cator on, you must depress the brake pedal

more firmly than usual since the engine

idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-

cle with continuously variable transmission

(CVT) has a stronger tendency to creep for-

ward.

NOTE

 Do not disconnect the battery cable when the

engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE

ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is

on.

The engine electronic control module stores

critical OBD information (especially exhaust

emission data), which may be lost if the bat-

tery cable is disconnected while the engine

malfunction indicator is on. This will make it

difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-

lems.

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 185 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Information screen display

5-186 Features and controls

N00520601349

This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-

tion in the charging system or when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position

(engine off) or the operation mode is put in

ON. The warning is also displayed in the

multi-information display. When the engine

is started, the light should go out. Check to

make sure that the light has gone out before

driving.

N00558301077

N00558401225

This warning is displayed if the vehicle is

being driven with the parking brake still

applied. The brake warning light in the instru-

ment cluster only comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

For details, refer to “Brake warning light and

buzzer” on page 5-184.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is

displayed.

The brake warning light in the instrument

cluster also illuminates.

For details, refer to “Brake warning light and

buzzer” on page 5-184.

Charging system warning light

CAUTION

 If the warning light stays on while the engine

is running, park your vehicle in a safe place

as soon as possible and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice to have the system checked.

Information screen display

Brake warning display

CAUTION

 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the

parking brake, the brakes will overheat,

resulting in ineffective braking and possible

brake failure.

If this warning is displayed, release the park-

ing brake.

CAUTION

 If this warning stays on and does not go out

while driving, there is a danger of ineffective

braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a

safe place, and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

 If the brake warning display, brake warning

light, and the Anti-lock braking system

warning light are illuminated at the same

time, the braking force distribution function

will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-

bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden

braking and high-speed driving. Park the

vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the

following manner when brake performance

is deteriorated.

• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when

you press down on the brake pedal harder

than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal

may go all the way to the floor.

BK0277700US.book 186 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-187

N00558601126

If there is a fault in the charging system, the

warning display is displayed on the informa-

tion screen in the multi-information display.

The charge warning light in the instrument

cluster also illuminates.

N00558701127

If the engine oil pressure drops while the

engine is running, the warning display is dis-

played on the information screen in the multi-

information display.

N00594300032

The Head Up Display (HUD) shows informa-

tion on a transparent display so that you can

easily check the following information while

looking ahead when driving.

Displayed information:

 Vehicle speed

 Auto-speed (cruise) control information

 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)

information

• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking

to reduce your speed and observe the fol-

lowings.

[Vehicles with the parking brake of the

lever type]

Carefully pull the parking brake lever.

[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]

Keep pulling the Electric parking brake

switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake”

on page 5-50.)

Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the

stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.

Charging system warning dis-

play

CAUTION

 If warnings are displayed while the engine is

running, park your vehicle in a safe place as

soon as possible and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice to have the system checked.

Oil pressure warning display

CAUTION

 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is

low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-

ing is displayed, the engine may overheat

and damage may result.

 If the warning is displayed while the engine

is running, park your vehicle in a safe place

as soon as possible and check the engine oil

level.

 If this warning display comes on when the

engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle

checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

NOTE

 The oil pressure warning display does not

show the amount of oil. The oil level must be

checked using the dipstick.

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 187 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)

5-188 Features and controls

When a warning is displayed on the informa-

tion screen in the meter, a warning will also

be displayed on the HUD.

Examples of displayed warnings:

 Door ajar warning

 Seat belt reminder

 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)

warning

 Forward Collision Mitigation system

(FCM) warning

 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Refer to “Indicator light, warning light, and

information screen display list” on page

5-163.

1- Display

2- Speed display screen

3- Information display screen

Example

WARNING

 Always stop the vehicle in a safe place

before operating the HUD. If you operate

it while driving, your attention to the road

ahead may be affected, resulting in an

accident.

 Do not spray water or spill beverages in

the HUD. If the switches, wires, or electri-

cal components become wet, they could

malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.

If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe

up as much liquid as possible and immedi-

ately consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

CAUTION

 When opening or closing the display, do not

touch the moving parts. Otherwise, your

hands could be caught, resulting in personal

injury.

 Do not place any objects near the HUD. The

objects could prevent the display from open-

ing or obstruct the opening operation, result-

ing in a malfunction.

 Never open, close, or adjust the angle of the

display manually. Applying a strong force to

the display could result in a malfunction.

 Do not affix a sticker, label, etc., to the dis-

play. They could block the display or

obstruct the opening or closing operation,

resulting in a malfunction. Also, the sensor

(A) that adjusts the brightness of the display

may not function correctly, causing the dis-

play to be difficult to see.

 Do not shine a bright light onto the light-

receiving portion of the sensor (A). The sen-

sor could malfunction.

 If you drop an object into the storage space

for the display and cannot retrieve it, or if the

display was closed while an object was in the

storage space and can no longer be opened,

contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

have the system checked.

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 188 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-189

1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode is in ON, push

the switch to open the display.

2. The launch screen will be displayed, and

then information will be displayed.

1. When the display is open, push the

switch.

2. The ending screen will be displayed, and

then the display will close.

NOTE

 When you are wearing sunglasses, the dis-

play may be difficult to see. Remove your

sunglasses or adjust the brightness of the dis-

play.

Refer to “Adjusting the brightness of the dis-

play” on page 5-190.

 If the battery is disconnected or the battery

voltage is low, the display will return to the

default angle and may be difficult to see. If

this occurs, adjust the angle of the display.

Refer to “Adjusting the angle of the display”

on page 5-190.

 It may be difficult to see the display depend-

ing on the weather conditions (rain, snow,

direct sunlight, temperature, etc.). If this

occurs, adjust the angle and brightness of the

display.

Refer to “Adjusting the angle of the display”

on page 5-190 and “Adjusting the brightness

of the display” on page 5-190.

Using the HUD

NOTE

 If the display does not open or close when

the switch is pushed, check that there are

no objects near the display obstructing its

movement. If the display does not open or

close even though there are no obstructions,

contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

have the system checked.

Opening the display

NOTE

 If the HUD was open when the ignition

switch was turned to the “OFF” position or

the operation mode was put in OFF, the HUD

will open automatically when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position or the

operation mode is put in ON.

 If the HUD was close when the ignition

switch was turned to the “OFF” position or

the operation mode was put in OFF, the HUD

will not open automatically when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or

the operation mode is put in ON.

Closing the display

BK0277700US.book 189 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)

5-190 Features and controls

When the display is open, push the side or

side of the switch to adjust the angle

of the display to raise or lower the position

where the information is displayed.

When the display is open, push the side or

side of the switch to adjust the bright-

ness of the display. The brightness can be

adjusted to 16 different levels.

A special coating is applied to the display and

mirror surface. Use a finely textured, soft

cloth, such as an eyeglass cleaning cloth.

NOTE

 When the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position or the operation mode is put

in OFF, the HUD will close automatically.

Adjusting the angle of the display

Adjusting the brightness of the

display

Handling the HUD

CAUTION

 Do not use cleaners or protectants that con-

tain silicone or wax. If these cleaners and

protectants are used on the display or mirror

surface, the coating could be scratched and

come off.

BK0277700US.book 190 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Features and controls 5-191

N00522501922

Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

The combinations of switch operations and

illuminated lights differ in accordance with

the following conditions.

[When the engine is started, and the parking

brake is released]

[When the engine is not running, or when the

engine is running but the parking brake is not

released]

The engine starts when the lights are off.

Combination headlights and

dimmer switch

Headlights

NOTE

 Do not leave the headlights and other lights

on for a long period of time when the engine

is not running. The battery will run down.

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been

washed, the inside of the lens sometimes

becomes foggy. This is the same as when

window glass mists up on a humid day, and

does not indicate a problem. When the light

is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.

However, if water collects inside the light,

have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

Type 1

OFF

The daytime running lights illumi-

nated

The daytime running lights illumi-

nated

Tail, front and rear side-marker lights,

license plate and instrument panel

lights on

Headlights and other lights on

NOTE

 Once the daytime running light come on,

they do not go out until the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or

the operation mode is changed to OFF or

ACC.

OFF All lights off

Parking, tail, front and rear side-

marker lights, license plate and

instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

BK0277700US.book 191 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

5-192 Features and controls

Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

The combinations of switch operations and

illuminated lights differ in accordance with

the following conditions.

[When the engine is started, and the parking

brake is released]

[When the engine is not running, or when the

engine is running but the parking brake is not

released]

The engine starts when the lights are off.

Type 2

OFF

The daytime running lights illumi-

nated

AUTO

The daytime running lights illumi-

nated (when it is light outside the

vehicle)

Headlights and other lights turn on

and off automatically in accor-

dance with outside light level.

The daytime running lights illumi-

nated

Tail, front and rear side-marker

lights, license plate and instrument

panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

NOTE

 Once the daytime running light come on,

they do not go out until the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or

the operation mode is changed to OFF or

ACC.

OFF All lights off

AUTO

Headlights and other lights turn on

and off automatically in accor-

dance with outside light level.

Parking, tail, front and rear side-

marker lights, license plate and

instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

NOTE

 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-

trol can be adjusted.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

As your vehicle is equipped with Smart-

phone Link Display Audio, screen operations

can be used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

 Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic

on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to

the windshield.

 If the lights do not turn on or off with the

switch in the “AUTO” position, manually

operate the switch. Have the system checked

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice.

BK0277700US.book 192 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Features and controls 5-193

N00532601652

 If the following operation is performed

with the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,

the lights automatically turn off.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

or “ACC” position or the key is removed

from the ignition switch and the driver’s

door is opened.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

The operation mode is changed to OFF or

ACC and the driver’s door is opened.

 If the following operation is performed

with the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,

the lights automatically turn off after

approximately 3 minutes.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

or “ACC” position or the key is removed

from the ignition switch and the driver’s

door is not opened.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

The operation mode is changed to OFF or

ACC and the driver’s door is not opened.

If the combination headlights and dimmer

switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-

tion again after the engine is turned off, the

approximately 3-minute auto-cutout function

described above will not work. The lights (the

parking lights, tail lights and license plate

lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-

matically.

N00584500044

This warning light will illuminate when there

is a malfunction in the LED headlights.

N00549801252

[When using a key to start the engine]

If the driver’s door is opened with the key in

the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed

Light auto-cutout function

(headlights and other lights)

NOTE

 The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-

vated.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details.

For vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, adjustments can be

made using screen operations. For further

details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.

When you want to keep the lights

on:

LED headlight warning light (if

so equipped)

NOTE

 If the warning light illuminates, there may be

a malfunction in the unit. Contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice to have the system

checked.

Headlight reminder buzzer

BK0277700US.book 193 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

5-194 Features and controls

from the ignition switch while the lights are

on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn

off the lights.

[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the

engine]

If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-

tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the

operation mode is changed to OFF while the

lights are on, the tone will sound to remind

you to turn off the lights.

In either case, the lights will turn off automat-

ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn

the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop

the tone.

N00549901178

To change the headlights from high beam to

low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal

lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low

beam as a courtesy whenever there are

oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic

moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue

light in the instrument cluster indicates when

the headlights are on high beam.

N00550001225

You can flash the high beams by pulling the

lever gently toward you (2). The lights will

go back to normal when you let go. While the

high beam is on, you will see a blue light on

the instrument panel.

N00591300060

The Automatic High Beam (AHB) turns the

high beam light on or off automatically

according to surrounding light conditions.

The sensor (A) detects lights, such as the

lights of an oncoming vehicle, a vehicle

ahead or street lights.

Dimmer (high/low beam

change)

Headlight flasher

NOTE

 You can flash the high beams by pulling the

lever toward you, even if the light switch is

off.

 If you turn the lights off with the head lights

set to high beam illumination, the headlights

are automatically returned to their low beam

setting.

Automatic High Beam (AHB) (if

so equipped)

WARNING

 Do not rely solely on the AHB. Always

observe surrounding traffic and light con-

ditions. If necessary, manually turn the

high beams on or off.

Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam

change)” on page 5-194.

BK0277700US.book 194 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Features and controls 5-195

N00593600100

1. Rotate the light switch to “ ” position

or “AUTO” position when the engine is

running.

2. Press the AHB switch.

The AHB is activated and the indicator is

illuminated.

If the AHB switch is pressed again, the

AHB will be deactivated and AHB indica-

tor will go off.

1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.

2. The AHB indicator will go off.

3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the

AHB will be activated.

1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.

2. The AHB indicator will go off and the

high beam indicator illuminates.

3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the

AHB will be activated.

N00593700055

The high beam headlights illuminate when all

of the following conditions are met:

 Your vehicle speed exceeds approxi-

mately 33 mph (53 km/h).

 It is dark ahead of your vehicle.

 There are no vehicles in front or oncom-

ing vehicles, or none of their exterior

lights are illuminating.

The low beam headlights illuminate when

any of the following conditions occur:

 Your vehicle speed does not exceed

approximately 28 mph (45 km/h).

 It is bright ahead of your vehicle.

 An exterior light of a vehicle in front or

oncoming vehicle is illuminating.

How to use the AHB

NOTE

 If the headlights are on when the light switch

is in the “AUTO” position, the AHB works.

 You can switch the headlight beams

(high/low) manually by operating the lever

even if the AHB is working.

Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam change)”

on page 5-194.

If the lever is operated manually, the AHB

indicator will go off and the AHB will be

deactivated.

Refer to “Manual switching” on page 5-195.

 The AHB is not deactivated when you pull

the lever slightly (operation of the headlight

flasher).

 Manual switching

Switching to low beam

Switching to high beam

Automatic switching conditions

BK0277700US.book 195 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

5-196 Features and controls

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporar-

ily lowering in the following ways.

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and the

ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is put in

OFF.

NOTE

 The headlights may not be switched from

high beam to low beam under the following

circumstances.

• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is

hindered by any object such as continuous

bends, elevated median/island, traffic signs,

roadside trees.

• Your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle

suddenly on a bend with poor visibility.

• Another vehicle crosses ahead of your vehi-

cle.

 The headlights may remain at low beam (or

be switched from high beam to low beam)

when a reflective object (e.g. street light,

traffic signal, noticeboard and signboard)

reflects light.

 Any of the following factors may influence

the headlight beam switching timing:

• How brightly the exterior lights of a vehicle

in front or oncoming vehicle illuminate.

• Movement or direction of a vehicle in front

or oncoming vehicle.

• Only right or left exterior light of a vehicle

in front or oncoming vehicle is illuminat-

ing.

• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is a

motorcycle.

• Road conditions (gradient, bends and road

surface).

• The number of occupants and luggage load.

 The AHB recognizes environmental condi-

tions by sensing a light source ahead of your

vehicle. Therefore, you may feel like some-

thing is not quite right when the headlight

beams are switched automatically.

 The system may not detect a light vehicle

such as a bicycle.

 The system may not detect an ambient

brightness precisely. This causes the traffic

to be dazzled by high beam or the low beam

to be maintained. In such cases, you should

switch the headlight beams manually.

• In bad weather (heavy rain, fog, snow or

sandstorm).

• The windshield is dirty or fogged up.

• The windshield is cracked or broken.

• The sensor is deformed or dirty.

• A light, which is similar to the headlights or

tail lights, is shining around your vehicle.

• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is

driven without lights, the exterior lights are

dirty or discolored, or the direction of the

headlight beams is adjusted improperly.

• It becomes dark and bright suddenly and

continuously around your vehicle.

• Your vehicle is driven on uneven surfaces.

• Your vehicle is driven on a winding road.

• A reflective object such as a noticeboard or

a mirror reflects a light ahead of your vehi-

cle.

NOTE

• When lights of the vehicle in front or head-

lights of an oncoming vehicle blend into the

other lights.

• The rear end of a vehicle in front (such as a

container truck) reflect a strong light.

• Your vehicle's headlight is broken or dirty.

• Your vehicle is inclined due to a flat tire or

towing.

• The warning display appears.

(Refer to “System problem warning” on

page 5-197.)

 Observe the precautions below to maintain

good usage conditions:

• Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor.

• Do not affix a sticker or label on the wind-

shield near the sensor.

• Avoid overload.

• Do not modify your vehicle.

• When the windshield is replaced, use the

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.

To adjust the sensitivity of the sensor

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 196 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Features and controls 5-197

2. Press the AHB switch more than 15 times

within 5 seconds after operation mode is

turned on.

N00593800056

If a problem occurs with the system, the fol-

lowing warning display will appear to the

type of the problem.

If a failure is detected in the system, the fol-

lowing warning display will appear and the

AHB will automatically be turned off.

If the warning display remains even after the

ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-

tion or the operation mode is put in OFF and

then turned back to ON, please contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

[When the AHB is malfunctioning]

[When the sensor is malfunctioning]

If the system becomes temporarily unavail-

able due to the high or low temperature of the

sensor, the following warning display will

appear.

After the temperature of the sensor has been

in range, the system will automatically return

to operation.

If the warning display does not disappear

after waiting for a while, there is a possibility

that the AHB has a malfunction. Contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for

inspection of the system.

System problem warning

 The AHB deactivation due to fault

NOTE

 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes

extremely high temperature when parking

the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “AHB

SERVICE REQUIRED” warning display

may appear.

If the message remains even after the tem-

perature of the sensor or its surrounding area

has been in range, please contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 Sensor is too hot or cold

BK0277700US.book 197 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

5-198 Features and controls

If the AHB determines that its performance

has been degraded, the warning display will

appear.

This can occur when:

 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,

adhere to the windshield of the sensor

portion.

 In adverse weather conditions, such as

rain, snow, sandstorms, etc.

 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is

splashing water, snow or dirt.

When the sensor performance returns, the

AHB will resume operation.

If the warning display does not disappear

after waiting for a while, there is a possibility

that the sensor has a malfunction. Contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for

inspection of the sensor.

N00563201263

This function turns on the front side-marker

and parking lights for approximately 30 sec-

onds after the UNLOCK button on the key is

pressed when the combination headlights and

dimmer switch is in the “OFF” or “AUTO”

position (vehicles equipped with the auto-

matic light control). The welcome light func-

tion will operate only when it is dark outside

the vehicle.

N00547301194

This function turns on the headlights in the

low beam setting for approximately 30 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position or the operation mode is put

in OFF.

1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”

position (vehicles equipped with the auto-

matic light control).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in

OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the

engine, remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position or putting

the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn

signal lever toward you.

 Windshield is dirty

Welcome light

NOTE

 While the welcome light function is operat-

ing, perform one of the following operations

to cancel the function.

• Press the LOCK button on the key.

• Turn the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.

• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion or put the operation mode in ON.

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

• The headlights can be set to come on in the

low beam setting.

• The welcome light function can be deacti-

vated.

For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link

Display Audio, screen operations can be

used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

Coming home light

BK0277700US.book 198 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-199

4. The headlights will come on in the low

beam setting for approximately 30 sec-

onds. After the headlights go off, the

headlights can be turned on again in the

low beam setting for approximately

30 seconds by pulling the turn signal lever

toward you within 60 seconds of turning

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position

or putting the operation mode in OFF. To

turn on the headlights again after 60 sec-

onds of turning the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position or putting the operation

mode in OFF, repeat the process from step

N00537101131

The direction of the headlight beam (the

direction in which the light shines) alters

according to the number of people and the

load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle

if it is too high due to the number of people

and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-

lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of

approaching vehicles. First set the light

switch to the “ ” position, then turn the

headlight leveling switch knob to lower the

beam. The greater the number on the head-

light leveling switch knob, the lower the

beam will point.

Set the switch to the appropriate position so

that the headlight beam is level with the road.

N00522601604

When changing lanes, or to making a gradual

turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-

NOTE

 While the coming home light function is

operating, perform one of the following

operations to cancel the function.

• Pull the turn signal lever toward you.

• Turn the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position

or put the operation mode in ON.

• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion or put the operation mode in ON.

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

• The time that the headlights remain on can

be changed.

• The coming home light function can be

deactivated.

For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link

Display Audio, screen operations can be

used to make the adjustment.

Refer to separate owner’s manual for details.

Headlight leveling switch (if

so equipped)

NOTE

WARNING

 To avoid distraction while driving, always

perform headlight adjustments before

vehicle operation.

NOTE

 Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”

position (when the beam is at its highest).

 Keep the knob in the “0” position except

when using the knob to lower the headlight

beam angle.

 Always return the knob to the “0” position

when the load is removed and the people

have left the vehicle.

Turn signal lever

BK0277700US.book 199 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Hazard warning flasher switch

5-200 Features and controls

tion (1). It will return to the neutral position

when you let go. Use the full position (2)

when making a normal turn. The lever will

return to the neutral position when the turn is

complete. There may be times when the lever

does not return to the neutral position. This

usually happens when the steering wheel is

turned only slightly. You can easily return the

lever by hand.

Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly

then release it, the turn signal lights and the

indicator light in the instrument cluster will

flash three times.

N00522701344

If you press the flasher switch, the front and

rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and

so will the hazard warning lights. This is an

emergency warning system and should not be

used when the vehicle is in motion, except for

emergencies.

If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers

will keep working after the ignition switch is

removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.

NOTE

 A light in the instrument panel flashes to

show when the front and rear turn signal

lights are working properly.

If this light flashes faster than usual, check

for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-

functioning connection in the signal.

If the panel light does not come on when the

lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a

burned out bulb in the panel.

Have the system inspected by your autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash

function for lane changes.

• Adjust the time required to operate the

lever for the 3-flash function.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details.

For vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, adjustments can be

made using screen operations. For further

details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.

 It is possible to change the tone of a sound-

ing buzzer as the turn signal lights flash.

Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound” on

page 5-161.

Hazard warning flasher

switch

NOTE

 If the flashers are used for several hours, the

battery will run down. This could make it

difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.

BK0277700US.book 200 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

ECO mode switch

Features and controls 5-201

N00579300099

ECO mode is an eco-driving support system

which automatically controls the engine and

air conditioning system to improve fuel effi-

ciency.

The ECO mode starts working by pressing

the ECO mode switch when the ignition

switch or operation mode is in ON.

Push the switch again and the ECO mode will

cancel.

While the ECO mode is working, an ECO

mode indicator will be turned on.

N00522801488

The front fog lights illuminate only when the

headlights are on low beam.

Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”

position turns on the front fog lights as well

as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To

turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of

the “OFF” position.

The knob will return to the neutral position

when it is released.

N00523001780

ECO mode switch

NOTE

 Since the air conditioning operation is con-

trolled while the ECO mode is operating,

you may feel that effectiveness of the air

conditioning is weak.

 Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can

select normal operation of the air condition-

ing.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Front fog light switch

NOTE

 If the headlights are switched to high beam,

the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-

minate again when the headlights are

switched back to low beam.

 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or

“ ” position while the front fog lights are

illuminated, they will automatically turn off.

They can be turned back on again by rotating

the combination headlights and dimmer

switch back to “ ” position, and turning

the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-

tion.

 Do not use fog lights except in conditions of

fog, otherwise excessive light glare may

temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

Wiper and washer switch

CAUTION

 If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed against the glass may

freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm

the glass with the defroster before using the

washer.

BK0277700US.book 201 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Wiper and washer switch

5-202 Features and controls

The windshield wiper and washer can be

operated with the ignition switch or the oper-

ation mode is in ON or ACC.

If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do

not operate the wipers until the ice has melted

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper

motor may be damaged.

With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive

intermittent operation) position, the intermit-

tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the

knob (A).

Windshield wipers

NOTE

 To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear

window wiper will automatically perform

several continuous operations if the selector

lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE) position

while the windshield wipers are operating.

Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”

on page 5-206.

Except for vehicle with rain sensor

MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.

OFF- Off

INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)

LO- Slow

HI- Fast

To adjust intermittent intervals

1- Fast

2- Slow

NOTE

 The speed-sensitive-operation function of

the windshield wipers can be deactivated.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice. On vehicles

equipped with Smartphone Link Display

Audio, screen operations can be used to

make the adjustment.

Refer to separate owner’s manual for details.

BK0277700US.book 202 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Wiper and washer switch

Features and controls 5-203

The misting function can be used when the

ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON or ACC.

The wipers will operate once if the wiper

lever is raised to the “MIST” position and

released. This operation is useful when it is

drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to

operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”

position.

The windshield wipers can be operated with

the ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON or ACC.

If the blades are frozen to the windshield or

rear window, do not operate the wipers until

the ice has melted and the blades are freed,

otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

Can only be used when the ignition switch or

the operation mode is in ON.

If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the

rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain

(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the

wipers will operate automatically.

Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the

windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.

Wiper operation under these conditions can

scratch the windshield and damage the wip-

ers.

Misting function

Vehicle with rain sensor

MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.

OFF- Off

AUTO- Auto-wiper control

Rain sensor

The wipers will automatically

operate depending on the degree of

wetness on the windshield.

LO- Slow

HI- Fast

Rain sensor

CAUTION

 With the ignition switch or the operation

mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO”

position, the wipers may automatically oper-

ate in the situations described below.

BK0277700US.book 203 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Wiper and washer switch

5-204 Features and controls

If your hands get trapped, you could suffer

injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be

sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in OFF, or

move the lever to the “OFF” position to deac-

tivate the rain sensor.

With the lever in the “AUTO” position, it is

possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain

sensor by turning the knob (B).

• When cleaning the outside surface of the

windshield, if you touch the rain sensor.

• When cleaning the outside surface of the

windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain

sensor.

• When using an automatic car wash.

• A physical shock is applied to the wind-

screen or the rain sensor.

NOTE

 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this

operation of the wipers does not take place

even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi-

tion when the vehicle is stationary and the

ambient temperature is approximately 32 °F

(0 °C) or lower.

 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker

or label to the windshield. Also, do not put

any water-repellent coating on the wind-

shield. The rain sensor would not be able to

detect the extent of rain, and the wipers

might stop working normally.

CAUTION

 In the following cases, the rain sensor may

be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked

at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice.

• When the wipers operate at a constant inter-

val despite changes in the extent of rain.

• When the wipers do not operate even

though it is raining.

 The wipers may automatically operate when

things such as insects or foreign objects are

affixed to the windshield on top of the rain

sensor or when the windshield is frozen.

Objects affixed to the windshield will stop

the wipers when the wipers cannot remove

them. To operate the wipers again, move the

lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.

Also, the wipers may operate automatically

due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-

netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the

lever to the “OFF” position.

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when replacing the windshield glass.

NOTE

To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor

“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain

“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain

NOTE

 Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)

can be changed to intermittent operation,

either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle

speed sensitive.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link

Display Audio, screen operations can be

used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

BK0277700US.book 204 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Wiper and washer switch

Features and controls 5-205

Move the lever in the direction of the arrow

and release, to operate the wipers once.

Use this function when you are driving in

mist or drizzle.

The wipers will operate once if the lever is

raised to the “MIST” position and released

when the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-

tinue to operate while the lever is held in the

“MIST” position.

The wipers will operate once if the lever is

moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob

ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON.

N00504601413

The windshield washer can be operated with

the ignition switch or the operation mode in

ON or ACC.

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

windshield by pulling the lever toward you.

When the wipers are not in operation or in

intermittent operation, by pulling the lever

toward you, the wipers will operate several

times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.

Misting function

Windshield washer

NOTE

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

• Intelligent washer can be deactivated.

Refer to “Intelligent washer” on page

5-206.

• The wipers can be set to operate again after

approximately 6 seconds.

These functions are not activated when the

vehicle is shipped from the factory.

To activate or deactivate these functions,

please contact your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link

Display Audio, screen operations can be

used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

BK0277700US.book 205 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Wiper and washer switch

5-206 Features and controls

By releasing the lever soon after pulling it

toward you, the washer fluid will be sprayed

several times while the wipers are operating

several times.

Intelligent washer will stop operating with

any operation of the lever.

N00523201476

The rear window wiper and washer can be

operated when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is in ON or ACC.

Turn the knob to operate the rear window

wiper.

N00523501277

Intelligent washer

Rear window wiper and washer

OFF- Off

INT- The wiper operates continuously for

several seconds then operates inter-

mittently at intervals of approxi-

mately 8 seconds.

Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

rear window glass while the knob is

turned fully in either direction.

When the washer fluid is sprayed, the

wiper will automatically operate two

or three times.

NOTE

 The rear window wiper will automatically

perform several continuous operations if the

selector lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE)

position while the windshield wipers or the

rear window wiper is operating. (automatic

operation mode)

After the automatic operation, the rear win-

dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is

in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the

“INT” position, the rear window wiper will

return to the intermittent operation.

It is possible to set the rear window wiper to

perform the automatic operation only if the

selector lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE)

position while the rear window wiper is

operating with the knob in the “INT” posi-

tion.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details.

 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the

knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to

operate the rear window wiper continuously.

(continuous operation mode)

Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop

the rear window wiper continuous operation.

 The wiper intermittent operation time can be

adjusted.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details.

For vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, adjustments can be

made using screen operations. For further

details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.

 The washer fluid reservoir is located in the

engine compartment.

Check the fluid level regularly and refill if

necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page

9-9.)

Precautions to observe when

using wipers and washers

CAUTION

 If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might

freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass

with the defroster before using the washer.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 206 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Electric rear window defogger switch

Features and controls 5-207

N00523701556

The rear window defogger can be used when

the engine is running.

The indicator light (A) will come on when

you press the electric rear window defogger

switch. Electric current will flow through the

heating wires on the rear window to help

clear away moisture or frost.

After approximately 15 to 20 minutes of

operation, the system will shut off automati-

cally.

To switch the defogger OFF before 15 to

20 minutes have passed, press the switch

again. The indicator light will go out and the

defogger will turn off.

If you need the defogger for more than 15 to

20 minutes, press the switch again. This will

add 15 to 20 more minutes.

NOTE

 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is

dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the

wiper blades prematurely.

 Before using the wipers in cold weather,

check to be sure that the wiper blades are not

frozen to the windshield or rear window.

Using the wipers while the blades are frozen

could cause the wiper motor to burn out.

 If the moving wipers become blocked part-

way through a sweep by ice or other deposits

on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop

operating to prevent the motor from over-

heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position or put the operation mode in

OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos-

its.

Because the wipers will start operating again

after the wiper motor cools down, check that

the wipers operate before using them.

 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-

onds at a time. Do not operate the washer

when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or

the pump may fail.

 During cold weather, add a recommended

washer solution that will not freeze in the

washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer

may not work or may be damaged.

 Replace the wiper blades when they are

worn. Use the proper size replacement

blades. For further information, please con-

tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

Electric rear window defog-

ger switch

CAUTION

 The rear window defogger is not designed to

melt snow. Remove any snow manually

before using the rear window defogger.

 Use the rear window defogger only after the

engine has started and is running. Be sure to

turn the defogger switch off immediately

after the window is clear to save on battery

power.

 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items

that are attached with adhesive over the grid

wires on the rear window.

 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a

soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid

wires.

NOTE

 The mist can also be removed from the out-

side rearview mirrors when the rear window

defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to

“Heated outside rearview mirror” on page

5-59.)

BK0277700US.book 207 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)

5-208 Features and controls

N00589100045

The heated steering wheel contains internal

heaters in the rim. Heating areas are shown in

the illustration.

: Heating area

The heated steering wheel can be operated

when the ignition switch or operation mode is

in ON.

To turn on the heated steering wheel, push the

heated steering wheel switch. The heated

steering wheel will operate for approximately

30 minutes and then it will automatically turn

off.

The indicator light (A) will illuminate while

the heated steering wheel is operating.

 It is possible to change the setting to make

the rear window defogger operate automati-

cally when ambient temperature becomes

low while the engine is running, even if you

do not push the rear window defogger

switch.

It operates automatically only once after

turning the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion or putting the operation mode in ON.

If you choose this setting, the heated outside

rearview mirror will also operate automati-

cally at the same time.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to make the adjustment.

Refer to the separate owner’s manual for

details.

NOTE

Heated steering wheel

switch

(if so equipped)

WARNING

 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-

ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-

ness, injury, medication, fatigue or other

physical conditions or who have sensitive

skin may suffer burns when using the

heated steering wheel. To reduce the risk

of burns, people with such conditions must

use care when using the heated steering

wheel.

CAUTION

 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the

steering wheel, allow it to dry thoroughly

before attempting to use the heated steering

wheel. Turn the heated steering wheel off

immediately if it appears to be malfunction-

ing during use.

 Also be aware that using the heated steering

wheel with the engine off may run the bat-

tery down.

BK0277700US.book 208 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Horn switch

Features and controls 5-209

N00523801195

To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark

on the steering wheel.

N00566701269

You can connect your USB memory device or

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB

memory device or iPod.

*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple

Inc. in the United States and other countries.

The USB input terminal (A) is located in the

indicated position.

This section explains how to connect and

remove a USB memory device or iPod.

N00566801244

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position

or put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Connect a commercially available USB

connector cable (B) to the USB memory

device (A).

3. Connect the USB connector cable to the

USB input terminal.

Horn switch USB input terminal

Type 1

Type 2

How to connect a USB memory

device

NOTE

 Do not connect the USB memory device to

the USB input terminal directly.

The USB memory device may be damaged.

BK0277700US.book 209 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Sun visors

5-210 Features and controls

4. To remove the USB connector cable, turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position

or put the operation mode in OFF first and

perform the installation steps in reverse.

N00566901274

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position

or put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.

3. Connect the connector cable to the USB

input terminal.

4. To remove the connector cable, turn the

ignition switch to the “OFF” position or

put the operation mode in OFF first and

perform the installation steps in reverse.

N00567001126

For details, please refer to the separated

owner’s manual for “Smartphone Link Dis-

play Audio” or the “DISPLAY AUDIO”.

N00524601419

Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce

front glare while driving. To reduce side

glare, turn the visor to the side (2).

How to connect an iPod

NOTE

 Use a genuine connector cable from Apple

Inc.

Types of connectable devices

and supported file specifica-

tions

Sun visors

NOTE

 Pull the sun visor sideways to eliminate side

glare farther to the rear. (if so equipped)

BK0277700US.book 210 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

12 V power outlets

Features and controls 5-211

A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun

visor.

Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will

automatically turn on the mirror light (A).

A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun

visor.

The holder (B) is located on the back of the

sun visor.

N00525001771

To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the

cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug

in the power outlet.

Vanity mirror

Type 1

CAUTION

 If the lid of the vanity mirror with light is

kept open for prolonged periods of time, the

vehicle’s battery will be discharged.

Type 2

Ticket holder

CAUTION

 Do not leave plastic cards in the ticket

holder. Because the inside of the vehicle will

become hot if the vehicle is parked in strong

sunlight, the cards could deform or crack.

12 V power outlets

CAUTION

 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory

operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.

When using more than one socket at the

same time, make sure the total power con-

sumption of the electrical accessories does

not exceed 120 W at 12 V.

 Also be aware that using electronic equip-

ment with the engine off may run the battery

down.

 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure

to close the power outlet cover or replace the

cap. This will prevent the power outlet from

becoming clogged and short circuiting.

NOTE

 Two 12V power outlets can be used simulta-

neously.

BK0277700US.book 211 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)

5-212 Features and controls

Accessories can be operated when the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or

ACC.

Accessories can be operated in all ignition

switch positions or all operation modes.

N00554301066

HomeLink

Wireless Control System is a

registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

HomeLink

provides a convenient way to

replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency

(RF) transmitters used to activate devices

such as gate operators, garage door openers,

entry door locks, security systems, even home

lighting. Additional HomeLink

information

can be found at www.homelink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by

calling the toll-free HomeLink

-Hotline at 1-

800-355-3515.

Type 1

Center console

Type 2

HomeLink

Wireless Con-

trol System

(if so equipped)

Floor console

WARNING

 Do not use HomeLink

with any garage

door opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by U.S. Fed-

eral Regulations. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object in the path

of a closing garage door and then auto-

matically stop and reverse, does not meet

current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a

garage door opener without these features

increases the risk of serious injury or

death.

 During programming, your garage door

or gate may open or close. Make sure that

people and objects are clear of the garage

door or gate that you are programming.

NOTE

 Once HomeLink

is programmed, retain the

original transmitter for future programming

procedures (for example, new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro-

grammed HomeLink

buttons should be

erased for security purposes. Refer to “Clear-

ing the programmed information” on page

5-216.

BK0277700US.book 212 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-213

N00584600029

 Some garage door openers manufactured

after 1995 have “rolling code protection”.

To program a garage door opener

equipped with “rolling code protection”;

you will need to access the garage door

opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn”

or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use

a ladder and another person to assist you.

 It is recommended that a new battery be

placed in the hand-held transmitter of the

device being programmed to HomeLink

for quicker training and accurate trans-

mission of the radio-frequency signal.

N00584700046

To program HomeLink

to operate a garage

door, gate, entry door opener, home or office

lighting, you need to be at the same location

as the device.

1. Press the HomeLink

button that you

would like to program. The indicator light

(A) will flash orange slowly.

2. Position the end of your hand-held trans-

mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away

from the HomeLink

button while keep-

ing the indicator light in view.

 You can program a maximum of 3 devices.

To change or replace any of the 3 devices

after it has been initially programmed, you

must first erase the current settings.

See “Clearing the programmed information”

on page 5-216 or “Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button” on page 5-217.

HomeLink

button 1

HomeLink

button 2

HomeLink

button 3

NOTE

Before programming Home-

Link

Programming a new Home-

Link

NOTE

 You do not need to continue holding the

HomeLink

button.

 If the indicator light does not flash, refer to

“Clearing the programmed information” on

page 5-216.

BK0277700US.book 213 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)

5-214 Features and controls

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

button while watching the indicator light

(A). Continue pressing the button until the

indicator light (A) changes from slowly

flashing orange to either rapidly flashing

green (rolling code) or continuously lit

green (fixed code). Now you may release

the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Press the HomeLink

button that was just

programmed and observe the indicator

light.

• If the indicator light continuously illumi-

nates green, programming is complete

and your device should operate when the

HomeLink

button is pressed and

released.

• If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds

and release the programmed HomeLink

button. Repeat the “press/hold/release”

sequence a second time, and, depending

on the brand of the garage door opener

(or other rolling code equipped device),

repeat this sequence a third time to com-

plete the programming process. At this

point if your device operates, program-

ming is complete.

• If the device does not operate, continue

with “Programming a new HomeLink

”

steps 5 to 7 to complete the program-

ming of a rolling code equipped device.

5. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the

“Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usu-

ally be found where the hanging antenna

wire is attached to the motor-head unit

(see the garage door opener manual to

identify the “Learn” button.)

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or

“Smart” button. (The name and color of

the button may vary by manufacturer.)

There are typically 30 seconds to initiate

step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink

button. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence a second

time, and, depending on the brand of the

garage door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence a

third time to complete the programming

process.

HomeLink

should now activate your

rolling code equipped device.

NOTE

 Some hand-held transmitters may actually

train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches

(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have

difficulty with the programming process.

NOTE

 Some devices may require you to replace this

“Programming a new HomeLink

” step 3

with procedures noted in the “Gate operator /

Canadian programming” section. If the indi-

cator light does not change to rapidly flash-

ing green or continuously lit green after

performing these steps, contact HomeLink

at www.homelink.com.

BK0277700US.book 214 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-215

N00584800021

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-

mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after

several seconds of transmission - which may

not be long enough for HomeLink

to pick

up the signal during programming. Similar to

this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators

are designed to “time-out” in the same man-

ner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit-

ter will go off when the device times out indi-

cating that it has finished transmitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the “Program-

ming” procedures, replace “Programming a

new HomeLink

” step 3 with the following:

3. Press and release - every 2 seconds

(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the

HomeLink

indicator light changes from

slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-

ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit

green (fixed code). Now you may release the

hand-held transmitter button.

Proceed with “Programming a new Home-

Link

” step 4 to complete.

N00584900022

The HomeLink

has the capability of receiv-

ing garage door status from compatible

garage door opener systems. Check your

garage door opener manual for the available

feature and HomeLink

compatibility. Also

for a listing of compatible systems contact

HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com

1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-

gramming the garage door opener (refer

to “Programming a new HomeLink

”

section), both garage door operation indi-

cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat-

ing that the garage door feedback has

been enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, perform

steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home-

Link

button up to the first 10 times after

successful programming.

2. Press and release the programmed Home-

Link

button to activate the door. You

now have 1 minute in which to complete

step 3.

NOTE

 In the event that there are still programming

difficulties or questions, additional Home-

Link

information and programming videos

can be found online at www.homelink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by

calling the HomeLink

Hotline.

Gate operator/Canadian pro-

gramming

NOTE

 If programming a garage door opener or gate

operator, it is advised to unplug the device

during the “cycling” process to prevent pos-

sible overheating.

Additional steps for program-

ming a door system with feed-

back

BK0277700US.book 215 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)

5-216 Features and controls

3. Once the door has stopped, press and

release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on

the garage door opener (refer to your

garage door opener owner’s manual for

the location of the “Learn” button). Both

the HomeLink

garage door operation

indicators will flash rapidly green upon

successful synchronization with the door

opener (within 5 seconds).

N00585000020

To operate, simply press and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink

button. Activation will

now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage

door opener, gate operator, security system,

entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of

the device may also be used at any time.

N00585200022

The HomeLink

has the capability of receiv-

ing garage door status from compatible

garage door opener systems. Refer to “Addi-

tional steps for programming a door system

with feedback” on page 5-215.

Garage door status is then displayed with

indicators (A).

The indicators will illuminate/blink in

response to the following conditions:

: Blinking : Illuminates

The HomeLink

has the capability of listen-

ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2

feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range

may be reduced by obstacles such as houses

or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle

speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED

message feedback from the garage door

opener. If the unit is out of range before

receiving either the UP or DOWN message

from the door opener, both the UP and

DOWN indicators will flash red followed by

a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-

tion the door was last moving.

Recall of the door state after initial feedback

is possible by simultaneously pressing either

HomeLink

buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and

3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message

will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow-

ing the garage door status indication of the

figure above.

N00585300049

To erase programming from the 3 buttons

(individual buttons cannot be erased but can

be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), fol-

low the steps noted:

Operating HomeLink

Garage door feedback

Garage door opener closing

(orange)

Garage door opener closed

(green)

Out of range

(red)

Garage door opener opening

(orange)

Garage door opener opened

(green)

Out of range

(red)

Clearing the programmed

information

BK0277700US.book 216 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-217

1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-

cator will change from continuous yellow

to rapidly flashing green.

2. Release both buttons.

3. HomeLink

is now in the training (or

learning) mode and can be programmed at

any time beginning with “Programming a

new HomeLink

” step 1.

N00585400024

To reprogram a HomeLink

button, complete

the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-

Link

button can be released at this point.

Proceed with “Programming a new

HomeLink

” step 2.

N00585600042

Your HomeLink

system operates on a radio

frequency subject to Federal Communica-

tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles

sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules

(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device

complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Oper-

ation is subject to the following two condi-

tions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

that may be received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. End Users must follow the spe-

cific operating instructions for satisfying RF

exposure compliance. This transmitter must

be at least 8 inches (20 cm) from the user and

must not be co-located or operating in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmit-

ter.

The term “IC:” before the certification/regis-

tration number only signifies that Industry

Canada technical specifications were met.

NOTE

 Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button

NOTE

 If you do not complete the programming of a

new device to the button, it will revert to the

previously stored programming.

For questions or comments, visit

www.homelink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by

calling the HomeLink

Hotline.

General information

CAUTION

 The transmitter has been tested and complies

with FCC and IC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the device.

BK0277700US.book 217 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Interior lights

5-218 Features and controls

N00525301745

N00525401586

Interior lights

NOTE

 Be aware that leaving the light illuminated

with the engine off may run the battery

down.

Never leave the vehicle without checking

that the light is off.

1- Cargo room light  P.5-220

2- Dome light (rear)  P.5-219

3- Dome light (front)/Reading lights

 P.5-218

4- LED interior illumination (Smartphone

tray)  P.5-220

5- LED interior illumination (Front drink

holder)  P.5-220

Dome light (front)/Reading

lights

Dome light (front)

The dome light illuminates regardless of

any door or the liftgate being opened or

closed.

When any of the doors or the liftgate is

opened, the dome light illuminates; when

any of them are closed, the dome light

goes off after approximately 30 seconds.

However, the light goes off immediately

if:

 The doors and the liftgate are closed

while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position or the operation mode

is in ON.

 The driver’s door is closed while the

lock knob is in the lock position, after

all the other doors are closed.

 The doors and the liftgate are closed

and the power door lock function is

used to lock the doors.

 The key button is used to lock the

doors.

 In vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-

gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-

key.

NOTE

 When the engine is started using the key

while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you

remove the key, the dome light will illumi-

nate for approximately 30 seconds then go

off.

 When the engine is started using the

F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are

closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,

the dome light will illuminate for approxi-

mately 30 seconds and then go off.

BK0277700US.book 218 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Interior lights

Features and controls 5-219

The dome light stays off regardless of any

door or the liftgate being opened or closed.

N00537601194

When the light switch is in the off position,

push the switch (A) to turn on the light. Push

the switch again to turn off the light.

N00525801359

 The time until the light goes off can be

adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer for details. For vehicles

equipped with the Smartphone Link Display

Audio, adjustments can be made using

screen operations. For details, refer to the

separate owner’s manual.

Reading lights

NOTE

Front

Dome light (rear)

The dome light illuminates regardless of

any door or the liftgate being opened or

closed.

2- 

When any of the doors or the liftgate is

opened, the dome light illuminates;

when any of them are closed, the dome

light goes off after approximately 30 sec-

onds. However, the light goes off imme-

diately if:

 The door and the liftgate are closed

while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position or the operation mode

is in ON.

 The driver’s door is closed while the

lock knob is in the lock position,

after all the other doors are closed.

Rear

 The door and the liftgate are closed

and the power door lock function is

used to lock the doors.

 The keyless entry system key is used

to lock the doors.

 In vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-

gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-

key.

NOTE

 When the engine is started using the key

while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you

remove the key, the dome light will illumi-

nate for approximately 30 seconds then go

off.

 When the engine is started using the

F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are

closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,

the dome light will illuminate for approxi-

mately 30 seconds and then go off.

 When the dome light switch is in the “ON”

position, the light will not go off, even when

all the doors and the liftgate are closed.

 The time until the light goes off can be

adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer for details. For vehicles

equipped with the Smartphone Link Display

Audio, adjustments can be made using

screen operations. For details, refer to the

separate owner’s manual.

BK0277700US.book 219 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Interior lights

5-220 Features and controls

The dome light stays off regardless of any

door or the liftgate being opened or closed.

N00526101199

When the liftgate is opened, the cargo room

light illuminates; when it is closed, it goes

out.

N00596900029

When the light is illuminated with the light

switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO” posi-

tion (vehicles with automatic light control),

the LED interior illumination (Front drink

holder) illuminates.

N00595400030

When the light is illuminated with the light

switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO” posi-

tion (vehicles with automatic light control),

the LED interior illumination (Smartphone

tray) illuminates.

N00526301537

*: Dome light (front)/Reading lights, dome

light (rear) and cargo room light.

 If interior lights are left on with the igni-

tion switch in the “OFF” position or the

operation mode in OFF, the lights go off

automatically after approximately 30 min-

utes.

 The lights come on again if the ignition

switch or the engine switch is operated, if

any door or liftgate is opened or closed, or

if the keyless entry or F.A.S.T.-key is

operated.

Cargo room light

LED interior illumination

(Front drink holder)

LED interior illumination

(Smartphone tray)

Interior light* auto-cutout

function

NOTE

 The interior light auto-cutout function can be

deactivated. The time until the lights auto-

matically go off can be adjusted. See your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for

details.

For vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, adjustments can be

made using screen operations. For details,

refer to the separate owner’s manual.

BK0277700US.book 220 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Storage spaces

Features and controls 5-221

N00526401600

N00551501344

To open, pull the lever (A).

There is a card holder on the inside of the

glove compartment.

Storage spaces

CAUTION

 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,

or spectacles in the cabin when parking the

vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will

become extremely hot, so lighters and other

flammable items may catch fire and

unopened drink cans (especially carbonated

beverages, including beer) may rupture. The

heat may also deform or crack plastic specta-

cle lenses and other spectacle parts that are

made of plastic.

 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while

driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a

storage space could otherwise cause injuries

during a sudden stop.

NOTE

 Do not leave valuables in any storage space

when leaving the vehicle.

1- Floor console box

2- Glove compartment

Glove compartment

WARNING

 An open glove compartment door can

cause a serious injury or death to the front

passenger in an accident, even if the pas-

senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always

keep the glove compartment door closed

when driving.

Card holder

BK0277700US.book 221 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Drink holders

5-222 Features and controls

N00551601303

To open the console box, lift the release lever

(A) and raise the lid.

The floor console box can also be used as an

arm rest.

N00527301563

The drink holder is designed for holding cups

or drink-cans securely in its holes.

The drink holder is located in front of the

floor console.

Floor console box

Drink holders

WARNING

 Do not spray water or spill beverages

inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or

electrical components become wet, they

could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.

If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe

up as much liquid as possible and immedi-

ately consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

For the front seat

BK0277700US.book 222 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Bottle holders

Features and controls 5-223

N00537001231

This drink holder is located in the rear seat

arm rest.

Pull the arm rest down to use the drink holder.

N00527301534

There are bottle holders located on both sides

of front and rear doors.

N00528301195

1. Pull out the spring-loaded cover and insert

it in the mounting grooves (A) on both

sides.

For the rear seat (if so equipped)

Bottle holders

WARNING

 Do not spray water or spill beverages

inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or

electrical components become wet, they

could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.

If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe

up as much liquid as possible and immedi-

ately consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

CAUTION

 Drinking beverages while driving your vehi-

cle is distracting and can cause an accident.

 Vibration and shaking while driving may

cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as

spilling hot beverages could cause burns.

NOTE

 Do not store a cup or drink can in the bottle

holder.

 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when

storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,

etc.

 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-

ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-

tles, etc.

Cargo area cover (if so

equipped)

To use

BK0277700US.book 223 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

5-224 Features and controls

2. Remove the cover from the mounting

grooves, and the cover will be rolled back

into the retracted position.

There are 2 installation holes (B) for the

cargo area cover.

1. Move one of the sliders (C) towards the

inside of the vehicle, and fit the protrud-

ing portion (D) into the installation hole

that is to be used. Move the opposite

slider in the same fashion.

2. After changing the position, gently shake

the entire cargo area cover to make sure it

is securely retained.

NOTE

 Do not place anything on the cargo area

cover.

To change position

NOTE

 If the rear seat touches the cargo area cover,

move the cargo area cover rearward.

The cargo area cover could be damaged if it

supports the seatback of the rear seats.

BK0277700US.book 224 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Assist grips

Features and controls 5-225

1. Roll back the cargo area cover.

2. Move one of the sliders (C) towards the

inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove

the cargo area cover.

To refit the cargo area cover, follow the

removal steps in reverse. Gently shake the

entire cargo area cover after fitting it to make

sure it is securely retained.

The cover can be fitted at the indicated posi-

tion when not in use.

The cover can be stored above the luggage

floor board.

N00559001097

The assist grips (located above the doors on

the headliner) are not designed to support

body weight. They are intended for use only

while seated in the vehicle.

To remove

To refit

To store

Assist grips

CAUTION

 Do not use the assist grips when getting into

or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could

detach causing you to fall.

BK0277700US.book 225 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Coat hooks

5-226 Features and controls

N00553601189

There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist

grip of the driver’s side.

N00528501272

There are hooks on the sides of the luggage

area for use in securing luggage.

N00574701024

Light items of luggage can be hung from the

hook.

N00527601029

1. Hold the tab (A) and lift the luggage floor

board.

Coat hooks

WARNING

 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or

pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-

tain airbag was activated, any such item

could be propelled away with great force

and could prevent the curtain airbag from

inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly

on the coat hook (without using a hanger).

Make sure there are no heavy or sharp

objects in the pockets of clothes that you

hang on the coat hook.

Luggage hooks

CAUTION

 Do not load the luggage higher than the top

of the seatback.

Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.

Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-

ing the passenger compartment during sud-

den braking could result in a serious

accident.

Convenient hook

NOTE

 To avoid damage to the convenient hook, do

not hang objects that weight more than 6.6

pounds (3 kg).

Luggage floor board

BK0277700US.book 226 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Luggage floor board

Features and controls 5-227

2. Hook the strap (B) of the luggage floor

board onto the top of the vehicle as shown

to secure the luggage floor board.

A- Tab

B- Strap

BK0277700US.book 227 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 228 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Driving safety

Driving precaution ...........................................................................6-2

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2

Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-3

Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-4

Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4

Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-5

Braking ............................................................................................6-5

Parking .............................................................................................6-6

Loading information ........................................................................6-6

Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10

Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Driving precaution

6-2 Driving safety

N00629301119

Your vehicle has been designed for both nor-

mal and occasional off-road use. However,

avoid driving the vehicle through areas where

the tires may get stuck in deep sand or mud as

your vehicle is designed primarily for use on

pavement, unlike a conventional off-road

vehicle.

Keep in mind that 2-wheel drive vehicles are

less capable than 4-wheel drive vehicles for

driving on muddy, slippery, wet or snow-cov-

ered roads.

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance

and a narrower track, which enables them to

perform in a wide variety of off-road situa-

tions. Because of the higher ground clear-

ance, these vehicles have a higher center of

gravity, which makes them handle differently

than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave-

ment. They are not designed to maneuver or

corner at the same speed on pavement as con-

ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any

more than low-slung sports cars are designed

to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi-

tions.

Always drive safely and steer the vehicle

carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a

manner that might require sharp turns or

abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of

this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle

rollover.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-

nificantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi-

cle, always make certain that you and all your

passengers are properly wearing their seat

belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro-

priate restraints).

N00628801218

Fuel economy is dependent on many factors.

Your personal driving habits can have a sig-

nificant effect on your fuel consumption.

Several recommendations for achieving the

greatest fuel economy are listed below.

 Whenever accelerating from a stop,

always accelerate slowly and smoothly.

 When parked for even a short period, do

not idle the engine. Shut it off.

 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary

stops.

 Keep your tires inflated to the recom-

mended pressures.

 When driving a 4-wheel drive vehicle on

highways or dry improved roads, set the

drive mode to “AUTO”.

 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of

approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when

traffic, roadway and weather conditions

safely permit.

 Keep your air cleaner filter clean and your

vehicle lubricated according to the recom-

mendations in this manual.

 Always keep your vehicle well main-

tained. A poorly maintained engine

wastes fuel and costs money.

 Never overload your vehicle.

N00628900049

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent

causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired

even with blood alcohol levels far below the

legal minimum. If you have been drinking,

don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use

public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-

ing a cold shower will not make you sober.

Similarly, prescription and nonprescription

drugs affect your alertness, perception and

reaction time. Consult with your doctor or

Driving precaution

WARNING

 Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive

speed. Always buckle up.

Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Floor mat

Driving safety 6-3

pharmacist before driving while under the

influence of any of these medications.

N00628601072

The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed

for your vehicle.

Always properly position the floor mat and

assure it does not interfere with operation of

the pedals. Always use the retaining clip on

the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor

mat. When used, this clip will help prevent

the floor mat from moving forward and possi-

bly interfering with the operation of the ped-

als. To prevent the floor mat from moving

forward and possibly interfering with the

operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi Motors

Genuine floor mats are recommended.

N00628701103

1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the

floorboard.

2. Align the floor mat with the installation

holes over the retaining clips.

3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.

WARNING

 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.

Your perceptions are less accurate, your

reflexes are slower and your judgment is

impaired.

Floor mat

To install the floor mat

NOTE

 The shape of the mat and the number of

retaining clips may vary depending on the

vehicle model.

WARNING

 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not

properly installed, it can interfere with the

operation of the pedals. Interference with

the pedals can cause unintended accelera-

tion and/or increased stopping distances

resulting in a crash and injury. Always

make sure the floor mat does not interfere

with the accelerator or brake pedal.

 Always use the retaining clip on the

driver’s floorboard to secure the floor

mat.

 Always install the mat with the correct

side facing down.

 Never install a second mat over or under

an existing floor mat.

 Do not use a floor mat designed for

another model vehicle even if it is a

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine floor mat.

 Before driving, be sure to check the fol-

lowing:

• Periodically check that the floor mat is

properly secured with the retaining clips.

If you remove the floor mat while clean-

ing the inside of your vehicle or for any

other reason, always check the condition

of the floor mat after it has been rein-

stalled.

• While the vehicle is stopped with the

engine off, check that the floor mat is not

interfering with the pedals by depressing

the pedals fully.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vehicle preparation before driving

6-4 Driving safety

N00629001842

For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always

check for the following:

 Before starting the vehicle, make certain

that you and all passengers are seated and

wearing their seat belts properly (with

children in the rear seat, in appropriate

restraints), and that all the doors and the

liftgate are locked.

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as

possible, while keeping good visibility,

and good control of the steering wheel,

brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check

the instrument panel indicators and multi-

information display for any possible prob-

lem.

 Similarly, the front passenger seat should

also be moved as far back as possible.

 Make sure that infants and small children

are properly restrained in accordance with

all laws and regulations.

Check these by selecting the defroster mode,

and set the blower switch on high. You should

be able to feel the air blowing against the

windshield.

Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)” on page 7-13, 7-22.

Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or

uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,

glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look

for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check

the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires

(including spare tire) for proper pressure.

Replace your tires before they are heavily

worn out.

As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-

sure monitoring system, there is a risk of

damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors

when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire

replacement should, only, be performed by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Have someone watch while you turn all the

exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn

signal indicators and high-beam indicators on

the instrument panel.

Check the ground under the vehicle after

parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or

other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are

correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need

to find out why immediately and have it

fixed.

N00629201147

Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and

your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you

can avoid an accident or injury. However, if

you give extra attention to the following

areas, you can better protect yourself and

your passengers:

 Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,

road and weather conditions. Leave plenty

of stopping distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead.

 Before changing lanes, check your mir-

rors, blind spots, and use your turn signal

light.

 While driving, watch the behavior of

other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.

Vehicle preparation before

driving

Seat belts and seats

Defrosters

Tires

Lights

Fluid leaks

Safe driving techniques

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Driving during cold weather

Driving safety 6-5

 Always obey applicable laws and regula-

tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always

leave room for unexpected events, such as

sudden braking.

 If you plan to drive in another country,

obey their vehicle registration laws and

make sure you will be able to get the right

fuel.

N00629400445

 Check the battery. At the same time,

check the terminals and wiring. During

extremely cold weather, the battery will

not be as strong. Also, the battery power

level may drop because more power is

used for cold starting and driving.

Before driving the vehicle, check to see if

the engine runs at the proper speed and if

the headlights are as bright as normally.

Charge or replace the battery if necessary.

During extreme cold weather, it is possi-

ble that a very low battery could freeze.



 Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-

ing the engine, allow a short warm-up

time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then

drive your vehicle slowly.

Stay at low speeds at first so that the

transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil

have time to spread to all lubrication

points.

 Check the engine antifreeze.

If there is not enough coolant because of a

leak or from engine overheating, add

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long

Life Coolant Premium or equivalent.

Please read this section in conjunction

with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.



N00629501528

All the parts of the brake system are critical

to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice at regular inter-

vals according to the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

Check the brake system while driving at a

low speed immediately after starting, espe-

cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm

they work normally.

A film of water can be formed on the brake

discs and prevent normal braking after driv-

ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or

after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry

the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly

depressing the brake pedal.

On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking

system, making the brakes less effective.

While driving in such conditions, pay close

attention to surrounding vehicles and to the

condition of the road surface. From time to

time, lightly depress the brake pedal and

check how effective the brakes are.

It is important to take advantage of the engine

braking by downshifting while driving on

steep downhill roads in order to prevent the

brakes from overheating.

Driving during cold weather

WARNING

 The battery gives off explosive hydrogen

gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-

tery to explode, which could cause serious

injury or death.

Always wear protective clothes and a face

mask when working with your battery, or

let a skilled mechanic do it.

WARNING

 Never open the radiator cap when the

radiator is hot. You could be seriously

burned.

Braking

When brakes are wet

When driving in cold weather

When driving downhill

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Parking

6-6 Driving safety

N00629601398

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.

If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.

Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set

when parked and that the selector lever is in

the “P” (PARK) position.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set

the parking brake before moving the selector

lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-

vents loading the parking brake against the

transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to

move the selector lever out of the “P”

(PARK) position.

Never leave the engine running while you

take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the

engine running in a closed or poorly venti-

lated place.

Your front bumper can be damaged if you

scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.

Be careful when traveling up or down steep

slopes where your bumper can scrape the

road.

Always carry the key and lock all doors and

the liftgate when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit

area.

More effort could be required to turn the

steering wheel.

Refer to “Electric power steering system

(EPS)” on page 5-84.

N00629901450

It is very important to know how much

weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is

called the vehicle capacity weight and

includes the weight of all occupants, cargo

(including the roof load), non-factory-

installed options, and the tongue weight of

the trailer, if any, being towed. The tire and

loading information placard located on the

driver’s door sill of your vehicle will show

how much weight it may properly carry.

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms before loading your vehicle:

Parking

Parking on a hill

Parking with the engine run-

ning

WARNING

 Leaving the engine running risks injury or

death from accidentally moving the selec-

tor lever or the accumulation of toxic

exhaust fumes in the passenger compart-

ment.

Where you park

WARNING

 Do not park your vehicle in areas where

combustible materials such as dry grass or

leaves can come in contact with a hot

exhaust, since a fire could occur.

When leaving the vehicle

Do not keep the steering wheel

fully turned for a long time

Loading information

WARNING

 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading

can damage your vehicle, adversely affect

vehicle performance, including handling

and braking, cause tire failure, and result

in an accident.

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Loading information

Driving safety 6-7

 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load

on an individual tire that is determined by

distributing to each axle its share of the

maximum loaded vehicle weight and

dividing by two.

 Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an

individual tire that is determined by dis-

tributing to each axle its share of the curb

weight, accessory weight, and normal

occupant weight and dividing by two.

 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum

of -

(a) Curb weight;

(b) Accessory weight;

(d) Production options weight.

 Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-

cle with standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-

ant.

 Accessory weight: the combined weight

(in excess of those standard items which

may be replaced) of automatic transaxle,

power steering, power brakes, power win-

dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to

the extent that these items are available as

factory-installed equipment (whether

installed or not).

 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo

and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)

*times the vehicle’s designated seating

capacity.

 Production options weight: the combined

weight of those installed regular produc-

tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)

in excess of those standard items which

they replace, not previously considered in

curb weight or accessory weight, includ-

ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof

rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

 Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)

*times the number of specified occupants

(3 in the case of your vehicle)

 Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu-

tion within the passenger compartment (In

your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front,

1 in rear seat)

N00630101423

The tire and loading information placard is

located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.

This placard shows the maximum number of

occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as

well as “the combined weight of occupants

and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle

capacity weight. The weight of any non-fac-

tory installed options, as well as the tongue

weight of a trailer being towed and roof load

is included in the definition of “cargo” when

determining the vehicle capacity weight. This

placard also tells you the size and recom-

mended inflation pressure for the original

equipment tires on your vehicle. For more

information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-12.

*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-

son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian

regulations.

Tire and loading information

placard

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Loading information

6-8 Driving safety

Type 1

Type 2

N00630201222

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650

lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650

lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Loading information

Driving safety 6-9

NOTE

 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configura-

tions and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your

vehicle.

 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information

on GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cargo loads

6-10 Driving safety

N00629700435

N00630301122

To determine the cargo load capacity for your

vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle

occupants from the vehicle capacity weight.

For additional information, if needed, refer to

“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”

on page 6-8.

DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers

listed on the safety certification label located

on the inside sill of the driver’s door as the

guide for passengers and/or cargo weight.

N00630401181

Cargo loads

Cargo load precautions

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death, the combined weights of the driver,

passengers and cargo must never exceed

the vehicle capacity weight.

 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will

adversely affect vehicle performance,

including handling and braking, and may

cause an accident.

 Do not load cargo or luggage higher than

the top of the seatback. Be sure that your

cargo or luggage cannot move when your

vehicle is in motion.

Having either the rear view blocked, or

your cargo being thrown inside the cabin

if you suddenly have to brake can cause a

serious accident or injury or death.

 Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the weight

evenly.

Loading cargo on the roof

(Vehicles equipped with roof

rails)

WARNING

 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle

will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity

and adversely affect its handling charac-

teristics. As a result, driving errors or

emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss

of control and result in an accident. Drive

slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers

such as sudden braking or quick turning.

 Make sure that the weight of luggage and

the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-

mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-

mum roof load is exceeded, this could

cause damage to the vehicle or result in an

accident.

 The total weight of all occupants and lug-

gage, including your roof load, must not

exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For

more information, refer to “Tire and load-

ing information placard” on page 11-3.

 Roof load is determined by adding the

weight of the roof carrier and the weight

of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.

 For additional information, refer to

“Maximum roof load” on page 11-5.

BK0277700US.book 10 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Trailer towing

Driving safety 6-11

N00629801387

Towing a trailer will adversely affect your

vehicle’s handling, performance, braking,

durability and driving economy (fuel con-

sumption, etc.).

If you do tow a trailer with this vehicle, be

sure to use proper equipment and cautious

steering and braking for safe driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight,

maximum trailer weight (A), maximum

tongue weight (B) and Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR).

The vehicle capacity weight is printed on the

tire and loading information placard as “com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo”.

The weight includes the weight of all occu-

pants and the total weight it can carry.

For more information, refer to “Tire and load-

ing information placard” on page 6-7.

CAUTION

 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.

Use a roof carrier that properly fits your

vehicle.

For installation, refer to the instruction man-

ual provided with the roof carrier.

 Place the luggage on the carrier so that its

weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest

items on the bottom. Do not load items that

are wider than the roof carrier.

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis-

tance, always check the load to make sure it

is securely fastened to the roof carrier.

Stop the vehicle periodically and check that

the load remains secure. If the load is not

secure, it could fall from the vehicle and

damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-

ate a road hazard.

NOTE

 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas

mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in

use.

 Before using an automatic car wash, check

with the attendant to determine if the roof

carrier should be removed.

 Be sure that adequate clearance is main-

tained for raising the sunroof and/or liftgate

when installing a roof carrier. (For vehicle

with sunroof only)

Trailer towing

CAUTION

 Do not lose control of your vehicle when

towing a trailer.

• Always use proper equipment.

• Always drive carefully.

 Damage to your vehicle caused by improper

equipment or driving is not covered by your

warranty.

Weight limits

Vehicle capacity weight

BK0277700US.book 11 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Trailer towing

6-12 Driving safety

Recommendations for towing up to this limit

are as follows.

The tongue weight of any trailer is important

because it affects the vehicle capacity weight.

The vehicle capacity weight includes any

cargo you may carry, and the people who will

be riding in the vehicle. If you will tow a

trailer, you must include the tongue weight of

the trailer in your calculation of the vehicle

capacity weight. For more information

regarding vehicle capacity weight, refer to

“Tire and loading information placard” on

page 6-7.

Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight

for your vehicle.

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the

trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see

if the weights are proper.

Keep the trailer tongue load at 10 % of the

loaded trailer weight for dead weight hitches.

Tongue loads can be adjusted by proper dis-

tribution of the load in the trailer. This can be

checked by separately weighing the loaded

trailer and then the tongue.

The GAWRs are printed on the certification

label which is riveted on the door sill on the

driver’s side.

Refer to “Vehicle labeling” on page 11-2.

Choose a proper hitch and ball, and make

sure it is installed at a height that is compati-

ble with the trailer.

Use a good equalizing hitch which uniformly

distributes the trailer tongue load throughout

the frame.

Maximum trailer weight

Vehicle condi-

tion

Maximum trailer weight

1 or 2 persons

seated

With brake 2,000 lb

(907 kg)

Without brake 1,250 lb

(567 kg)

3–5 persons

seated

With brake 1,500 lb

(680 kg)

Without brake 1,250 lb

(567 kg)

Tongue weight

Vehicle condi-

tion

Maximum tongue weight

1 or 2 persons

seated

With brake 200 lb (91 kg)

Without brake 125 lb

(57 kg)

3–5 persons

seated

With brake 150 lb (68 kg)

Without brake 125 lb

(57 kg)

Gross axle weight rating (GAWR)

Trailer hitches

WARNING

 If you make any holes in the body of your

vehicle for installing a trailer hitch, be

sure to seal the holes later when you

remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them,

deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your

exhaust can enter your vehicle. Refer to

“Exhaust system” on page 9-22.

BK0277700US.book 12 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Trailer towing

Driving safety 6-13

A safety chain must always be used between

the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave suf-

ficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain

should cross under the trailer tongue to pre-

vent the tongue from dropping to the ground

in case it becomes damaged or separated.

For correct safety chain procedures, consult

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Your vehicle will need service more often

when you’re towing a trailer. Refer to “WAR-

RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-

UAL”. Especially important in trailer

operation are automatic transaxle fluid,

engine oil, rear axle oil, belt, cooling system

and brake system. Each of these is covered in

this manual.

For details, please refer to the “Vehicle care

and maintenance” section.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts

and bolts are tight.

Mitsubishi Motors recommends that any

trailer having a total weight of 1,250 lb

(567 kg) or more be equipped with its own

electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are

electrically actuated. Do not attempt to tap

into your vehicle’s hydraulic system. No mat-

ter how successful it may seem, any attempt

to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic system will lower braking effec-

tiveness and create a potential hazard.

Trailer lights and equipment must comply

with federal, state, and local regulations.

Check with your local recreational vehicle

dealer for the requirements in your area, and

use only equipment designed for your vehi-

cle.

Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type

and brand, you should have a qualified tech-

nician install a suitable connector between the

vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or

installation can cause damage to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system and affect your vehicle

warranty.

Many states and Canadian provinces require

special outside mirrors when towing a trailer.

Even if not required, you should install spe-

cial mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind

you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any

other items are recommended or required for

your towing situation.

NOTE

 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that sway

control be used whenever you are towing, to

improve towing stability.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Safety chains

CAUTION

 Never tow a trailer without using a safety

chain securely attached to both the trailer

and the vehicle. If the coupling unit or hitch

ball experiences a problem, the trailer may

separate from your vehicle.

Maintenance when trailer tow-

ing

Trailer brakes

Trailer lights

Additional trailer equipment

BK0277700US.book 13 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Trailer towing

6-14 Driving safety

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of

experience.

Before setting out for the open road, you’ll

want to get to know your trailer. Acquaint

yourself with the feel of handling and braking

with the added weight of the trailer. Always

keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving

is now a good deal longer and not nearly as

responsive as your vehicle is without a trailer.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch,

safety chains, tires and mirror adjustment.

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the

cold inflation pressure listed in the manual.

You’ll find these numbers on the tire and

loading information placard at the sill of the

driver’s door.

Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page

9-15.

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle

ahead as you would when driving your vehi-

cle without a trailer. This can help you avoid

situations that require heavy braking and sud-

den turns.

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead

when you’re towing a trailer. And, because

you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go

much farther beyond the passed vehicle

before you can return to your lane.

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with

one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,

just move that hand to the left. To move the

trailer to the right, move your hand to the

right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,

have someone guide you.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make

wider than normal turns to help prevent the

trailer from striking shoulders, curbs, road

signs, trees or other objects.

Operating hints

WARNING

 If you have a rear window open and you

tow a trailer with your vehicle, carbon

monoxide gas which you cannot see or

smell could come into your vehicle. It can

cause unconsciousness or death. Refer to

“Exhaust system” on page 9-22.

To maximize your safety when towing a

trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspected for

leaks, and make necessary repairs before

starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear windows closed.

• If exhaust does come into your vehicle

through a window or another opening,

drive with your front, main heating or

cooling system on and with the blower on

any speed. This will bring fresh, outside

air into your vehicle. Do not use recircu-

lation because it only recirculates the air

inside your vehicle. Refer to “Air selec-

tion switch” on page 7-9.

Driver preparation

Vehicle preparation

Tire

Following distance

Passing

Backing up

Making turns

CAUTION

 Making sharp turns while towing a trailer

could cause the trailer to come in contact

with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be dam-

aged. Avoid making sharp turns while tow-

ing a trailer.

BK0277700US.book 14 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Trailer towing

Driving safety 6-15

Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal

well in advance.

Towing a trailer puts additional burden on the

engine and transaxle, which may cause over-

heating. Following are some suggestions to

reduce overheating:

When towing at high altitudes, engine coolant

and automatic transaxle fluid will overheat at

a lower temperature than at normal altitudes.

If you turn your engine off immediately after

towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,

your vehicle may show signs similar to over-

heating. To avoid this, let the engine run

while parked (preferably on level ground)

with the automatic transaxle in the “P”

(PARK) position for a few minutes before

turning the engine off.

 If the engine coolant temperature indica-

tor flashes on the information screen in

the multi-information display or the

engine power drops suddenly, refer to

“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.

 If the warning display or warning

display illuminates, refer to “Warning dis-

play” on page 5-66.

Reduce speed and downshift before you start

down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t

downshift, prolonged or frequent application

of the brakes can cause reduced braking effi-

ciency and performance.

You can tow in “D” (DRIVE) position. How-

ever, you may want to shift the selector lever

to the 3rd or a lower position, under heavy

loads or hilly conditions.

Always place chocks or blocks under both the

vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Be

sure that the parking brake is firmly set and

that the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)

position. Avoid parking on a hill with a

trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only

after performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

2. Have someone place chocks or blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the chocks or blocks are in place,

release your brakes slowly until the

chocks or blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)

position and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on a hill:

1. Check that the selector lever is set to the

“P” (PARK) position.

2. Start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake

pedal depressed.

3. Set the selector lever to the “D” (DRIVE)

position or “R” (REVERSE) position.

4. Release the parking brake and brake pedal

and slowly pull or back away from the

chocks or blocks. Stop and apply your

brakes.

5. Have someone retrieve the chocks or

blocks.

Overheating

Cause of over-

heating

Solution

Air conditioning on Turn off

Highway speeds Reduce speed

Going up hills

Select lower gear posi-

tion

Stop-and-go city

traffic

With the vehicle

stopped, shift to the

“N” (NEUTRAL)

position and idle the

engine at high idle.

Driving on hills

Parking

BK0277700US.book 15 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 16 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Comfort controls

Important air conditioning operation tips ........................................7-2

Vents ................................................................................................7-2

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped).....................................7-6

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning

(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-15

Air purifier .....................................................................................7-23

General information about your radio ...........................................7-23

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Important air conditioning operation tips

7-2 Comfort controls

N00733701405

1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the

vehicle interior extremely hot which then

requires more time to cool. If it is neces-

sary to park in the sun, open the windows

for the first few minutes of air condition-

ing to expel the hot air.

2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed

when the air conditioning is in use. The

entry of outside air through open windows

will reduce cooling efficiency.

3. When running the air conditioning, make

sure the air intake, which is located in

front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-

tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in

the air-intake chamber may reduce air

flow and plug the water drains.

If the air conditioning seems less effective

than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant

leak.

Have the system inspected by your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

The air conditioning should be operated for at

least five minutes each week, even in cold

weather. This includes the quick defrosting

mode. Operating the air conditioning system

weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-

sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning

in the best operating condition.

N00729901318

Important air conditioning

operation tips

CAUTION

 The engine speed may increase when the air

conditioning is operating.

With increased engine speed, a CVT

equipped vehicle will creep to a greater

degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully

depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-

cle from creeping.

Air conditioning system refrig-

erant and lubricant recommen-

dations

CAUTION

 The air conditioning system in your vehicle

must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-

1234yf and the lubricant PAG46A.

Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will

cause severe damage and may require replac-

ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning

system.

The release of refrigerant into the atmo-

sphere is not recommended.

The new refrigerant HFO-1234yf in your

vehicle is designed not to harm the earth’s

ozone layer. However, it may contribute

slightly to global warming.

It is recommended that the old refrigerant be

saved and recycled for future use.

During a long period of disuse

Vents

1- Center vents

2- Side vents

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vents

Comfort controls 7-3

N00730201379

Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.

To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the

inside as far as possible.

Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.

To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the

outside as far as possible.

N00736401764

To change the position and amount of air

flowing from the vents, press the MODE

switch or defogger switch. Refer to “MODE

switch” on page 7-9, 7-18, “Defogger switch”

on page 7-9, 7-18.

These symbols are used in the next several

illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air

coming from the vents.

: Small amount of air from the vents

: Medium amount of air from the vents

: Large amount of air from the vents

Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

ger compartment.

Air flow and direction adjust-

ments

Center vents

1- Close

2- Open

Side vents

1- Close

2- Open

NOTE

 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an

air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is

only due to moist air cooling suddenly and

does not indicate a problem.

 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the

vents as they could prevent the air condition-

ing from operating normally.

Left Right

Changing the mode selection

Face position

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vents

7-4 Comfort controls

Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.

Air flows mainly to the leg area. Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and

the door windows.

Foot/Face position

NOTE

 The foot/face air flow ratio can be adjusted

with the mode selection in the “ ” posi-

tion.

For further information, we recommend you

consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to make the adjustment. Refer to the

separate owner’s manual for details.

Foot position Foot/Defroster position

NOTE

 The foot/defroster air flow ratio can be

adjusted with the mode selection in the

“ ” position.

For further information, we recommend you

consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to make the adjustment. Refer to the

separate owner’s manual for details.

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vents

Comfort controls 7-5

Air flows mainly to the windshield and the

door windows.

Defroster position

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-6 Comfort controls

N00731501470

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

N00711801813

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Control panel

1- Temperature control switch  P.7-8

2- MODE switch  P.7-9

3- Air conditioning switch  P.7-10

4- Blower speed selection switch  P.7-7

5- Air selection switch  P.7-9

6- Defogger switch  P.7-9

7- AUTO switch  P.7-12

8- Electric rear window defogger switch

 P.5-207

9- OFF switch  P.7-12

10- Temperature display  P.7-8

11- Mode selection display  P.7-9

12- Air conditioning indicator  P.7-10

13- Blower speed display  P.7-7

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-7

N00736901251

Press of the blower speed selection

switch to increase the blower speed.

Press of the blower speed selection

switch to decrease the blower speed.

The selected blower speed (A) will be shown

in the display.

NOTE

 There is an interior air temperature sensor

(A) in the illustrated position.

Never place anything over the sensor, since

doing so will prevent it from functioning

properly.

 Since the air conditioning operation is con-

trolled while the ECO mode is operating,

you may feel that effectiveness of the air

conditioning is insufficient.

Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-201.

 Even during ECO mode operation, you can

select normal operation of the air condition-

ing.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to change the setting. Refer to the

separate owner’s manual for details.

 In extreme cold, the air conditioning control

panel screen may operate sluggishly. This

does not indicate a problem.

It will disappear when the vehicle interior

temperature rises to a normal temperature.

Blower speed selection switch

1- Increase

2- Decrease

NOTE

 Due to a drop in the battery voltage or some

other problem, the blower speed may tempo-

rarily become less than the selected blower

speed display setting or the fan may stop.

If the fan stops, turn the ignition switch to

the “OFF” position or set the operation mode

to OFF, wait a few minutes, and then turn the

ignition switch back to the “ON” position or

set the operation mode back to ON.

In the following cases, have the system

inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

• The blower speed remains lower than the

blower speed set using the blower speed

display or the blower speed decreases fre-

quently.

• The fan does not operate even after stop-

ping and restarting the engine or the fan

stops frequently.

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月１２日　火曜日　午前９時３９分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-8 Comfort controls

N00737001510

Press of the temperature control switch to

increase the temperature.

Press of the temperature control switch to

decrease the temperature.

The selected temperature (A) will be shown

in the display.

The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and

air conditioning switch to match your per-

sonal preferences.

Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice for

assistance.

Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning

switch (Changing the function setting)” on

page 7-11.

Refer to “Personalizing the air selection

(Changing the function setting)” on page

7-10.

Temperature control switch

NOTE

 The temperature value of the air conditioning

is switched in conjunction with the outside

temperature display unit of the multi-infor-

mation display.

Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on

page 5-158.

 When the engine coolant temperature is low,

the air temperature from the heater will be

cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if

you have selected warm air with the switch.

To prevent the windshield and windows from

fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to

“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced

while the system is operating in the AUTO

mode.

 When you feel that it is hotter or colder than

the set temperature, you may adjust it to your

preference.

For further information, we recommend you

consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

 When the temperature is set to the highest or

the lowest setting, the air selection and the

air conditioning will be automatically

changed as follows.

Also, if the air selection is operated manually

after an automatic changeover, manual oper-

ation will be selected.

• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set

to the highest setting)

Outside air will be introduced and the air

conditioning will stop.

• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set

to the lowest setting)

Inside air will be recirculated and the air

conditioning will operate.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-9

N00737101289

To change the amount of air flowing from the

vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the

MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes

to the next one in the following sequence:

“”  “”  “”  “”  “” 

“ ”. The selected mode is shown in the dis-

play (A). Refer to “Changing the mode selec-

tion” on page 7-3.

N00703401096

When this switch is pressed, the mode

changes to the “ ” mode and the blower

speed will be set at the maximum automati-

cally. The indicator light (A) will come on

and the “ ” mode is shown in the display

(B).

N00737201479

Normally, use the outside air position to keep

the windshield and side windows clear and to

quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-

shield.

To change the air selection, simply press the

air selection switch.

 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}

Outside air is introduced into the passen-

ger compartment.

 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}

Air is recirculated inside the passenger

compartment.

MODE switch Defogger switch

NOTE

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

conditioning system automatically operates

and outside air (as opposed to recirculated

air) is selected. This automatic switching

control is carried out to prevent misting of

the windows even if “Disable automatic air

conditioning control” or “Disable automatic

air selection control” is set. Refer to “Person-

alizing the air conditioning switch (Changing

the function setting)” on page 7-11, “Person-

alizing the air selection (Changing the func-

tion setting)” on page 7-10.

 The indicator light (A) will go off when

adjusting the blower speed.

Air selection switch

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-10 Comfort controls

When the air conditioning turns on, the air

selection is controlled automatically. When

the air conditioning turns off, the air selection

automatically goes back to the outside posi-

tion.

If high cooling performance is desired, or if

the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, use the recirculation position.

Switch to the outside position every now and

then to keep the windows from fogging up.

N00712300052

You can change the following functions to

match your preference.

 Enable automatic air selection control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air

selection switch will also be automatically

controlled.

 Disable automatic air selection control:

Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,

the air selection switch will not be auto-

matically controlled.

 Changing the settings:

Press the air selection switch for approxi-

mately 10 seconds or longer.

When the setting has changed, the system

will beep and the indicator light will flash.

• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled, the system will beep

three times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-

abled to enabled, the system will beep

two times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

On vehicles equipped with the Smart-

phone Link Display Audio, screen oper-

ations can also be used to change the

setting. Refer to the separate owner’s

manual for details.

N00737301470

Push the switch, and the air conditioning

compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator

(A) will be shown in the display.

CAUTION

 Using recirculated air for a long time may

cause the windows to fog up.

NOTE

 If the mode selection is set “ ” position,

you cannot turn the air conditioning off or

select the recirculation position.

This prevents the windows from fogging up.

 When the engine coolant temperature rises to

a certain level, the air selection is automati-

cally switched to the recirculation position

and the indicator light (A) comes on. At this

time, the system will not switch to the out-

side position even if the air selection switch

is pushed.

 Personalizing the air selection

(Changing the function setting)

NOTE

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

selection control”.

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

selection will automatically change to the

outside air position, even if the system is set

to “Disable automatic air selection control”,

in order to prevent windows from fogging

up.

Air conditioning switch

BK0277700US.book 10 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-11

Push the switch again and the air condition-

ing compressor will stop and the indicator

goes off.

N00712200080

You can change the following functions to

match your preference.

 Enable automatic air conditioning control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, or

when the temperature control switch has

been set to the minimum temperature, the

air conditioning switch is automatically

controlled.

 Disable automatic air conditioning con-

trol:

The air conditioning switch is not auto-

matically controlled, unless the air condi-

tioning switch is used.

 Changing the settings:

Press the air conditioning switch for

approximately 10 seconds or longer.

When the setting has changed, the system

will beep and the indicator light will flash.

• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled, the system will beep

three times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-

abled to enabled, the system will beep

two times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

On vehicles equipped with the Smart-

phone Link Display Audio, screen oper-

ations can also be used to change the

setting. Refer to the separate owner’s

manual for details.

NOTE

 If a problem is detected in the air condition-

ing compressor, the “ ” indicator blinks.

Press the air conditioning switch once to turn

it off, then once more to turn it back on. If

the“ ” indicator does not blink, there is

no problem. If it does blink, have it checked

at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice.

 For example, sometimes after using a high-

pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,

and the “ ” indicator blinks temporarily.

Wait for a while, press the air conditioning

switch once to turn the system off, then once

more to turn it back on. Once the water evap-

orates, the blinking will stop.

 Personalizing the air conditioning

switch (Changing the function set-

ting)

NOTE

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

conditioning control”.

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

conditioning will run automatically, even if

the system is set to “Disable automatic air

conditioning control”, in order to prevent

windows from fogging up.

BK0277700US.book 11 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-12 Comfort controls

N00703501071

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi-

cator light (A) comes on and the mode selec-

tion, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/

outside air selection, temperature adjustment,

and air conditioning ON/OFF status are all

controlled automatically. The selected mode

and the blower speed are not shown in the

display.

N00703601043

Push the switch to turn off the air condition-

ing system.

N00731701603

In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:

1. Push the AUTO switch.

2. Set the temperature control switch to the

desired temperature. The temperature can

be set within a range of around 61 (LO) to

89 (HI) (when the outside temperature

unit of the multi-information display

shows °F) or 17 (LO) to 31 (HI) (when the

outside temperature unit of the multi-

information display shows °C).

The vents, recirculated/outside air, blower

speed, temperature adjustment, and ON/OFF

of air conditioning will be controlled auto-

matically.

AUTO switch OFF switch

Operating the air conditioning

system (automatic mode)

BK0277700US.book 12 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-13

N00731801170

Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed

selection switch and the MODE switch to the

desired positions. To return to automatic

operation, press the AUTO switch.

N00732401623

To remove frost or mist from the windshield

and door windows, use the MODE switch or

defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”).

Use this setting to keep the windshield and

door windows clear of mist, and to keep the

leg area heated (when driving in rain or

snow).

1. Set the air selection switch to the outside

position.

2. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-

tion.

3. Select your desired blower speed by

pressing the blower speed selection

switch.

4. Select your desired temperature by press-

ing the temperature control switch.

5. Push the air conditioning switch.

1. Push the defogger switch.

2. Set the temperature to the highest posi-

tion.

NOTE

 Set the temperature at approximately 75

(when the outside temperature unit of the

multi-information display shows °F) or 24

(when the outside temperature unit of the

multi-information display shows °C) under

normal conditions.

 When the engine coolant temperature is low,

the air temperature from the heater will be

cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if

you have selected warm air with the temper-

ature switch. To prevent the windshield and

windows from fogging up, the vent mode

will be changed to “ ” and the blower

speed will be reduced.

Operating the air conditioning

system (manual mode)

Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)

CAUTION

 For safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows.

 For ordinary defrosting

 For quick defrosting

NOTE

 While the “ ” indicator light is on, the air

conditioning compressor will run automati-

cally. The outside air position will also be

selected and the blower speed will be set at

the maximum automatically.

BK0277700US.book 13 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-14 Comfort controls

 If the “ ” indicator light is on, you cannot

turn the air conditioning off or select the

recirculation position. This prevents the win-

dows from fogging up.

 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

side vents toward the door windows.

 When defrosting, do not set the temperature

to the maximum cool position. This will

blow cool air on the window glass and fog it

up.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 14 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-15

N00731501483

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

N00711801826

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

Control panel

1- Driver’s side temperature control

switch  P.7-17

2- MODE switch  P.7-18

3- Blower speed selection switch 

P.7-16

4- Air conditioning switch  P.7-20

5- Passenger’s side temperature control

switch  P.7-17

6- Air selection switch  P.7-19

7- Defogger switch  P.7-18

8- AUTO switch  P.7-21

9- SYNC switch  P.7-17

10- Electric rear window defogger switch

 P.5-207

11- OFF switch  P.7-21

12- Driver’s side temperature display

 P.7-17

13- Mode selection display  P.7-18

14- Air conditioning indicator  P.7-20

15- Blower speed display  P.7-16

16- Passenger’s side temperature display

 P.7-17

BK0277700US.book 15 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-16 Comfort controls

N00736901264

Press of the blower speed selection

switch to increase the blower speed.

Press of the blower speed selection

switch to decrease the blower speed.

The selected blower speed (A) will be shown

in the display.

NOTE

 There is an interior air temperature sensor

(A) in the illustrated position.

Never place anything over the sensor, since

doing so will prevent it from functioning

properly.

 Since the air conditioning operation is con-

trolled while the ECO mode is operating,

you may feel that effectiveness of the air

conditioning is insufficient.

Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-201.

 Even during ECO mode operation, you can

select normal operation of the air condition-

ing.

On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone

Link Display Audio, screen operations can

be used to change the setting. Refer to the

separate owner’s manual for details.

 In extreme cold, the air conditioning control

panel screen may operate sluggishly. This

does not indicate a problem.

It will disappear when the vehicle interior

temperature rises to a normal temperature.

Blower speed selection switch

1- Increase

2- Decrease

NOTE

 Due to a drop in the battery voltage or some

other problem, the blower speed may tempo-

rarily become less than the selected blower

speed display setting or the fan may stop.

If the fan stops, turn the ignition switch to

the “OFF” position or set the operation mode

to OFF, wait a few minutes, and then turn the

ignition switch back to the “ON” position or

set the operation mode back to ON.

In the following cases, have the system

inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

• The blower speed remains lower than the

blower speed set using the blower speed

display or the blower speed decreases fre-

quently.

• The fan does not operate even after stop-

ping and restarting the engine or the fan

stops frequently.

BK0277700US.book 16 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-17

N00737001523

Press of the temperature control switch to

increase the temperature.

Press of the temperature control switch to

decrease the temperature.

The selected temperature (A) will be shown

in the display.

The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and

air conditioning switch to match your per-

sonal preferences.

Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice for

assistance.

Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning

switch (Changing the function setting)” on

page 7-20.

Refer to “Personalizing the air selection

(Changing the function setting)” on page

7-19.

When the indicator light (A) goes off by

pressing the passenger’s side temperature

control switch (B) or the SYNC switch, the

driver’s side and the passenger’s side temper-

ature can be controlled independently of each

other.

Temperature control switch

NOTE

 The temperature value of air conditioning is

switched in conjunction with outside temper-

ature display unit of the multi-information

display.

Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on

page 5-158.

 When the engine coolant temperature is low,

the air temperature from the heater will be

cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if

you have selected warm air with the switch.

To prevent the windshield and windows from

fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to

“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced

while the system is operating in the AUTO

mode.

 When you feel that it is hotter or colder than

the set temperature, you may adjust it to your

preference.

For further information, we recommend you

consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

 When the temperature is set to the highest or

the lowest setting, the air selection and the

air conditioning will be automatically

changed as follows.

Also, if the air selection is operated manually

after an automatic changeover, manual oper-

ation will be selected.

• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set

to the highest setting)

Outside air will be introduced and the air

conditioning will stop.

• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set

to the lowest setting)

Inside air will be recirculated and the air

conditioning will operate.

NOTE

 To control the driver’s side and the

passenger’s side temperature inde-

pendently

BK0277700US.book 17 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-18 Comfort controls

N00737101292

To change the amount of air flowing from the

vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the

MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes

to the next one in the following sequence:

“”  “”  “”  “”  “” 

“ ”. The selected mode is shown in the dis-

play (A). Refer to “Changing the mode selec-

tion” on page 7-3.

N00703401100

When this switch is pressed, the mode

changes to the “ ” mode and the blower

speed will be set at the maximum automati-

cally. The indicator light (A) will come on

and the “ ” mode is shown in the display

(B).

NOTE

 When the indicator light (A) comes on by

pressing the SYNC switch, the passenger’s

side temperature will be controlled to the

same setting temperature as the driver’s side.

When the indicator light (A) illuminates, if

the driver’s side temperature control switch

is pressed, the passenger’s side setting tem-

perature will be synchronized to the driver’s

side.

MODE switch Defogger switch

BK0277700US.book 18 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-19

N00737201482

Normally, use the outside air position to keep

the windshield and side windows clear and to

quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-

shield.

To change the air selection, simply press the

air selection switch.

 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}

Outside air is introduced into the passen-

ger compartment.

 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}

Air is recirculated inside the passenger

compartment.

When the air conditioning turns on, the air

selection is controlled automatically. When

the air conditioning turns off, the air selection

automatically goes back to the outside posi-

tion.

If high cooling performance is desired, or if

the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, use the recirculation position.

Switch to the outside position every now and

then to keep the windows from fogging up.

N00712300065

You can change the following functions to

match your preference.

 Enable automatic air selection control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air

selection switch will also be automatically

controlled.

 Disable automatic air selection control:

Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,

the air selection switch will not be auto-

matically controlled.

 Changing the settings:

Press the air selection switch for approxi-

mately 10 seconds or longer.

When the setting has changed, the system

will beep and the indicator light will flash.

NOTE

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

conditioning system automatically operates

and outside air (as opposed to recirculated

air) is selected. This automatic switching

control is carried out to prevent misting of

the windows even if “Disable automatic air

conditioning control” or “Disable automatic

air selection control” is set. Refer to “Person-

alizing the air conditioning switch (Changing

the function setting)” on page 7-20, “Person-

alizing the air selection (Changing the func-

tion setting)” on page 7-19.

 The indicator light (A) will go off when

adjusting the blower speed.

Air selection switch

CAUTION

 Using recirculated air for a long time may

cause the windows to fog up.

NOTE

 If the mode selection is set to the “ ” posi-

tion, you cannot turn the air conditioning off

or select the recirculation position.

This prevents the windows from fogging up.

 When the engine coolant temperature rises to

a certain level, the air selection is automati-

cally switched to the recirculation position

and the indicator light (A) comes on. At this

time, the system will not switch to the out-

side position even if the air selection switch

is pushed.

 Personalizing the air selection

(Changing the function setting)

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 19 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-20 Comfort controls

• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled, the system will beep

three times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-

abled to enabled, the system will beep

two times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

On vehicles equipped with the Smart-

phone Link Display Audio, screen oper-

ations can also be used to change the

setting. Refer to the separate owner’s

manual for details.

N00737301483

Push the switch, and the air conditioning

compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator

(A) will be shown in the display.

Push the switch again and the air condition-

ing compressor will stop and the indicator

goes off.

N00712200093

You can change the following functions to

match your preference.

 Enable automatic air conditioning control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, or

when the temperature control switch has

been set to the minimum temperature, the

air conditioning switch is automatically

controlled.

 Disable automatic air conditioning con-

trol:

The air conditioning switch is not auto-

matically controlled, unless the air condi-

tioning switch is used.

 Changing the settings:

Press the air conditioning switch for

approximately 10 seconds or longer.

When the setting has changed, the system

will beep and the indicator light will flash.

• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled, the system will beep

three times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-

abled to enabled, the system will beep

two times and the indicator light will

flash three times.

NOTE

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

selection control”.

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

selection will automatically change to the

outside air position, even if the system is set

to “Disable automatic air selection control”,

in order to prevent windows from fogging

up.

Air conditioning switch

NOTE

 If a problem is detected in the air condition-

ing compressor, the “ ” indicator blinks.

Press the air conditioning switch once to turn

it off, then once more to turn it back on. If

the“ ” indicator does not blink, there is

no problem. If it does blink, have it checked

at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice.

 For example, sometimes after using a high-

pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,

and the “ ” indicator blinks temporarily.

Wait for a while, press the air conditioning

switch once to turn the system off, then once

more to turn it back on. Once the water evap-

orates, the blinking will stop.

 Personalizing the air conditioning

switch (Changing the function set-

ting)

BK0277700US.book 20 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-21

On vehicles equipped with the Smart-

phone Link Display Audio, screen oper-

ations can also be used to change the

setting. Refer to the separate owner’s

manual for details.

N00703501084

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi-

cator light (A) comes on and the mode selec-

tion, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/

outside air selection, temperature adjustment,

and air conditioning ON/OFF status are all

controlled automatically. The selected mode

and the blower speed are not shown in the

display.

N00703601056

Push the switch to turn off the air condition-

ing system.

NOTE

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

conditioning control”.

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

conditioning will run automatically, even if

the system is set to “Disable automatic air

conditioning control”, in order to prevent

windows from fogging up.

AUTO switch

OFF switch

BK0277700US.book 21 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-22 Comfort controls

N00731701616

In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:

1. Push the AUTO switch.

2. Set the temperature control switch to the

desired temperature. The temperature can

be set within a range of around 61 (LO) to

89 (HI) (when the outside temperature

unit of the multi-information display

shows °F) or 17 (LO) to 31 (HI) (when the

outside temperature unit of the multi-

information display shows °C).

The vents, recirculated/outside air, blower

speed, temperature adjustment, and ON/OFF

of the air conditioning will be controlled

automatically.

N00731801125

Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed

selection switch and the MODE switch to the

desired positions. To return to automatic

operation, press the AUTO switch.

N00732401636

To remove frost or mist from the windshield

and door windows, use the MODE switch or

defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”).

Use this setting to keep the windshield and

door windows clear of mist, and to keep the

leg area heated (when driving in rain or

snow).

Operating the air conditioning

system (automatic mode)

NOTE

 Set the temperature at approximately 75

(when the outside temperature unit of the

multi-information display shows °F) or 24

(when the outside temperature unit of the

multi-information display shows °C) under

normal conditions.

 When the engine coolant temperature is low,

the air temperature from the heater will be

cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if

you have selected warm air with the temper-

ature switch. To prevent the windshield and

windows from fogging up, the vent mode

will be changed to “ ” and the blower

speed will be reduced.

Operating the air conditioning

system (manual mode)

Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)

CAUTION

 For safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows.

 For ordinary defrosting

BK0277700US.book 22 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Air purifier

Comfort controls 7-23

1. Set the air selection switch to the outside

position.

2. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-

tion.

3. Select your desired blower speed by

pressing the blower speed selection

switch.

4. Select your desired temperature by press-

ing the temperature control switch.

5. Push the air conditioning switch.

1. Push the defogger switch.

2. Set the temperature to the highest posi-

tion.

N00733801220

The air conditioning system is equipped with

an air filter to remove pollen and dust.

The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and

dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace

it periodically. For the maintenance interval,

refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-

NANCE MANUAL”.

N00733901566

Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and

FM stations.

The quality of your reception is affected by

distance, obstacles, and signal interference.

This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) Rules

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is

subject to the following conditions:

 The device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

recieved, including interference that may

cause undesirable operation.

 For quick defrosting

NOTE

 While the “ ” indicator light is on, the air

conditioning compressor will run automati-

cally. The outside air position will also be

selected and the blower speed will be set at

the maximum automatically.

 If the “ ” indicator light is on, you cannot

turn the air conditioning off or select the

recirculation position. This prevents the win-

dows from fogging up.

 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

side vents toward the door windows.

 When defrosting, do not set the temperature

to the maximum cool position. This will

blow cool air on the window glass and fog it

up.

Air purifier

NOTE

 Operation in certain conditions such as driv-

ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the

air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-

vice life of the filter. When you feel that the

air flow is lower than normal or when the

windshield or windows start to fog up easily,

replace the air filter.

Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice for

assistance.

General information about

your radio

BK0277700US.book 23 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

General information about your radio

7-24 Comfort controls

FM signals do not follow the earth surface

nor are they reflected by the upper atmo-

sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot

be received over long distances. AM signals

follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by

the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM

broadcasts can be received over longer dis-

tances.

Because of the limited range of FM signals

and the way FM waves transmit, you may

experience weak or fading FM reception.

When the broadcast is blocked by mountains

or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-

turbed.

The reason why one can hear FM but not AM

in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that

FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected

by solid objects such as buildings, etc.

Because FM signals are easily reflected by

buildings, this can also cause reception dis-

turbances.

The direct signal from the broadcast station

reaches the antenna slightly before the

reflected signal. This time difference may

cause some reception disturbance or flutter.

This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.

If one listens to a weak station and is in the

vicinity of another strong station, both sta-

tions might be received simultaneously.

CAUTION

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party meeting the above

conditions could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

Signal transmission

FM AM

25 to 40 mile radius

(40 to 64 km)

100 mile radius

(160 km)

Weak reception (fading)

Reflection

Cross modulation

BK0277700US.book 24 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

General information about your radio

Comfort controls 7-25

Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of

disturbances mentioned previously become

more marked and the reception range is

somewhat diminished during stereo recep-

tion.

FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-

tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially

those without an electronic noise suppression

device. The disturbance is even greater if the

station is weak or poorly tuned.

FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical

disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-

tive to electrical disturbances such as power

lines, lightning and other types of similar

electrical phenomena.

FM stereo reception Causes of disturbances

BK0277700US.book 25 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 26 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF

(vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) ...................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2

Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4

Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5

How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6

Towing ...........................................................................................8-11

Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-12

Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-13

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

If the vehicle breaks down

8-2 For emergencies

N00836301230

If your vehicle breaks down on the road,

move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard

warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or

the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane

slowly with the hazard lights flashing, until

you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the

flashers flashing.

If the engine stops, there will be no power

assist to the steering and brakes, making these

difficult to use.

 The brake booster will not work, so the

brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal

will be harder to press than usual.

 Since there is no power steering assist, the

steering wheel will be hard to turn.

Get help from your passengers, bystanders,

etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe

area.

N00860700087

If the operation mode cannot be changed to

OFF, perform the following procedure.

1. Move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position, and then change the

operation mode to OFF.

2. One of the other causes could be low bat-

tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless

entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key opera-

tion will also not operate. Contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

N00836401840

If the engine cannot be started because the

battery is weak or dead, you can start it with

the battery from another vehicle using jumper

cables.

1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch

bands or bracelets that might create an

accidental electrical contact.

2. Position the vehicles close enough

together so that the jumper cables can

reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t

touching each other.

3. Set the parking brake firmly on your vehi-

cle and move the selector lever into the

“P” (PARK) position.

If the vehicle breaks down

If the engine stops/fails

When the engine fails at the

intersection

If the operation mode can-

not be changed to OFF

(vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key)

Jump-starting the engine

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of igniting flammable

gas that may be emitted from the battery,

carefully read this section before jump-

starting the vehicle.

 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing

or towing. This can cause an accident

resulting in serious injury or death and

can damage the vehicle.

NOTE

 Do not use jumper cables if they have dam-

age or corrosion.

CAUTION

 Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-

volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,

both systems can be damaged.

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Jump-starting the engine

For emergencies 8-3

4. Set the parking brake firmly on the other

vehicle. Put the automatic transaxle in “P”

(PARK) or the manual transaxle in “N”

(Neutral).

5. Turn the ignition switch (the engine

switch) on each vehicle to the “LOCK” or

“OFF” position.

6. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at

the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on

page 9-10.)

7. Connect one end of one jumper cable

to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-

charged battery (A), and then connect the

other end to the positive (+) terminal

of the booster battery (B).

8. Connect one end of the other jumper cable

to the negative (-) terminal of the

booster battery (B), and then connect the

other end to the designated ground

location of the vehicle with the discharged

battery (A) at the point farthest from the

battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehicle providing

the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-

utes, then start the engine in the vehicle

with the discharged battery.

10. After the engine is started, disconnect the

cables in the reverse order from the way

you connected them.

NOTE

 Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical

loads. This will avoid sparks and help save

both batteries.

WARNING

 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or

looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP

STARTING!!

The battery might split open or explode if

the temperature is below the freezing

point or if it is not filled to the proper

level.

WARNING

 Make sure that the jumper cables and

your clothing are clear of the cooling fans

and drive belts. Entanglement with the

fans or belts can cause serious personal

injury.

NOTE

 Open the terminal cover before connecting

the jumper cable to the positive terminal of

the battery.

(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.)

 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery

size.

Otherwise heat damage to the cables could

result.

WARNING

 Be sure to follow the proper order when

connecting the batteries, of:



 Make sure that the connection is made

to the correct designated location (as

shown in the illustration) properly. If the

connection is directly made to the negative

(-) terminal of the battery, the flammable

gases from inside the battery might catch

fire and explode, causing personal injury.

 When connecting the jumper cable, do not

connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-

tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-

tery explode.

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Engine overheating

8-4 For emergencies

If you drive your vehicle with a low battery

charge after the engine has been started by

using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.

This can cause the anti-lock braking system

warning light to blink on and off. This is only

due to the low battery voltage. It is not a

problem with the brake system. If this hap-

pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the

charging system is operating properly.

N00836501421

When the engine is overheating, the informa-

tion screen in the multi-information display

will be interrupted and the engine coolant

temperature warning display will appear.

Also “ ” will blink.

If these warnings are displayed:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on

the hazard warning flashers.

2. With the engine still running, carefully

raise the engine hood to vent the engine

compartment.

3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If

the fan is not turning, stop the engine

immediately and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice for assistance.

4. If you see steam or spray coming from

under the hood, turn off the engine.

5. If you do not see steam or spray coming

from under the hood, leave the engine on

until the high coolant temperature warn-

ing goes off. After the high coolant tem-

perature warning has gone off, you can

start driving again. If the high coolant

temperature warning stays on, turn off the

engine.

Charging the battery by using

an external battery charger

WARNING

 Always remove the battery from your

vehicle when the battery is charged by an

external battery charger.

 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away

from the battery because the battery could

explode.

 Keep your work area well vented when

charging or using the battery in an

enclosed space.

 Remove all the caps before charging the

battery.

 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-

sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte

comes in contact with your hands, eyes,

clothes, or the painted surface of your

vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If

electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them

immediately and thoroughly with water,

and get prompt medical attention.

 Always wear protective clothing and gog-

gles when working near the battery.

 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

As your vehicle has anti-lock

brakes

Engine overheating

WARNING

 To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,

jewelry and clothes away from the cooling

fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.

WARNING

 Before raising the engine hood, check to

see if there is steam or spray coming from

under the hood. Steam or spray coming

from an overheated engine could seriously

scald you.

Do not open the hood until there is no

steam or spray.

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Jack and tools

For emergencies 8-5

6. When you do not see any more steam or

spray, open the hood. Look for obvious

leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be

careful as components will be hot. Any

leak source must be repaired.

7. If there is no obvious leak source, check

the coolant level in the engine coolant

reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too

low, slowly add coolant.

8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs

coolant, you will probably also need to

add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen

or remove the radiator cap until the engine

has cooled down.

9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,

up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use

plain water if you have to (and replace it

with the right coolant as soon as possible).

10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it

fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-

ture display on the multi-information dis-

play. You can start driving again when the

high coolant temperature warning does

not come on.

11. Have the system inspected by your autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

N00836601435

The tools and jack are stored under the lug-

gage floor board of the luggage compartment.

1. Lift up the luggage floor board. Refer to

“Luggage floor board” on page 5-226.

2. Retract the jack and remove it from its

installation fitting (A).

WARNING

 Removing the radiator cap could scald

you with escaping hot water or steam.

When checking the radiator level, cover

the cap with a cloth before trying to

remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-

wise, without pressing down, to the first

notch. The pressure in the system will then

be let out. When the pressure is COM-

PLETELY LET OUT, press down and

keep turning the cap counterclockwise

until it comes off.

Jack and tools

Storage

1- Tools

2- Jack

Tools

1- Bar

2- Wheel nut wrench

Removing and storing the jack

To remove

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

How to change a tire

8-6 For emergencies

1. Retract the jack, then return it to its origi-

nal position.

2. Extend the jack and firmly secure it in its

storage area, then lower the luggage floor

board.

N00836901904

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position and turn the ignition

switch (the engine switch) to the “OFF”

position.

4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

set up a warning sign, such as a warning

triangle or flashing signal lights, at an

adequate distance from the vehicle, and

have all your passengers leave the vehicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when

it is raised on the jack, place chocks or

blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally

opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-

ing.

6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench

ready.

(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.)

To store

To retract

To extend

How to change a tire

WARNING

 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the

correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If

the vehicle moves while jacked up, the

jack could slip out of position, leading to

an accident.

NOTE

 The chocks shown in the illustration do not

come with your vehicle. It is recommended

that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep

them in the vehicle for use if needed.

 If chocks or blocks are not available, use

stones or any other objects that are large

enough to hold the wheel in position.

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

How to change a tire

For emergencies 8-7

N00849601341

The compact spare tire is stored under the

luggage floor board of the luggage compart-

ment. It is designed to save space in the lug-

gage compartment. Its lighter weight makes it

easier to use if a flat tire occurs.

N00849701384

1. Lift up the luggage floor board. Refer to

“Luggage floor board” on page 5-226.

2. To remove the spare tire, remove the

installation clamp (A) by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

N00849801532

1. Loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

yet.

Spare tire information

Compact spare tire

WARNING

 Tires, including the spare tire, degrade

over time with age even when they are not

being used. It is recommended that tires

over 6 years old generally be replaced

even if damage is not obvious.

CAUTION

 While the compact spare tire is stowed, the

inflation pressure should be checked at least

once a month to assure that it remains at the

recommended inflation pressure. See the tire

and loading information placard attached to

the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load-

ing information placard” on page 11-3.

 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can

cause an accident. If you have no choice but

to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep

your speed down and avoid sudden steering

or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the

correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to

“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.

 The compact spare tire should be used only

temporarily. While the compact spare tire is

being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem will not function properly. Have the tire

replaced or repaired at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice as soon as possible.

 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-

ing with the compact spare tire.

 Avoid sudden starting and braking when

driving with the compact spare tire.

 Do not drive through automatic car washes

and over obstacles that could possibly dam-

age the underside of your vehicle. Because

the compact spare tire is smaller than the

original tire, there is less clearance between

the ground and your vehicle.

 Because the compact spare tire is designed

only for your vehicle, do not use it on any

other vehicle.

 Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-

ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,

snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the

compact spare tire. Otherwise, you could

damage these parts or other parts on your

vehicle.

CAUTION

 Do not use tire chains with your compact

spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage

to your vehicle and loss of the chains.

To remove the spare tire

To change a tire

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

How to change a tire

8-8 For emergencies

2. Place the jack under one of the jacking

points (A) shown in the illustration. Use

the jacking point closest to the tire you

wish to change.

3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange

portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top

of the jack.

4. Check that the flange portion at the jack-

ing point fits in the groove at the top of

the jack.

Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut

wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar

into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the

illustration.

Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until

the tire is raised slightly off the ground

surface.

WARNING

 Set the jack only at the positions shown

here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,

it could dent your vehicle or the jack

might fall over and cause personal injury.

 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-

face.

Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause

personal injury. Always use the jack on a

flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,

make sure there are no sand or pebbles

under the jack base.

NOTE

 Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near

the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips

out of position.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

How to change a tire

For emergencies 8-9

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench, then take the wheel off.

6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-

tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then

mount the spare tire.

7. Turn the wheel nut clockwise by hand to

initially tighten them.

Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by

hand until the flange parts of the wheel

nuts make light contact with the wheel

and the wheel is not loose.

WARNING

 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the

tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-

ous to raise the vehicle any higher.

 Do not get under your vehicle while using

the jack.

 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it

sitting on the jack for a long time. Both

are very dangerous.

 Do not use a jack except the one that came

with your vehicle.

 The jack should not be used for any pur-

pose other than to change a tire.

 No one should be in your vehicle when

using the jack.

 Do not start or run the engine while your

vehicle is on the jack.

 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires

that are still on the ground could turn and

make your vehicle fall off the jack.

CAUTION

 Handle the wheel carefully when changing

the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-

face.

WARNING

 Mount the spare tire with the valve stem

(I) facing outward. If you cannot see the

valve stem (I), you have installed the

wheel backwards.

Operating the vehicle with the spare tire

installed backwards can cause vehicle

damage and result in an accident.

NOTE

 Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the

compact spare tire as shown in the illustra-

tion, but return to the original wheel and tire

as soon as possible.

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

How to change a tire

8-10 For emergencies

8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground, by rotating the wheel

nut wrench counterclockwise.

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the

illustration until each nut has been tight-

ened to the torque listed here.

65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)

10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.

11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-

ommended tire pressure for your vehicle

is listed on the tire and loading informa-

tion placard attached to the driver’s door

sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to

“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.

CAUTION

 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or

the nuts or they will tighten too much.

NOTE

 On vehicles with aluminum wheels, if all 4

aluminum wheels are changed to steel

wheels, use tapered nuts.

CAUTION

 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to

apply added force to the wheel nut wrench

when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,

you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and

damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.

CAUTION

 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can

cause an accident. If you have no choice but

to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep

your speed down and avoid sudden steering

or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the

correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to

“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.

 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-

cle approximately 620 miles (1,000 km),

retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that

they have not come loose.

BK0277700US.book 10 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Towing

For emergencies 8-11

N00832300033

1. Lift up the luggage floor board. Refer to

“Luggage floor board” on page 5-226.

2. Store the spare tire under the luggage

floor board. To store the spare tire, fit the

installation clamp (A) by turning it clock-

wise.

3. Have your damaged tire repaired as soon

as possible.

N00850001202

Store the flat tire in the luggage compartment.

Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench.

Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.

N00837002026

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

When towing is required, transport the vehi-

cle using a tow truck.

Incorrect towing equipment could damage

your vehicle.

There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area.

Obey the regulations of the area where you

are driving your vehicle.

 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving

after changing the tire, have the tire checked

for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

 Do not mix one type of tire with another or

use a different size from the one listed. This

would cause early wear and poor handling.

To store the spare tire

CAUTION

NOTE

 On vehicles with a T155/90D16 or

T155/80D17 size spare tire, the clamp can-

not be used for a normal size tire.

To store the flat tire, jack, bar

and wheel nut wrench

NOTE

 The clamp cannot be used for a normal size

tire.

 When storing a normal size flat tire in the

space for the spare wheel under the luggage

floor board, the luggage floor board will be

positioned higher than usual.

Towing

If your vehicle needs to be

towed

CAUTION

 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-

cle with a rope.

NOTE

 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.

BK0277700US.book 11 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Operation under adverse driving conditions

8-12 For emergencies

Release the parking brake.

Set the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)

position.

N00837201786

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,

or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking

motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to

free it.

Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.

Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can

cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let

the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the

transaxle before trying again.

If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-

ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck

service.

Towing the vehicle by a tow

truck

CAUTION

 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow

truck using sling lift type equipment (Type

A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-

age the bumper and front end.

Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with

this style.

 This vehicle must not be towed with the driv-

ing wheels on the ground (Type B) as illus-

trated.

This could result in damage to the driving

system.

 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the

rear wheels on the ground (Type C) as illus-

trated. This could result in damage to the

driving system or the vehicle lurching for-

ward while being towed.

If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only

Type D or E equipment.

 [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with

the active stability control (ASC)]

If the vehicle is towed with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position or the operation

mode in ON and only the front wheels raised

off the ground (Type C), the ASC may oper-

ate, resulting in an accident. When towing

the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep

the ignition switch or the operation mode as

follows.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC”

position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.

CAUTION

Towing a front-wheel drive vehi-

cle with front wheels off the

ground (Type C)

Operation under adverse

driving conditions

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

sand, mud or snow

BK0277700US.book 12 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

For emergencies 8-13

 When driving on a road covered with

snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains

cannot be used on your vehicle. There

may be state or local regulations about

using snow tires. Always check the regu-

lations in your local area before using

them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-18

and “Tire chains” on page 9-18.

 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts

or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the

brakes.

 Allow extra distance between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle in front of you, and

avoid sudden braking.

 If a skid occurs when the accelerator

pedal is depressed, take your foot off the

pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the

skid.

 Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock

braking system (ABS). Hold the brake

pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.

Do not pump the brake pedal which will

result in reduced braking performance.

 After parking on snowy or icy roads, it

may be difficult to move your vehicle due

to the brake being frozen. Depress the

accelerator pedal little by little to move

the vehicle when safe to do so.

 Drive as slow as possible when driving on

bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.

N00860600031

WARNING

 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a

stuck position, make sure that there are no

people nearby. The rocking motion can

make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward

or backward, and injure any bystanders.

On wet roads

CAUTION

 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper

than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt

by driving into flood water.

 When driving in rain, on water-covered

roads, or through a car wash, water could get

into the brake discs and make them fail tem-

porarily. In such cases, lightly press the

brake pedal to see if they are working prop-

erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly

several times while driving to dry the brake

pads or linings, then check them again.

 When driving in rain, a layer of water may

form between the tires and the road surface

(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip

on the road, making it difficult to steer or

brake properly. When driving on a wet road:

• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.

• Do not drive on worn tires.

• Always keep the tires at the correct infla-

tion pressures.

On snowy or icy roads

CAUTION

 Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.

The vehicle could start moving when it

breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in

an accident.

On a bumpy or rutted road

CAUTION

 Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-

holes can damage the tires and wheels.

Wheels with low-profile tires or under-

inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-

age.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

WARNING

 Before attempting to restart the engine

after a collision, always inspect the ground

under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel

leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do

not restart the engine.

BK0277700US.book 13 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

8-14 For emergencies

In the event of a collision causing frontal air-

bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-

tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the

engine.

 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your

vehicle be inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any colli-

sion.

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 14 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vehicle care and maintenance

Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2

Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3

View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5

Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5

Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7

Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid ............................9-8

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) .............................................9-9

Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-9

Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9

Brake fluid .......................................................................................9-9

Battery ............................................................................................9-10

Tires ...............................................................................................9-12

Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-19

Parking brake lever stroke (if so equipped)....................................9-19

Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19

Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-20

General maintenance .....................................................................9-21

For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-22

Fusible links ...................................................................................9-23

Fuses ..............................................................................................9-23

Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-27

Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-35

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-35

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-36

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Service precautions

9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00937301531

Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-

serve its value and appearance as long as pos-

sible.

You can do some of the maintenance work

yourself, and the rest should only be per-

formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

If you discover a malfunction or other prob-

lem, have it corrected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

This section describes the maintenance

inspections that you can do yourself, if you so

desire. Follow the instructions and precau-

tions for each procedure.

Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors

Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan

supplements your new vehicle warranties.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for details.

N00937401486

The catalytic converter requires you to use

unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will

Service precautions

A- Cooling fans

B- Caution label

*: Front of the vehicle

WARNING

 When checking or servicing the inside of

the engine compartment, be sure the

engine is stopped and has had a chance to

cool down.

 If you need to work in the engine compart-

ment with the engine running, be espe-

cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.

does not get caught in the cooling fans,

drive belts, or other moving parts.

 After performing the maintenance work,

make sure that no tools or cloths are left

behind in the engine compartment.

If they are left behind, a fire or damage to

the vehicle may occur.

 The cooling fans can turn on automati-

cally even if the engine is not running.

Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in OFF

to be safe while you work in the engine

compartment.

 Do not smoke or allow open flames around

fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-

ble.

 Be extremely careful when working

around the battery. It contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

 Do not get under your vehicle while it is on

a jack. Always use properly rated automo-

tive jack stands.

 Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-

als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice if you

have questions.

Catalytic converter

WARNING

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Engine hood

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

destroy the emission-control effectiveness of

the converter.

Normally, the catalytic converter does not

require maintenance. However, it is important

to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-

verter to continue to work properly.

To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-

verter damage:

 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of

the type recommended in “Fuel selection”

on page 3-2.

 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of gas could damage

the catalytic converter.

 Do not try to start the engine by pushing

or towing the vehicle. If the battery is

weak or run down, use jumper cables to

properly start the engine.

Refer to “Jump-starting the engine” on

page 8-2.

 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug

wires disconnected or removed, such as

when performing diagnostic tests.

 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it

is idling roughly or otherwise obviously

malfunctioning.

 To prevent damage to the catalytic con-

verter from unburned gas, do not race the

engine when turning off the ignition

switch.

 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the

performance is noticeably low, or the

engine has a malfunction such as with the

ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop

driving immediately, slow down and drive

for only a short time. Have your vehicle

checked at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice as soon as possible.

 In unusual situations involving major

engine problems, a burning odor may

indicate severe and abnormal catalytic

converter overheating. If this occurs, stop

in a safe place, shut the engine off and let

the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,

immediately take your vehicle to an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for service.

N00937501650

Use the engine hood release lever (located

under the instrument panel near the driver’s

door) to unlock the engine hood.

Pull the lever toward you to release the

engine hood latch.

CAUTION

 Damage to the catalytic converter can result

if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating

condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-

fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,

have it serviced promptly. Running your

vehicle when it is overheated may result in

damage to the converter and vehicle.

WARNING

 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas

where combustible materials such as dry

grass or leaves can come in contact with a

hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-

lytic converter.

Engine hood

To open

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Engine hood

9-4 Vehicle care and maintenance

Release the lever and lift the engine hood.

Support the engine hood with the hood prop.

Insert the hood prop securely into the opening

under the hood marked with an arrow.

Disengage the prop from the engine hood and

put it back in its retainer.

Slowly lower the engine hood approximately

8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own

weight.

WARNING

 Never use the release lever to unlatch the

engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.

 Do not drive your vehicle unless the

engine hood is locked.

NOTE

 To prevent damage to the engine hood and

wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting

position when you open the engine hood.

CAUTION

 Always insert the support prop into the hole

specially made for it. Propping the engine

hood at any other place could cause the prop

to slip out and lead to an accident.

 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is

lifted by a strong wind.

To close

CAUTION

 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers

when closing the engine hood.

 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed

before driving.

If you drive without the engine hood com-

pletely closed, it could open up while driv-

ing.

NOTE

 If this does not close the engine hood prop-

erly, drop it again from a slightly higher

position.

 Do not push down strongly on the engine

hood. Depending on how strongly or where

you push down, you could create a dent in

the vehicle body.

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

View of the engine compartment

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-5

N00937601808

N00937702082

It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may

need to add oil between the recommended oil

change intervals. Before starting the engine,

check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,

wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.

Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and

check the oil level by checking the upper sur-

face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go

above the line on the dipstick.

If the level does not reach the line which

shows the minimum amount of oil required,

remove the oil filler cap on the cylinder head

cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.

 If you drive with the engine hood left open, a

warning display appears on the information

screen in the multi-information display.

View of the engine compart-

ment

1- Engine oil level dipstick

2- Engine oil filler cap

3- Engine coolant reservoir

4- Washer fluid reservoir

5- Brake fluid reservoir

6- Air cleaner filter

7- Battery

NOTE

8- Continuously variable transmission

(CVT) fluid level dipstick

Engine oil and oil filter

To check and refill engine oil

NOTE

 If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe

off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a

moment and then recheck the oil level by

checking the upper surface of the dipstick.

CAUTION

 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of

oil pressure, which could damage the engine.

WARNING

 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-

age your skin. Prolonged and repeated

contact may cause serious skin disorders,

including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let

used oil touch your skin and wash thor-

oughly after working with it.

 Keep used oil out of the reach of children.

NOTE

 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced

by payload, engine speed, etc.

Good

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Engine oil and oil filter

9-6 Vehicle care and maintenance

Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only

engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-

bol on the front of the container.

If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-

fication symbol, use an API classification SN

oil with the following label.

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-

tainer and tells you two important things

about the oil.

Use engine oil with the proper thickness for

the outdoor temperatures where you will be

driving.

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic

Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel

economy and cold weather starting.

If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-

thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20

grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification

can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors

Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should

be used at the next oil change to maintain

optimum fuel economy and cold weather

starting.

The oil filter should be replaced at the time or

mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

Only use high quality replacement filters on

this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-

tions for Mitsubishi Motors Genuine oil fil-

 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the

vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for

example, repeated operation on rough roads,

in mountainous regions, on roads with many

uphill and downhill gradients, or over short

distances). Consequently, the oil will require

earlier replacement in accordance with the

schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-

TENANCE MANUAL”.

Engine oil identification mark

NOTE

ILSAC certification symbol

1- The upper part indicates the quality of

the oil.

2- The center part indicates the SAE grade

of the oil viscosity.

Recommended engine oil vis-

cosity

API service symbol

To replace the oil filter

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Engine coolant

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-7

ters require that the filter can withstand a

pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Mitsubishi

Motors Genuine oil filter is the best replace-

ment filter.

Follow the installation instructions printed on

the filter.

N00937801653

The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you

quickly see when you need to add coolant.

When the engine is cold, the level of the cool-

ant in the reserve tank should be between the

FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually

stays full so there is no reason to remove the

radiator cap (B) except when you check the

coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze

coolant.

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides

excellent protection against corrosion and

rust formation on all metals, including alumi-

num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the

engine.

If you need to add coolant often, or if the

level in the reserve tank does not drop when

the engine cools, the cooling system should

be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-

cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice for testing.

Engine coolant

To check the coolant level

*: Front of the vehicle

To add coolant

Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long

Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.

*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based

non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and

non-borate coolant with long life hybrid

organic acid technology

FULL

LOW

CAUTION

 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or

any engine coolants that contain them. Using

the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum

parts.

 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-

fers depending on the expected ambient tem-

perature.

Above -31 °F (-35 °C): 50 % concentration

of anti-freeze

Below -31 °F (-35 °C): 60 % concentration

of anti-freeze

You can check the concentration level with a

gauge from an automotive supply store, or

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

service station can check it for you.

 Do not use water to adjust the concentration

of coolant.

 Do not top off the tank with plain water only.

Water by itself boils at a lower temperature

and does not stop rust or freezing. If the

water freezes, it will damage your cooling

system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause

corrosion and rust.

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Air cleaner filter

9-8 Vehicle care and maintenance

The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre-

vent losing coolant, which may result in

engine damage. Only use a Mitsubishi

Motors Genuine Parts radiator cap, or an

approved equivalent.

 Do not overfill the reserve tank.

 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap

that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow

from the reserve tank back to the radiator

when the engine cools down. If you need

to change the cap, use the exact same

kind.

 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-

ator with the proper gauge, and only when

it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-

tents of the reserve tank must be protected

against freezing.

 Keep the front of the radiator and con-

denser clean.

 If the engine coolant temperature does not

rise after the engine is warmed-up, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice to have the thermostat checked,

and replaced if necessary.

N00937901553

The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty

from use and not filter properly. Replace it

with a new filter using the schedule in the

“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL”.

1. Unclamp and take out the air cleaner fil-

ter.

2. Install the air cleaner filter and put the

cover back on in its original position.

3. Put the duct back on in its original posi-

tion.

N00938101145

The continuously variable transmission

(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to obtain the

best performance and longest life. It is impor-

tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the

correct level.

Radiator cap

WARNING

 Wait for the engine to cool down before

opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot

steam or boiling coolant could spray up

from the radiator and scald you.

Points to remember

Air cleaner filter

NOTE

 Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are recom-

mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.

 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make

sure that the hinges at the bottom of the

cover are firmly set.

Continuously variable

transmission (CVT) fluid

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models)

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-9

Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-

mum transmission performance.

Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-

mission.

N00938401308

Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,

add oil as necessary to maintain the proper

level. Fill with the oil according to the fol-

lowing table.

N00915201295

Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as

necessary to maintain the proper level.

Fill with the oil according to the table below.

N00938601401

The windshield and rear window washer fluid

reservoir is in the engine compartment.

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-

vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-

essary.

Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid

level with the dipstick.

When freezing weather is anticipated, flush

out the water in the reservoir by operating the

pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-

freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate

the system for a few seconds to flush out the

residual water.

N00938701301

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level must be between the “MAX”

and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.

Fluid type

CAUTION

 Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-

age the transaxle.

Special additives

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive

models)

Fluid type

Lubricant

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

Super Hypoid Gear Oil API

GL-5

Viscosity

range

SAE 80

Rear axle oil (All-wheel

drive models)

Fluid type

Lubricant

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

Super Hypoid Gear Oil API

GL-5

Viscosity

range

SAE 80

Washer fluid

Brake fluid

To check the fluid level

FULL

EMPTY

BK0277700US.book 9 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Battery

9-10 Vehicle care and maintenance

The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the

brake pads, but this does not indicate any

abnormality.

If the fluid level falls markedly in a short

length of time, it indicates leaks from the

brake system.

If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

Use the recommended brake fluid conform-

ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap

must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water

out.

N00939101979

The condition of the battery is very important

for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s

electrical system working properly. Check the

battery regularly.

If battery performance is suspect, have the

battery and charging system tested by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

The electrolyte level must be between the

limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill

it with distilled water as needed. The inside of

the battery is divided into several compart-

ments. Take the cap off of each compartment

and fill to the mark.

Do not fill above the top line because a spill

during driving could cause damage.

Fluid type

WARNING

 Take care in handling brake fluid as it is

harmful to the eyes, may irritate your skin

and will damage painted surfaces. Wipe

up spills immediately. If brake fluid gets

on your hands or in your eyes, flush imme-

diately with clean water. Follow up with a

doctor as necessary.

CAUTION

 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,

mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This

will damage the seals.

 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different

brands of brake fluid have different addi-

tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-

tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.

 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep

the brake fluid from evaporating.

Battery

NOTE

 After replacing the battery, the electronic

control system data for the automatic trans-

axle, etc., will be erased.

As a result, shifting may be rough.

Shifting will become smoother after several

changes in speed.

Checking battery electrolyte

level

BK0277700US.book 10 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Battery

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-11

The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.

This has to do with its chemical and physical

properties and is why a very cold battery,

especially one with a low charge, will have a

hard time starting your vehicle.

It is recommended that you have your battery

and charging system checked by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice before the start of cold

weather. If necessary, have it charged. This

will provide more reliable starting, and longer

battery life.

To disconnect the battery cable, stop the

engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal

first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-

nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)

terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,

before starting the vehicle.

WARNING

 If the battery is dead, be sure to check the

battery electrolyte level before connecting

booster cables.

 After checking the battery electrolyte

level, make sure the caps are fitted

securely.

 If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace

the battery.

During cold weather

Disconnection and connection

NOTE

 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-

necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-

nal of the battery.

 Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the

battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.

WARNING

 Never disconnect the battery while the

engine is running, or you could damage

the vehicle’s electrical parts.

 Never short-circuit the battery. This could

cause it to overheat and be damaged.

 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away

from the battery because the battery could

explode.

 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-

sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on

nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis-

color them. And if it gets on your skin or

in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-

ness. Please observe the following han-

dling instructions:

• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or

other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft

cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of

water and neutral detergent then imme-

diately rinse the affected parts with

plenty of water.

• If electrolyte gets on your hands or

clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If

electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them

with water immediately and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

 Open doors and windows in any closed

space where you may be charging or

working with the battery.

 Always wear protective clothing and gog-

gles when working with the battery, or

have a skilled automobile technician do it.

BK0277700US.book 11 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires

9-12 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00939201664

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms:

 Cold tire pressure:

• The measured pressure after the vehicle

has been parked for at least three hours,

• The measured pressure when the vehicle

is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after

having been parked for three hours.

 Maximum pressure: the maximum per-

missible cold tire inflation pressure for

this tire.

 Recommended inflation pressure: the

inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor-

mance.

 Intended outboard sidewall:

• The sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears manufac-

turer, brand, and/or model name molding

that is higher or deeper than the same

molding on the other sidewall of the tire,

• The outward facing sidewall of an asym-

metrical tire that has a particular side

that must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

 Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use

on passenger cars, multipurpose passen-

ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross

vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of

10,000 pounds or less.

 Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by

its manufacturer as primarily intended for

use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose

passenger vehicles.

 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

 Tread rib: a tread section running circum-

ferentially around a tire.

 Tread separation: pulling away of the

tread from the tire carcass.

 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread

and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,

bears the load.

 If you are quick-charging your battery,

first disconnect the battery cables.

 In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure

to disconnect the negative (-) terminal

first, and reconnect it last.

 If the electrolyte level is very low, have the

battery checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice.

 Battery posts, terminals and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash hands after handling.

NOTE

 Check each battery terminal for corrosion.

You can prevent further corrosion by wash-

ing with a solution of baking soda and water.

Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or

tightening them.

 Ensure the battery is securely installed and

cannot be moved. Also check each terminal

for tightness.

 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a

long period of time, remove the battery and

store it in a place where the battery fluid will

not freeze. The battery only should be stored

with a full charge.

 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the

filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.

WARNING

Tires

WARNING

 Driving with tires that are worn, damaged

or improperly inflated is dangerous.

These tire conditions will adversely affect

vehicle performance.

These tire conditions can also cause a

tread separation or blowout which may

result in an accident causing serious

injury or death.

 Tires, including the spare tire, degrade

over time with age even when they are not

being used.

It is recommended that tires over 6 years

old generally be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

BK0277700US.book 12 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-13

 Sidewall: portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

 Section width: the linear distance between

the exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations due to

labeling, decoration, or protective bands.

 Bead: the part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply

cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.

 Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

 Cord: the strands forming the plies in the

tire.

 Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the tire

beads are seated.

 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the

bead seat.

 Groove: the space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

EXAMPLE: P215/65R15

Tire Markings

1- Size Designation

2- Service Description

3- Maximum Load

4- Maximum Pressure

5- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code

(TIN)

6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature

Grades

Size Designation

Passenger car tire size based

on U.S.A. design standards

215

Section width in millimeters

(mm)

Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to sec-

tion width of tire.

Construction code

•“R” means radial construc-

tion.

•“D” means diagonal or bias

construction.

15 Rim diameter in inches (in)

NOTE

 European/Japanese metric tire

sizing is based on European/Jap-

anese design standards. Tires

designed to these standards have

the tire size molded into the

sidewall beginning with the sec-

tion width. The letter “P” is

absent from this tire size desig-

nation.

Example: 215/65R15 96H.

BK0277700US.book 13 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires

9-14 Vehicle care and maintenance

EXAMPLE: 95H

Maximum load indicates the maxi-

mum load this tire is designed to

carry.

Maximum Pressure indicates the

maximum permissible cold tire infla-

tion pressure for this tire.

The TIN may be found on one or

both sides of the tire but the date

code may only be on one side. Look

for the TIN on the outboard side of

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the

TIN is not found on the outboard side

then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

 LT (Light Truck) -metric tire

sizing is based on U.S.A. design

standards. The size designation

for LT-metric tires is the same as

for P-metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into

the sidewall preceding the size

designation.

Example: LT235/85R16.

 Temporary spare tires are high

pressure compact spares

designed for temporary emer-

gency use only. Tires designed

to this standard have the letter

“T” molded into the sidewall

preceding the size designation.

Example: T145/80D18 103M.

Service Description

Load index

A numerical code associated

with the maximum load a tire

can carry.

NOTE

Speed symbol

A symbol indicating the

range of speeds at which a

tire can carry a load corre-

sponding to its load index

under certain operating con-

ditions.

The maximum speed corre-

sponding to the speed symbol

should only be achieved

under specified operating

conditions. (i.e. tire pressure,

vehicle loading, road condi-

tions and posted speed limits)

Maximum Load

WARNING

 Overloading of your tire is

dangerous. Overloading can

cause tire failure, affect vehi-

cle handling, and increase

your stopping distance. Use

tires of the recommended load

capacity for your vehicle.

Never overload them.

Maximum Pressure

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

BK0277700US.book 14 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-15

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD

1504

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half

) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differ-

ences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

N00939302008

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for

the safe and satisfactory operation of your

vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause

problems in three major areas:

 Safety

Too little pressure increases flexing in the

tire and can cause tire failure. Too much

pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability

to cushion shock. Objects on the road and

potholes could then cause tire damage that

may result in tire failure.

DOT

Department of Transporta-

tion

This symbol certifies that the

tire is in compliance with the

U.S. Department of Trans-

portation tire safety stan-

dards, and is approved for

highway use.

Code representing the tire

manufacturing location.

(2 digits)

ABC

Code representing the tire

size. (2 digits)

Code used by tire manufac-

turer. (1 to 4 digits)

Number representing the

week in which the tire was

manufactured. (2 digits)

Number representing the

year in which the tire was

manufactured. (2 digits)

Treadwear, Traction and Temper-

ature Grades

Treadwear

Traction

Temperature

Tire inflation pressures

BK0277700US.book 15 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires

9-16 Vehicle care and maintenance

 Economy

The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven

wear patterns in the tire tread. These

abnormal wear patterns will reduce the

tread life, and the tire will have to be

replaced sooner.

Too little pressure also makes it harder for

the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.

 Ride comfort and vehicle stability

The superior riding experience built into

your vehicle partly depends on the correct

tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an

uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little

pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to

respond.

Unequal tire pressures can make steering

your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.

The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor-

mal driving conditions is listed on the placard

attached to the driver’s door sill.

(Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-

ard” on page 11-3.)

The recommended inflation pressures under

normal driving conditions should be used for

the tires listed below.

Tire pressures should be checked, and

adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.

Pressures should be checked more often

whenever weather temperatures change

severely, because tire pressures change with

outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed

are always “cold inflation pressure”.

Cold inflation pressure is measured after the

vehicle has been parked for at least three

hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

after having been parked for three hours.

Cold inflation pressure must not go above the

maximum values molded into the tire side-

wall. After driving several miles, your tire

inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14

to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.

Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the

specified cold pressure, or your tires will be

too low.

Check your tires each time you refuel. If one

tire looks lower than the others, check the

pressure for all of them.

You should also take the following safety pre-

cautions:

 Keep your tires inflated to the recom-

mended pressures. (See the tire and load-

ing information placard attached to the

driver’s door sill.)

 Stay within the recommended load limits.

 Make sure that the weight of any load in

your vehicle is evenly distributed.

 Drive at safe speeds.

 After filling your tires to the correct pres-

sure, check them for damage and air

leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the

valve stems.

N00939601509

Item Tire size Front Rear

Normal tire

P215/70R16

P225/55R18

240

KPA,

35 PSI

240

KPA,

35 PSI

Compact

spare tire

T155/90D16

T155/80D17

420 KPA, 60

PSI

Item Tire size Front Rear

Replacing tires and wheels

CAUTION

 Avoid using different size tires from the one

listed and the combined use of different

types of tires, as this can affect driving

safety.

Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-7.

 On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires

of the same size, same type, and same brand,

and which have no wear differences. Using

tires that differ in size, type, brand or the

degree of wear, will increase the differential

oil temperature, resulting in possible damage

to the driving system. Further, the drive train

will be subjected to excessive loading, possi-

bly leading to oil leakage, component sei-

zure, or other serious problems.

BK0277700US.book 16 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-17

N00939700141

The following maintenance steps are recom-

mended:

 Check tire pressures regularly.

 Have regular maintenance done on the

wheel balance and front and rear suspen-

sion alignment.

 Rotate your tires regularly as described in

the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-17.

N00939800184

Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-

nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help

you know when your tires should be replaced.

Many states have laws requiring that you

replace your tires at this point.

These indicators are molded into the bottom

of the tread grooves and will appear when the

tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6

mm).

When the bands appear next to one another in

two or more places, replace your tires.

N00939901560

To even out the wear on your tires and make

them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-

tion recommends that you rotate your tires at

the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

However, the timing for tire rotation may

vary according to your vehicle condition,

road surface conditions, and your own per-

sonal driving habits. Any time you notice

unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-

sible.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,

damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal

wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-

sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,

wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe

braking.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

find out the reason for uneven tread wear.

The first tire rotation is the most important

one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.

 Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels

should be used, because your vehicle is

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem.

Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks

and sensor damage, as it will not be possible

to install the tire pressure sensor properly.

NOTE

 On vehicles with Electric parking brake,

16 inch steel wheels cannot be used on your

vehicle because they interfere with brake

parts.

Additionally, 16 inch aluminum wheels may

not be used on your vehicle depending on the

type, even if they are Mitsubishi Motors

Genuine wheels.

Consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer with specific questions on wheels that

can be used on your vehicle.

Tire maintenance

CAUTION

Tread wear indicator

1- Location of the tread wear indicator

2- Tread wear indicator

NOTE

 Tire wear indicators can have different marks

and locations depending on the tire manufac-

turer.

Tire rotation

BK0277700US.book 17 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires

9-18 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00940001460

In some areas of the country, snow tires are

required for winter driving. If snow tires are

required in your area, you must choose snow

tires of the same size and type as the original

tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires

should also be installed on all four wheels.

Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling

can be reduced.

Even where laws may permit it, never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

N00940101139

CAUTION

 A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-

rarily in place of a tire that has been removed

during the tire rotation. However, it must not

be included in the regular tire rotation

sequence.

Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation

direction

Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction

Front

 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the

correct direction of rotation, swap the front

and rear tires on the left-hand side of the

vehicle and the front and rear tires on the

right-hand side of the vehicle separately.

Keep each tire on its original side of the

vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure

the arrows point in the direction in which the

wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-

ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the

wrong direction will not perform to its full

potential.

 Avoid the combined use of different types of

tires. Using different types of tires can affect

vehicle performance and safety.

Snow tires

CAUTION

Front

CAUTION

 Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels

should be used, because your vehicle is

equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem.

Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks

and sensor damage, as it will not be possible

to install the tire pressure sensor properly.

Tire chains

CAUTION

 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.

The clearance between the chains and the

body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-

ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-

aged.

BK0277700US.book 18 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Brake pedal free play

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-19

N00940300293

To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn

off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-

eral times with your foot. Then press the

pedal down with your fingers until you first

feel resistance.

Brake pedal free play:

.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)

If the free play is not within these limits, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice for adjustment.

N00940401288

Check the parking brake lever travel occa-

sionally. To check this, pull the lever up

slowly and count the number of clicks of the

ratchet. Parking brake lever stroke:

8 notches (clicks)

(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with

the force of 200 N)

Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by

the ratchet after pulling.

N00940701236

Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean

them regularly to remove deposits of salt and

road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild

detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the

blades and glass areas.

Replace the blades if they continue to streak

or smear.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”

position or put the operation mode in ON.

2. Operate the rear wiper using the rear win-

dow wiper and washer switch, and when

the rear wiper is within the mark (A) on

the rear window, turn the ignition switch

to the “OFF” position, or put the opera-

tion mode in OFF.

Refer to “Rear window wiper and

washer” on page 5-206.

Brake pedal free play Parking brake lever stroke

(if so equipped)

WARNING

 Continued operation of the vehicle with

the parking brake lever out of adjustment

may result in the vehicle moving when

unattended.

Wiper blades

NOTE

 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long

time. This wears out the rubber and can

scratch the glass.

Checking or replacing the rear

window wiper blade

BK0277700US.book 19 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Emission-control system maintenance

9-20 Vehicle care and maintenance

If the blades are frozen to the windshield or

rear window, do not operate the wipers until

the ice has melted and the blades are freed,

otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

N00940800328

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-

control system that meets all the requirements

of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

and Environment Canada. The emission-con-

trol system is made of:

 a positive crankcase ventilation system

 an evaporative emission-control system

 an exhaust emission-control system

To be sure the emission-control system works

properly, have your vehicle inspected and

maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice. This should be done at the time or

mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

These, and all the other “general” mainte-

nance services listed in this manual, need to

be performed to keep your vehicle running

properly and reliably.

You should also have an inspection and ser-

vice any time you suspect a malfunction.

N00940900231

Spark plugs must fire properly to ensure

proper engine performance and emission-

control.

Do not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping. Spark plugs should be replaced at

the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY

AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

CAUTION

 If the rear wiper is not stopped within the

mark (A), the wiper arm will contact the roof

spoiler and you will not be able to lift the

wiper arm. If you forcefully try to lift the

wiper arm, the wiper arm and roof spoiler

could be damaged or the painted surfaces

could be scratched.

During cold weather

Emission-control system

maintenance

NOTE

 To meet government regulations and pro-

mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped

with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).

The engine electronic control module that

controls OBD functions stores various data

(especially about the exhaust emissions).

This data will be erased if the battery cable is

disconnected, which could make a rapid

diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the

battery cable when the engine malfunction

indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or

“Check engine light”) is ON.

Spark plugs

NOTE

 Use the recommended or equivalent spark

plugs listed under “Engine specifications” on

page 11-6. Use of other plugs could cause

engine damage, loss of performance or radio

noise.

BK0277700US.book 20 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

General maintenance

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-21

N00941000040

Check the hose surfaces for any heat and

mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-

cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat

sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check

all the hose connections, such as clamps and

couplings, to make sure they are secure and

that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or

damage, replace the hoses immediately.

N00950100050

Have the valve clearance checked at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the

mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have

adjustments made by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

N00941300173

Check these regularly for damage or leaks in

the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel

tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay

special attention to the fuel lines closest to

high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-

fold.

N00941400187

If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-

aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-

luting the air.

Have the system checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-

ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-

NANCE MANUAL”.

N00941501299

The next pages list the maintenance service

recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-

ration. In addition to the general maintenance

that needs to be performed at the times listed,

there are other parts which do not usually

need regular maintenance.

But, if any of these parts stops working prop-

erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.

Have these items checked if you notice a

problem with them.

If you have any questions, see your autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance.

N00941600059

Good brakes are essential for safe driving.

Check the brake pads for wear. For good

braking performance, replace the brake pads

with the same type pads as the originals.

N00941700076

Brake hoses and tubing should be checked

for:

 Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn

spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is

showing through any cracks or worn spots

in the rubber hose cover, the hose should

be replaced. The brakes can fail if the

hose wears through.

 Improper installation may cause twisting,

or wheel, tire or chassis interference.

Fuel hoses

Intake valve clearance

Fuel system (tank, pipe line and

connection, and fuel tank filler

cap)

WARNING

 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,

do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-

ing from the ignition), flame or smoking

material could cause an explosion or fire.

Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

for assistance.

Evaporative emission control

system (except evaporative

emission canister)

General maintenance

Disc brake pads

Brake hoses

BK0277700US.book 21 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

For cold and snowy weather

9-22 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00941800093

Check the following parts for damage and

grease leaks:

 Ball joint boots of the suspension and

steering linkage

 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft

N00942201118

The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas

from entering inside your vehicle is to have

the engine exhaust system properly serviced.

Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and nearby body areas

for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo-

sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow-

ing:

 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-

tem

 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the

vehicle

 The underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged

Also check the exhaust system each time the

vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,

or required service. Any open seams or loose

connections could let dangerous exhaust

fumes seep into the luggage and passenger

compartments.

 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks

caused by corrosion or damage.

 Check the joints and connections for

looseness or exhaust gas leaks.

 Check the rubber hangers and brackets for

damage.

N00942501124

The hood lock release mechanism and hood

safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and

oiled when needed for easy movement and to

prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose

Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding

parts of the hood latch and release lever.

Work the grease into the hood lock mecha-

nism until all the movable surfaces are cov-

ered.

Also, put a light coat of the same grease on

the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.

N00942601141

The ventilation slots in front of the wind-

shield should be brushed clear after a heavy

snowfall so that the operation of the heating

and ventilation systems will not be impaired.

To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping

on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should

be treated with silicone grease.

It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-

handled spade in the vehicle during the win-

ter so that you can clear away snow if you get

stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping

Ball joint, steering linkage

seals, drive shaft boots

Exhaust system

WARNING

 Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s

exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these

fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.

Check for any of the following

conditions:

Hood lock release mechanism

and safety catch

For cold and snowy weather

Ventilation slots

Weatherstripping

Additional equipment (For

regions where snow is encoun-

tered)

BK0277700US.book 22 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Fusible links

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-23

snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for

the windshield, rear window, and side win-

dows are also useful.

N00942700291

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if

a large current attempts to flow through cer-

tain electrical systems.

In case of a melted fusible link, see your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for inspection

and replacement.

For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse

load capacities” on page 9-23.

N00942801967

To prevent damage to the electrical system

from short-circuiting or overloading, each

individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The

fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-

partment and in the engine compartment.

The fuse block in the passenger compartment

is located behind the fuse lid in front of the

driver’s seat at the position shown in the illus-

tration.

Pull the fuse lid to remove it.

The fuse block in the engine compartment is

located as shown in the illustration.

Press the lock lever (1) and remove the fuse

block cover (2).

N00954801443

This fuse list shows the names of the electri-

cal systems and their fuse capacities.

There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover

in the engine compartment. Always replace a

blown fuse with one of the same capacity as

the original.

Fusible links

WARNING

 Fusible links must not be replaced by any

other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-

ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,

property destruction and serious or fatal

injuries at any time.

Fuses

Fuse block location

Passenger compartment

A- Fuse block

Engine compartment

Fuse load capacities

BK0277700US.book 23 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Fuses

9-24 Vehicle care and maintenance

*: Fusible link

 Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model

or specifications.

 The table above shows the main equip-

ment corresponding to each fuse.

Passenger compartment fuse loca-

tion table

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

Power window con-

trol

30 A*

2 Defogger 30 A*

3 Heater 30 A

4 Windshield wipers 30 A

5 Door locks 25 A

6— — —

7 12 V power outlet 15 A

8 Rear window wiper 15 A

9 Sunroof 20 A

10 Ignition switch 10 A

11 Option 10 A

Hazard warning

flasher

15 A

13 4-wheel drive system 10 A

Stop lights

(Brake lights)

15 A

15 Gauges 10 A

16 SRS airbag 7.5 A

17 Radio 15 A

18 Control unit relay 7.5 A

Interior lights

(Room lights)

15 A

20 Back-up lights 7.5 A

Heated outside

rearview mirrors

7.5 A

Outside rearview

mirrors

10 A

Cigarette lighter/

12 V power outlet

15 A

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

Engine compartment fuse location

table

Behind the fuse block cover

Fuse block

BK0277700US.book 24 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Fuses

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-25

*: Fusible link

 Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model

or specifications.

 The table above shows the main equip-

ment corresponding to each fuse.

The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,

25 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these fuses

burns out, substitute with the following fuse.

7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse

25 A: 20 A spare fuse

30 A: 30 A audio system amplifier fuse

When using a substitute fuse, replace with a

fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-

ble.

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

Electric parking

brake

30 A*

Electric parking

brake

30 A*

Anti-lock braking

system

40 A*

Anti-lock braking

system

30 A*

5 Power seat 30 A*

6 Heated seats 30 A

7Starter30 A*

Heated steering

wheel

15 A

9 Headlight washer 20 A

10 Security horn 20 A

11 Automatic transaxle 20 A

12 Horn 10 A

13 Sunshade 20 A

14 Front fog lights 15 A

Daytime running

lights

10 A

16 Air conditioner 10 A

17 Engine control unit 7.5 A

18 Alternator 7.5 A

19 Radiator fan motor 40 A*

Audio system ampli-

fier

30 A

21 — — —

22 IOD IOD 30 A

Air conditioning

condenser fan motor

30 A*

Battery current sen-

sor

7.5 A

Electric parking

brake/Adaptive

Cruise Control

(ACC)

7.5 A

Headlight (high

beam) (right)

10 A

Headlight (high

beam) (left)

10 A

28 Turbo actuator 20 A

29 ENG/POWER 20 A

30 Fuel pump 15 A

31 Ignition coil 10 A

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

32 Injector 20 A

33 ETV 15 A

#1 — Spare fuse 10 A

#2 — Spare fuse 15 A

#3 — Spare fuse 20 A

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

BK0277700US.book 25 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Fuses

9-26 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00954901167

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off

the electrical item connected to the fuse

and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in

OFF.

2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine

compartment fuse block.

3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,

and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse

block.

4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the

matching tables, to check the fuse that is

related to the problem. If the fuse is not

blown, something else must be causing

the problem. Have the system inspected

by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity

securely into the appropriate slot.

Identification of fuse

Capacity Color

7.5 A Brown

10 A Red

15 A Blue

20 A Yellow

25 A Natural (white)

30 A

Green (fuse type) /

Pink (fusible link type)

40 A Green (fusible link type)

Fuse replacement

B- Fuse is OK

C- Blown fuse

CAUTION

 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than

the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,

foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring

to heat up and could cause a fire.

 If the replacement fuse blows again after a

short time, have the electrical system

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

find and correct the cause.

BK0277700US.book 26 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-27

N00942901434

Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is

off. Do not touch the glass part of the new

bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your

skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy

the bulb when it gets hot.

N00943001197

Replacement of light bulbs

CAUTION

 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after

being turned off.

When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool

sufficiently before touching it. You could

otherwise be burned.

 Handle halogen light bulbs with care. The

gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pres-

surized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching

a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.

 Never hold a halogen light bulb with a bare

hand, dirty glove, etc.

The oil from your hand could cause the bulb

to break the next time the headlights are

used.

If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with

alcohol and let it dry completely before

installing the bulb.

 Do not install commercially available LED

type bulbs.

Commercially available LED type bulbs

could adversely affect the operation of the

vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and

other vehicle equipment from operating

properly.

NOTE

 If you are unsure of how to carry out the

work as required, it is recommended that

these procedures be carried out by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

CAUTION

 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body

when removing a light and lens.

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been

washed, the inside of the lens sometimes

becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same

phenomenon as when window glass mists up

on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-

tional problem.

When the light is switched on, the heat will

remove the fog. However, if water gathers

inside the light, please have it checked by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

Bulb location and capacity

CAUTION

 When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new

bulb of the same type, wattage, and color.

If you install a different bulb, the bulb could

malfunction or fail to come on and could

lead to a vehicle fire.

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 27 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

9-28 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00950302173

Outside

Item

Watt-

age

ANSI

Trade

No. or

Bulb

type

1 - Headlight Halogen

bulb

55 W HIR2

LED — —

2 - Parking light/

Daytime running

light

——

3 - Front side-marker

light

——

Front

4 - Front turn signal light 21 W PY21W

5 - Front fog light 35 W H8

6 - Side turn signal light — —

NOTE

 The following lights use an LED type bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when either light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

• Headlight (LED type)

• Parking light

• Daytime running light

• Front side-marker light

• Side turn signal light

Item

Watt-

age

ANSI

Trade

No. or

Bulb

type

Item Wattage

ANSI

trade No.

or Bulb

type

1 - High-mounted

stop light

——

2 - Tail light — —

3 - Back-up light 16 W W16W

4 - License plate

light

5 W W5W

5 - Rear turn sig-

nal light

21 W WY21W

6 - Stop light — —

7 - Rear side-

marker light

——

Rear

BK0277700US.book 28 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-29

N00950401829

N00901801229

1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.

2. While pulling the tab (B), pull out the

socket (C).

NOTE

 The following lights use an LED type bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when either light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

• High-mounted stop light

• Tail light

• Stop light

• Rear side-marker light

Inside

Item Wattage

1 - Vanity mirror lights (if so

equipped)

2 W

2 - Dome light (front)/Read-

ing light

10 W

3 - LED interior illumination

(Smartphone tray)

—

4 - Dome light (rear) 8 W

5 - Cargo room light 5 W

6 - LED interior illumination

(Front drink holder)

—

NOTE

 The following lights use an LED type bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

• LED interior illumination (Smartphone

tray)

• LED interior illumination (Front drink

holder)

Headlights (halogen bulb type)

NOTE

 When replacing a bulb on the right side of

the vehicle, make sure that the removed parts

do not contact the coolant reserve tank.

*: Front of the vehicle

BK0277700US.book 29 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

9-30 Vehicle care and maintenance

3. Turn the bulb (D) counterclockwise to

remove it.

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00900301227

N00943201359

The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

N00915501243

N00917301779

NOTE

 After installing the cap (A), make sure that

the mark (E) on the cap is pointing upward

and the cap is locked in place. If the cap is

not locked in place, it may become detached

while the vehicle is being driven.

Headlights (LED type)

NOTE

 The headlights (LED type) use an LED type

bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

Headlight aim adjustment

Front side-marker lights

NOTE

 The front side-marker lights use an LED type

bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

Parking lights/Daytime running

lights

NOTE

 The parking lights and daytime running

lights use an LED type bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

BK0277700US.book 30 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-31

N00943401508

1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction

opposite to the side you wish to replace.

2. Remove the screw (A), and then pull the

wheel cut moulding (B) outward to

release the three clips (C).

3. Remove the three clips (D), and then pull

back the splash shield (E).

4. Turn the socket (F) counterclockwise to

remove it, then remove the bulb from the

socket by turning it counterclockwise

while pressing in.

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00943501206

Front turn signal lights

*: Front of the vehicle

CAUTION

 Do not pull the wheel cut moulding (B) more

than is necessary to release the three clips

(C). Otherwise, the wheel cut moulding

could break.

*: Front of the vehicle

NOTE

 When refitting each of the clip (D), first

insert part (G) of the clip into the hole and

then press part (H) into it.

Side turn signal lights

NOTE

 The side turn signal lights use an LED type

bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

BK0277700US.book 31 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

9-32 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00943601991

1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction

opposite to the side you wish to replace.

2. Remove the screw (A), and then pull the

wheel cut moulding (B) outward to

release the three clips (C).

3. Remove the three clips (D), and then pull

back the splash shield (E).

4. While holding down the tab (F), pull out

the socket (G).

5. Turn the bulb (H) counterclockwise to

remove it.

6. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00943701631

1. Open the liftgate.

Front fog lights

*: Front of the vehicle

CAUTION

 Do not pull the wheel cut moulding (B) more

than is necessary to release the three clips

(C). Otherwise, the wheel cut moulding

could break.

*: Front of the vehicle

NOTE

 When refitting each of the clip (D), first

insert part (I) of the clip into the hole and

then press part (J) into it.

Rear combination lights

BK0277700US.book 32 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-33

2. After removing the two screws (A), move

the light unit rearward and remove the

three light unit pins (B).

3. Turn the rear turn-signal light socket

counterclockwise and remove it, and then

pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00929101093

1. Remove the three clips (A), and then pull

back the splash shield (B).

2. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to

remove it, and then pull the bulb out of

the socket.

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

NOTE

 It will be easier to remove the light unit if

you insert a minus screwdriver with the end

covered with a cloth or other object into the

space under the light unit and remove the

highest pin, and then pull the light unit at an

upward angle.

C- Rear turn-signal light

D- Stop light (LED) - cannot be replaced

NOTE

 The rear side-marker light, tail light and stop

light use an LED type bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

Back-up lights

*: Rear of the vehicle

BK0277700US.book 33 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Replacement of light bulbs

9-34 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00944001455

1. When removing the light unit (A), push it

toward the left side of the vehicle body.

2. Use a screwdriver to gently pry up the tab

(B) and remove the lens.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

NOTE

 Fully return the splash shield (B) to its origi-

nal position in the rear bumper.

 When refitting the clip (A), first insert part

(D) of the clip into the hole and then press

part (E) into it.

License plate lights

NOTE

 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-

driver to keep from scratching the lens.

NOTE

 When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C)

first then align tab (D) with its hole.

BK0277700US.book 34 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vehicle care precautions

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-35

N00943901167

N00945100166

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,

perform regular maintenance using the proper

materials and procedures. Be sure to use only

those materials and procedures that meet your

local environmental pollution control regula-

tions. Choose the materials you will use care-

fully, to be sure that they do not contain

corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help

in choosing these materials.

These can all be dangerous, and they all can

damage your vehicle.

N00945200095

After washing the inside of your vehicle with

any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-

lated area.

N00945301237

1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth

soaked in a 3 % solution of gentle soap

and water.

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,

wring it out well, and wipe off all the

soap.

High-mounted stop light

NOTE

 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED

type bulb.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

Vehicle care precautions

CAUTION

 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some

are poisonous and others are highly flamma-

ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their

fumes in a closed space. When you use any-

thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be

sure to follow the instructions. Always open

your vehicle doors or windows when you’re

cleaning the inside. Never use the following

chemicals to clean your vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Benzine

• Kerosene

• Naphtha

• Acetone

• Turpentine

• Paint Thinner

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

Cleaning the inside of your

vehicle

CAUTION

 Do not use organic substances (solvents,

benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or

alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discoloring,

staining or cracking of the surface.

If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make

sure their ingredients do not include the sub-

stances mentioned above.

NOTE

 Always read the instructions on the cleaner

label.

Plastic, vinyl, synthetic leather,

fabric and flocked parts

BK0277700US.book 35 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

9-36 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00945500128

1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-

cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and

keep the interior clean.

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean

the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic

leather should be cleaned with an appro-

priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be

cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a

3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm

water.

2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum

cleaner and remove any stains with carpet

cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by

lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth

and spot remover.

N00945601285

1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a

soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gen-

tle soap and water.

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,

wring it out well, and wipe off all the

soap.

3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-

tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-

face.

N00945700058

To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often

and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your

vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.

N00945800033

Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,

tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other

foreign matters can damage the finish on your

vehicle.

Generally, the longer any foreign material

stays on the finish, the worse the damage.

Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-

ever the finish gets soiled.

NOTE

 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-

tectants containing silicones or wax.

Such products, when applied to the instru-

ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-

tions on the windshield and obscure vision.

Also, if such products get on the switches of

the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-

ure of these accessories.

Upholstery

NOTE

 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat

upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush

over the surface in one direction.

Genuine leather (if so equipped)

NOTE

 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it

with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew

may grow.

 The genuine leather surface can be damaged

if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber

brush.

 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,

alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents

can discolor the genuine leather surface and

should not be used.

 Genuine leather can mildew if not kept

clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

 The genuine leather surface may harden and

shrink if it is exposed to direct sunlight for

long hours. When your vehicle is parked,

place it in the shade as much as possible.

 When the temperature of the vehicle interior

rises in summer, vinyl products left on the

genuine leather seat may deteriorate and

stick to the seat.

Cleaning the outside of your

vehicle

Foreign material

NOTE

BK0277700US.book 36 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-37

N00945901712

Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust

picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-

faces can damage the paint and body of your

vehicle if left on.

Frequent washing and waxing is the best way

to protect your vehicle from this damage.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with

water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of

clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,

wash the vehicle from top to bottom.

Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.

Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham-

ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,

carefully clean the joints and flanges of the

doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to

remain.

Salt and other chemicals used on winter roads

in some geographical areas can have a detri-

mental effect on the vehicle underbody. You

should flush the underbody with a high pres-

sure hose every time you wash the outside of

your vehicle.

Take special care to remove mud or other

debris which could trap and hold salt and

moisture.

After washing your vehicle, wipe off all

waterdrops from the rubber parts around the

doors to prevent the doors from freezing.

Washing

CAUTION

 When washing the underside of your vehicle

or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-

tect your hands.

 If your vehicle is equipped with the rain sen-

sor, place the wiper switch lever in the

“OFF” position to deactivate the rain sensor

before washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the

wipers will operate in the presence of water

spray on the windshield and may get dam-

aged as a result.

 Never spray or splash water on the electrical

parts in the engine compartment. This may

damage them. Be careful also when washing

the underbody to ensure that water does not

enter the engine compartment.

 Avoid automatic car washes that use rotating

brushes. These brushes may scratch the paint

surface and make it dull.

Scratches are more noticeable on darker col-

ored vehicles.

 Some hot water washing equipment uses

high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.

Because hot water can damage plastic parts

and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you

do the following when using such equip-

ment:

• Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches

(70 cm) away from the vehicle body.

• When washing around the door glass, hold

the nozzle at a distance of more than

28 inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the

glass surface.

 Make sure to do the following when using an

automatic car wash, with help from either

this manual or the car wash operator, to

avoid damaging your vehicle:

• Fold the outside rearview mirrors.

• Close the door windows.

• Close the front sunroof (if so equipped)

• Tape or remove the rear wiper arm assem-

bly.

CAUTION

• As your vehicle is equipped with the roof

spoiler and the rear spoiler, check with the

car wash operator before using the car

wash.

• If your vehicle is equipped with roof rails,

check with the car wash operator before

using the car wash.

• If your vehicle is equipped with the rain

sensor, place the wiper switch lever in the

“OFF” position to deactivate the rain sen-

sor.

During cold weather

CAUTION

BK0277700US.book 37 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

9-38 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00946001257

Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or

when water does not bead up on the paint.

Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax

on the painted surfaces. After the wax has

dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.

Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.

You should wax when the painted surfaces

are cool.

N00946100046

If painted surfaces have been severely dam-

aged and lost their original luster and color

tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine

polishing compound. Avoid limiting your

polishing to the damaged surface only; polish

a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing

cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush

the compound from the surface and apply a

coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.

N00946201099

Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat

should be touched up as soon as possible with

touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.

Check body areas facing the road or the tires

carefully for damage to the paint caused by

flying stones, etc. The paint code number for

your vehicle can be found on the vehicle

information code plate located on the front

passenger door sill.

N00946301221

Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.

If the vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black

rough surface of the bumper, molding or

lights, the surface may appear white in color.

In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water

and a soft cloth or chamois.

NOTE

 When the door is frozen, opening it by force

may tear off or crack the rubber gasket

installed around the door. Pour warm water

to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe

off the water after opening the door. To pre-

vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the

doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-

cant.

Waxing

CAUTION

 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds

should not be used. These waxes remove rust

and stain effectively from the paintwork, but

are harmful to the finish of the paint, because

they also remove paint/clearcoat.

They are also harmful to other glossy sur-

faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.

 Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or

paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt

from the vehicle surface.

 Do not put wax on the areas having black

matte coating because it can cause uneven

discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get

wax on them, wipe the wax off right away

with a soft cloth and warm water.

 On vehicles equipped with the power pan-

oramic sunroof, be careful when waxing the

area around the front sunroof opening, not to

put any wax on the weatherstrip (black rub-

ber) and surrounding plastic parts. If stained

with wax, the weatherstrip and surrounding

plastic parts cannot maintain a weatherproof

seal with the front sunroof.

Polishing

CAUTION

Damaged paint

Cleaning plastic parts

CAUTION

 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough

scrubber as these may damage the plastic

surface.

 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-

ishing powder) which may damage the plas-

tic surface.

BK0277700US.book 38 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-39

N00946400052

To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome

parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and

apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the

chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a

commercially available chrome polish.

N00946501249

1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.

2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-

not be removed easily with water.

Rinse off the detergent after washing the

wheel.

3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois

leather or a soft cloth.

N00946600054

The window glass can usually be cleaned

using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner

can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead

insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it

dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.

N00946700068

Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove

grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper

blades.

Replace the wiper blades when they no longer

clean the windshield and rear window prop-

erly.

N00946801082

Clean the inside of the front sunroof with a

soft cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped

away with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral

detergent solution. Wipe away the solution

with a sponge dipped in fresh water.

N00947000071

Never spray or splash water on the electrical

accessories in the engine compartment. This

puts the engine at risk of being damaged.

Do not bring the circumferential parts, the

plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-

ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may

crack, stain or discolor them.

If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,

chamois or the like and an aqueous solution

of neutral detergent then immediately rinse

the affected parts with plenty of water.

 Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-

line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,

paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-

trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,

cracks, or discoloration.

If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe

them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a

mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse

them immediately with water.

Chrome parts

Aluminum wheels

CAUTION

 Do not use a brush or other hard implement

on the wheels.

 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-

sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing

so could cause the coating on the wheels to

peel or become discolored or stained.

 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam

cleaner or by any other means.

 Contact with seawater or road salt used for

de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such

substances as soon as possible.

Window glass

Wiper blades

Cleaning the front sunroof (if so

equipped)

NOTE

 The surface treatment on the inside of the

glass may be removed if a hard cloth or

organic solvent is used.

Engine compartment

BK0277700US.book 39 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 40 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2

Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

N01047101224

This information is provided in compliance

with the requirements of the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides the

purchasers and/or prospective purchasers

with information on reporting safety defects.

DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle

tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades. The spe-

cific grade rating in each grade category is

shown on the side wall of the tires on your

vehicle.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half

) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differ-

ences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

N01047201498

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors

Corporation.

Consumer information (For

vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Uniform tire quality grading

Treadwear

Traction AA, A, B, C

WARNING

 The traction grade assigned to the tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B, C

WARNING

 The temperature grade for the tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination,

can cause heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

Reporting Safety Defects

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Reporting Safety Defects

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

To contact Mitsubishi Motors North

America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or

write to:

If you live in Canada, and you

believe that your vehicle has a safety

defect, you should immediately

notify Transport Canada, in addition

to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales

of Canada, Inc. You may write to:

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of

Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or

write to:

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of

Caribbean, Inc.

call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

NHTSA Headquarters

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE

West Building

Washington, DC 20590

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-

ica, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 6400

Cypress, CA 90630-0064

For vehicles sold in Canada

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-

ada, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 41009

4141 Dixie Road

Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-

bean, Inc.

Customer Service Department

P.O. Box 192216

SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

For vehicles sold in Guam

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Important facts to know in case of an accident

10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

call (671)649-3673 or write to:

To contact Triple J Motors

call (670)234-7133 or write to:

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.

call 684(699)9140 or write to:

N01047301284

We hope you will never be involved in an

accident, but there is always that potential

danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and

drive safely.

 Remain calm.

 Check for injuries. Report all injuries to

the police, and, if necessary, call for an

ambulance.

 Record all the details of the accident. This

will provide you with accurate records of

the accident for discussions with your

insurance company and other persons

who may be acting on your behalf.

 Understand your repair estimate before

approving repairs.

 Choosing the repair shop and the brands

of parts that they use on your vehicle is

your decision.

 Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.

Many times, to save money, your insur-

ance company will recommend imitation

parts that do not meet the original specifi-

cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance

or workmanship.

The strength and integrity built into your

vehicle is the result of a specific design

referred to as “Energy Management”. Indi-

vidual body parts are designed to act as one

unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves

are absorbed by protective panels or are chan-

neled around the passenger compartment.

This important feature is possible because

high tensile steel is used in the panels and

structural parts, something that cannot be

guaranteed by the manufacturers of imitation

parts. All genuine body panels and support

brackets are designed and constructed as

important protection features in the event of

an accident. By replacing body parts with

imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet

original equipment specifications.

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.

P.O. Box 6066

TAMUNING

GUAM 96931

For vehicles sold in Saipan

Triple J Motors

P.O. Box 500487

SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

For vehicles sold in American

Samoa

Pacific Marketing, Inc.

P.O. Box 698

PAGO PAGO,

AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799

Important facts to know in

case of an accident

In the event of an accident

Key information to discuss with

your insurance company

Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-

tection

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Important facts to know in case of an accident

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the

country, State Insurance Commissioners have

begun considering rules on the use of non-

OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops

will have to disclose to the consumer, when

they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-

ulations are not consistent on this point,

remember you have a choice. So, if you want

genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may

have to specifically request them. Make cer-

tain your insurance company understands

imitations are not to be used in the repair of

your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine

Mitsubishi Motors parts.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards

you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

replacement parts are your guarantee that

your vehicle will have all the technological

advantages and maintain the style and protec-

tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors vehi-

cle. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi

Motors parts.

Consumer rights (For vehicles

sold in U.S.A.)

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Specifications

Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4

Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-5

Engine specifications .....................................................................11-6

Battery ............................................................................................11-6

Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-7

Capacity .........................................................................................11-7

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vehicle labeling

11-2 Specifications

N01147401938

Keep a record of the chassis number and

vehicle identification number. Such informa-

tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.

1 - Vehicle emission control information

label

The vehicle emission control information

label is affixed on the underside of the engine

hood.

2 - Vehicle identification number plate

The vehicle identification number is stamped

on the plate riveted to the left front corner of

the dashboard. It is visible from outside of the

vehicle through the windshield.

3 - Air conditioning label

The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine hood.

4 - Vehicle information code plate

The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.

The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-

head as shown in the illustration.

Vehicle labeling

Chassis number

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vehicle labeling

Specifications 11-3

The engine model and serial number are

stamped on the cylinder block as shown in

the illustration.

N01148101642

The tire and loading information placard is

located on the driver’s door sill.

Type 1

Type 2

N01148201252

The certification label is located on the

driver’s door sill.

Engine model/serial number

*: Front of the vehicle

Tire and loading information

placard

Certification label

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vehicle dimensions

11-4 Specifications

N01147501681

Vehicle dimensions

Overall length 173.4 in (4,405 mm)

Overall width 71.1 in (1,805 mm)

Overall height

2WD 66.3 in (1,685 mm)

4WD 66.5 in (1,690 mm)

Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Vehicle weights

Specifications 11-5

N01147602070

*: Vehicles equipped with roof rails

GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle

GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle

Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants

Vehicle weights

Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 4,630 lb (2,100 kg)

Gross axle weight rating

(GAWR)

Front 2,646 lb (1,200 kg)

Rear 2,557 lb (1,160 kg)

Maximum trailer weight

1 or 2 persons seated

With brake 2,000 lb (907 kg)

Without brake 1,250 lb (567 kg)

3–5 persons seated

With brake 1,500 lb (680 kg)

Without brake 1,250 lb (567 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)

Maximum roof load* 110 lb (50 kg)

Seating capacity 5 persons

NOTE

 Vehicle usage condition should never exceed above “Maximum” values.

 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Engine specifications

11-6 Specifications

N01147701609

N01147801365

Battery is a 12 volt type.

Engine specifications

Engine model 4B40

Engine displacement 91.5 CID (1,500 cm³)

No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-4

Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)

Stroke 3.34 in (84.8 mm)

Compression ratio 10.0

Thermostat valve opening temperature 179.6 °F (82.0 °C)

Spark plugs NGK SILKR7H8

Spark plug gap .028 to .031 in (0.7 to 0.8 mm)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

Battery

75D23L

BK0277700US.book 6 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Tires and wheels

Specifications 11-7

N01147901874

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)

N01148002374

Tires and wheels

Tire P215/70R16 99H P225/55R18 97H

Wheel

Size 16 x 6 1/2J 18 x 7J

PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)

Offset (Inset) 1.5 in (38 mm)

NOTE

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.

 These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owner’s manual.

Capacity

Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel

(approximate)

Front-wheel drive vehicles 16.6 gal (63 L)

Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.

All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)

Engine oil

Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-

burst” symbol) on the container.

If these oils are not available, API classification SN can be

used.

Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L)

Oil cooler .11 qt (0.1 L)

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 8.2 qt (7.8 L)

Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on

page 9-8.

Transfer oil .50 qt (0.47 L)

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API GL-5

SAE 80

BK0277700US.book 7 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Capacity

11-8 Specifications

*: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-

nology

Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API GL-5

SAE 80

Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4

Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2

Engine coolant

{Includes .69 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank}

6.3 qt (6.0 L)

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant

Premium or equivalent*

Washer fluid 4.5 qt (4.3 L) —

Refrigerant (air conditioning)

Refer to the “Air con-

ditioning label” on

page 11-2.

HFO-1234yf

Item Capacity Lubricants

BK0277700US.book 8 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Alphabetical index

12-1

Numerics

12 V power outlets............................ 5-211

4-wheel drive operation....................... 5-72

Accessory (installation) ....................... 3-12

Active stability control (ASC).............. 5-84

Active Yaw Control (AYC) ................. 5-81

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) 5-92

Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8

Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning ................ 7-6

Dual-zone automatic climate control air

conditioning ................................. 7-15

Important air conditioning operation tips..

7-2

Air purifier......................................... 7-23

Airbag ............................................... 4-30

All-wheel drive operation .................... 5-72

Aluminum wheels............................... 9-39

Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-81

Arm rest........................................ 4-6, 4-8

Assist grip........................................ 5-225

Automatic air conditioning .................... 7-6

Automatic High Beam (AHB)............ 5-194

Back-up light

Bulb location and capacity .............. 9-28

Replacement .................................. 9-33

Ball joint, steering linkage seals, drive shaft

boots ............................................... 9-22

Battery .............................................. 9-10

Charging system warning light ....... 5-186

Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-10

Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11

During cold weather ....................... 9-11

Specification.................................. 11-6

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)................ 5-113

Bottle holders.................................... 5-223

Brake

Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-7

Brake assist........................................ 5-80

Braking

Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-81

Braking ........................................... 6-5

Hose ............................................. 9-21

Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-76

Parking brake................................. 5-49

Pedal............................................. 5-76

Pedal free play ............................... 9-19

Power brakes ................................. 5-76

Service brake ................................. 5-76

Warning lights and buzzer.............. 5-184

Bulb location and capacity .................. 9-27

California Perchlorate Materials

Requirements ................................... 3-13

Capacities .......................................... 11-7

Card holder ...................................... 5-221

Cargo area cover............................... 5-223

Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10

Cargo room light............................... 5-220

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29

Catalytic converter................................ 9-2

Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive

vehicles............................................ 5-75

Certification label ............................... 11-3

Charging system warning light........... 5-186

Child restraint systems ........................ 4-22

Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-38

Cleaning

Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-35

Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-36

Coat hook......................................... 5-226

Consumer information......................... 10-2

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)...

5-63

Fluid....................................... 9-8, 11-7

Selector lever operation................... 5-63

Selector lever positions.................... 5-66

Sports mode ................................... 5-67

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Alphabetical index

12-2

Convenient hook .............................. 5-226

Coolant (engine).......................... 9-7, 11-7

Cruise control..................................... 5-87

Daytime running lights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-207

Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door

windows)................. 7-9, 7-13, 7-18, 7-22

Dimensions........................................ 11-4

Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-194

Disc brake pads .................................. 9-21

Dome light (front)/Reading lights....... 5-218

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29

Dome light (rear).............................. 5-219

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29

Doors

Lock.............................................. 5-35

Power door locks............................ 5-37

Drink holders ................................... 5-222

Driving during cold weather .................. 6-5

Driving precaution................................ 6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2

Dual-zone automatic climate control air

conditioning..................................... 7-15

ECO mode switch ............................. 5-201

Electric parking brake.......................... 5-50

Electric power steering system (EPS).... 5-84

Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-207

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting

system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-28

Emission-control system maintenance... 9-20

Engine

Compartment................................... 9-5

Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-7

Hood............................................... 9-3

Malfunction indicator light............. 5-185

Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-7

Overheating..................................... 8-4

Serial number ................................. 11-2

Specification................................... 11-6

Engine hood ........................................ 9-3

Engine switch ..................................... 5-19

Event data recorder (EDR) ................... 3-14

Exhaust system ................................... 9-22

Floor console box.............................. 5-222

Floor mat............................................. 6-3

Fluid

Brake fluid .............................. 9-9, 11-7

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

fluid ..................................... 9-8, 11-7

Engine coolant ........................ 9-7, 11-7

Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-7

Rear axle oil............................ 9-9, 11-7

Transfer oil ............................. 9-9, 11-7

Washer fluid ........................... 9-9, 11-7

Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-7

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) .

5-104

Free-hand advanced security transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key).................................. 5-13

Front fog lights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Indicators..................................... 5-183

Replacement .................................. 9-32

Switch ......................................... 5-201

Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3

Front side-marker lights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Front turn signal light

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Replacement .................................. 9-31

Fuel

Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3

Fuel economy................................... 6-2

Fuel hoses......................................

9-21

Fuel selection ................................... 3-2

Tank capacity................................. 11-7

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Alphabetical index

12-3

Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-13

Fuses ................................................. 9-23

Fusible links....................................... 9-23

General maintenance........................... 9-21

General vehicle data............................ 11-4

Genuine parts ..................................... 3-13

Glove compartment........................... 5-221

Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-200

Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-183

Head restraints...................................... 4-9

Head Up Display (HUD) ................... 5-187

Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-199

Headlights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Dimmer ....................................... 5-194

Headlight flasher .......................... 5-194

Replacement .................................. 9-29

Switch ......................................... 5-191

Heated steering wheel switch ............. 5-208

High beam indicator.......................... 5-183

High-mounted stop light

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Hill start assist.................................... 5-79

HomeLink® Wireless Control System. 5-212

Hood lock release mechanism and safety

catch ............................................... 9-22

Horn switch ...................................... 5-209

If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2

Ignition switch ................................... 5-60

Important facts to know in case of an accident

10-4

Indicators .............................. 5-163, 5-183

Information screen display ................. 5-164

Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-54

Inspection and maintenance following rough

road operation.................................. 5-74

Instrument cluster.............................. 5-142

Interior lights .................................... 5-218

Jack .................................................... 8-5

Storage............................................ 8-5

Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2

Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-29

Keys ................................................... 5-3

Labeling............................................. 11-2

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)........ 5-123

License plate light

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Replacement................................... 9-34

Liftgate .............................................. 5-39

Loading information.............................. 6-6

Lubricants .......................................... 11-7

Luggage floor board.......................... 5-226

Luggage hooks ................................. 5-226

Modification of your vehicle................ 3-12

Multi Around Monitor....................... 5-133

Multi-information display.................. 5-144

Octane number ..................................... 3-2

Oil

Engine oil ...................................... 11-7

Rear axle oil................................... 11-7

Transfer oil .................................... 11-7

Operation under adverse driving conditions..

8-12

Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-56

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Alphabetical index

12-4

Overheating ......................................... 8-4

Parking................................................ 6-6

Parking brake................................. 5-49

Parking brake lever stroke ................... 9-19

Parking lights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Polishing............................................ 9-38

Power brakes...................................... 5-76

Power outlet..................................... 5-211

Power panoramic sunroof.................... 5-46

Power windows .................................. 5-43

Puncture (Tire changing)....................... 8-6

Radiator cap......................................... 9-8

Radio

General information about your radio 7-23

Reading lights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29

Rear axle oil................................ 9-9, 11-7

Rear combination lights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Replacement .................................. 9-32

Rear Cross Traffic Alert .................... 5-119

Rear seat adjustment............................. 4-6

Rear side-marker lights

Bulb location and capacity ............... 9-28

Rear turn signal light

Bulb location and capacity ............... 9-28

Replacement................................... 9-32

Rear-view camera ............................. 5-131

Rearview mirror

Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-54

Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-56

Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-27

Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-16

Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2

Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4

S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) ...... 5-70

Seat belt ............................................. 4-13

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-19

Child restraint systems..................... 4-22

Front passenger seat belt warning light.....

4-19

Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-30

Seat belt extender............................ 4-20

Seat belt force limiter ...................... 4-22

Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-21

Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-21

Seats ................................................... 4-2

Arm rest.................................... 4-6, 4-8

Front seats ....................................... 4-3

Head restraints ................................. 4-9

Making a cargo area........................ 4-12

Rear seats ........................................ 4-6

Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-3

Service brake...................................... 5-76

Service precautions............................... 9-2

Side turn signal light

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Snow tires.......................................... 9-18

Spark plugs ........................................ 9-20

Starting the engine ..................... 5-25, 5-61

Steering

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment

5-53

Stop lights

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Storage spaces.................................. 5-221

Sun visors ........................................

5-210

Super-all wheel control (S-AWC)

S-AWC drive mode display ............. 5-71

S-AWC drive mode-selector............ 5-71

S-AWC operation display................ 5-72

Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-30

How the Supplemental Restraint System

works .......................................... 4-33

Maintenance service ....................... 4-44

BK0277700US.book 4 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Alphabetical index

12-5

Tail light

Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28

Tank capacity ..................................... 11-7

Telematics Control Unit (TCU).............. 3-5

Theft-alarm system ............................. 5-41

Ticket holder .................................... 5-211

Tire ................................................... 9-12

Inflation pressure............................ 9-15

Maintenance................................... 9-17

Quality grading............................... 10-2

Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-16

Rotation......................................... 9-17

Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-7

Snow tires...................................... 9-18

Tire and loading information placard 11-3

Tire chains ..................................... 9-18

To change a tire................................ 8-6

Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-17

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).....

5-126

Tools ................................................... 8-5

Storage ............................................ 8-5

Towing .............................................. 8-11

Trailer towing..................................... 6-11

Transfer oil ................................. 9-9, 11-7

Turbocharger operation ....................... 5-63

Turn signal light

Indicators ..................................... 5-183

Lever ........................................... 5-199

USB input terminal............................ 5-209

How to connect a USB memory device ....

5-209

How to connect an iPod ................. 5-210

Vanity mirror.................................... 5-211

Vanity mirror lights

Bulb location and capacity .............. 9-29

Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-35

Vehicle dimensions ............................ 11-4

Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2

Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-4

Vehicle weights.................................. 11-5

Vents .................................................. 7-2

Warning lights .................................. 5-184

Washer

Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-7

Rear window washer ..................... 5-206

Switch.......................................... 5-205

Washing ............................................ 9-37

Waxing .............................................. 9-38

Weights ............................................. 11-5

Wheel

Specification .................................. 11-7

Wiper

Rear window wiper....................... 5-206

Switch ......................................... 5-202

Wiper blades .................................. 9-19

BK0277700US.book 5 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

How to calculate your gasoline mileage

BK0277700US.book 1 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

NOTE

Name of Owner Date of Purchase

Address of Owner Model of Vehicle

Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number

Maintenance record

Service Performed Date

Kilometers

Miles

Inspection and Maintenance Item

BK0277700US.book 2 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

BK0277700US.book 3 ページ２０１９年３月８日　金曜日　午前９時２３分

Mitsubishi 2020 Eclipse Cross

Product's Documents

OWNER'S MANUAL

Specifications

Mitsubishi 2020 ECLIPSE CROSS Questions and Answers

Related Products

Mitsubishi Electric MFZ-KW-VGK Series 3.5kW Floor Reverse Cycle Inverter Air Conditioner MFZKW35VGKKIT

Mitsubishi Electric MSZ-AP Series 5.0kW DRED-Enabled Split System Air Conditioner MSZAP50VGKD2KT

Mitsubishi Electric MSZ-EF 2.5kW Wall Split System Air Conditioner DRED-Enabled Efficient Cooling Comfort MSZEF25VGKDSKIT

Mitsubishi Electric MSZ-AP Series 7.1kW DRED-Enabled Split System Air Conditioner MSZAP71VGKD2KIT

Mitsubishi Electric MFZ-KW-VGK Series 4.2kW Floor Reverse Cycle Inverter Air Conditioner MFZKW42VGKKIT

Mitsubishi Electric 442L LX Series French Door Refrigerator MR-LX442EX-GBK-A